Product Detail Manual AT

User Manual: at

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 502

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

C TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE
A

SECTION

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

CONTENTS
RL4R01A
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 5
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 5
Precautions .............................................................. 5
Service Notice or Precautions .................................. 6
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 6
PREPARATION ........................................................... 7
Special Service Tools ............................................... 7
OVERALL SYSTEM ................................................... 9
Circuit Diagram ........................................................ 9
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 10
Cross-sectional View .............................................. 13
Hydraulic Control Circuits ....................................... 14
Shift Mechanism ..................................................... 15
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION ... 26
A/T Fluid Check ...................................................... 26
Stall Test ................................................................. 26
Line Pressure Test ................................................. 29
Road Test ............................................................... 31
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION .......................................................................... 33
Symptom Chart ...................................................... 33
DTC P1775 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH
SOLENOID ............................................................... 41
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 41
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES .......................................... 44
Component Inspection ........................................... 44
Electrical Component Inspection ............................ 50
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ...................................... 51
Description ............................................................. 51
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ........... 51
Removal and Installation ........................................ 51
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 53
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 54
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ........................................... 58
Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators ............ 58
Rear Oil Seal Replacement .................................... 59
Parking Components Inspection ............................ 59

Governor Valve ....................................................... 59
Throttle Wire Adjustment ........................................ 60
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment ... 60
Control Cable Adjustment ....................................... 61
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............................. 62
Removal ................................................................. 62
Installation .............................................................. 64
OVERHAUL .............................................................. 66
Components ........................................................... 66
Oil Channel ............................................................. 68
Locations of Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and
Snap Rings ............................................................. 69
Disassembly ........................................................... 70
OIL PUMP ................................................................. 83
Components ........................................................... 83
Disassembly ........................................................... 83
Inspection ............................................................... 85
Assembly ................................................................ 86
CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY ................................ 88
Components ........................................................... 88
Disassembly ........................................................... 89
Inspection ............................................................... 90
Assembly ................................................................ 91
CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY ............................ 94
Components ........................................................... 94
Disassembly ........................................................... 95
Inspection ............................................................... 96
Assembly ................................................................ 97
CONTROL VALVE LOWER BODY ........................... 99
Components ........................................................... 99
Disassembly ......................................................... 100
Inspection ............................................................. 100
Assembly .............................................................. 100
GOVERNOR VALVE ASSEMBLY .......................... 101
Components ......................................................... 101
Inspection ............................................................. 101
PARKING GEAR ..................................................... 102
Inspection ............................................................. 102
REVERSE CLUTCH ................................................ 103
Components ......................................................... 103

AT-1

Disassembly ......................................................... 103
Inspection ............................................................. 104
Assembly .............................................................. 105
HIGH CLUTCH ........................................................ 108
Components ......................................................... 108
Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 108
FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES .............. 110
Components ......................................................... 110
Disassembly and Assembly ...................................111
LOW & REVERSE BRAKE ..................................... 115
Components ......................................................... 115
Disassembly ......................................................... 115
Inspection ............................................................. 116
Assembly .............................................................. 117
FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM ASSEMBLY .............. 119
Components ......................................................... 119
Disassembly ......................................................... 119
Inspection ............................................................. 119
Assembly .............................................................. 120
REAR INTERNAL GEAR AND FORWARD CLUTCH
HUB ......................................................................... 121
Components ......................................................... 121
Disassembly ......................................................... 121
Inspection ............................................................. 122
Assembly .............................................................. 122
BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY ...................... 124
Components ......................................................... 124
Disassembly ......................................................... 124
Inspection ............................................................. 125
Assembly .............................................................. 126
PARKING PAWL COMPONENTS ........................... 129
Components ......................................................... 129
Disassembly ......................................................... 129
Inspection ............................................................. 130
Assembly .............................................................. 130
ASSEMBLY ............................................................. 132
Assembly (1) ......................................................... 132
Adjustment ............................................................ 140
Assembly (2) ......................................................... 143
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 150
General Specifications .......................................... 150
Shift Schedule ...................................................... 150
Stall Revolution ..................................................... 150
Line Pressure ....................................................... 150
Governor Pressure ............................................... 150
Return Springs ...................................................... 151
Accumulator O-ring ............................................... 152
Clutch and Brakes ................................................ 152
Oil Pump and Low One-way Clutch ...................... 154
Total End Play ....................................................... 154
Parking Gear ........................................................ 154
Reverse Clutch Drum End Play ............................ 154
Removal and Installation ...................................... 154

RE4R01A
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX .......................... 156
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC ..................... 156

PRECAUTIONS ....................................................... 158
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ............................................................... 158
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System
of A/T and Engine ................................................. 158
Precautions ........................................................... 159
Service Notice or Precautions ............................... 160
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ............... 161
PREPARATION ....................................................... 162
Special Service Tools ............................................ 162
OVERALL SYSTEM ................................................ 164
A/T Electrical Parts Location ................................. 164
Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 165
Cross-sectional View ............................................ 166
Hydraulic Control Circuit ....................................... 167
Shift Mechanism ................................................... 168
Control System ..................................................... 177
Control Mechanism ............................................... 178
Control Valve ......................................................... 183
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................................................................ 185
Introduction ........................................................... 185
OBD-II Function for A/T System ........................... 185
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II ........... 185
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ................ 185
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ......................... 189
CONSULT-II .......................................................... 189
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II ......... 198
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION ......... 204
Introduction ........................................................... 204
Work Flow ............................................................. 208
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION ... 211
A/T Fluid Check .................................................... 211
Stall Test ................................................................ 211
Line Pressure Test ................................................ 214
Road Test .............................................................. 216
Symptom Chart ..................................................... 230
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION ........................................................................ 242
TCM Terminals and Reference Value ................... 242
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY .... 246
Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN ............................. 246
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 247
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP)
SWITCH ................................................................... 249
Description ............................................................ 249
Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ....................... 251
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 252
Component Inspection .......................................... 254
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CIRCUIT .................................................................. 255
Description ............................................................ 255
Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS ............................... 257
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 258
Component Inspection .......................................... 260
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) ............................................... 261
Description ............................................................ 261

AT-2

Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T ........................ 263
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 264
Component Inspection ......................................... 265
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL ................... 266
Description ........................................................... 266
Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS ........................ 267
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 268
DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR
POSITION ............................................................... 270
Description ........................................................... 270
Wiring Diagram — AT — 1ST .............................. 273
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 274
Component Inspection ......................................... 275
DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR
POSITION ............................................................... 276
Description ........................................................... 276
Wiring Diagram — AT — 2ND .............................. 278
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 279
Component Inspection ......................................... 279
DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR
POSITION ............................................................... 281
Description ........................................................... 281
Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RD .............................. 283
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 284
Component Inspection ......................................... 285
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR
POSITION ............................................................... 286
Description ........................................................... 286
Wiring Diagram — AT — 4TH .............................. 289
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 290
Component Inspection ......................................... 292
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH
SOLENOID VALVE ................................................. 293
Description ........................................................... 293
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV .............................. 295
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 296
Component Inspection ......................................... 297
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION . 298
Description ........................................................... 298
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG ....................... 301
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 302
Component Inspection ......................................... 304
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE. 306
Description ........................................................... 306
Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV ............................ 308
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 309
Component Inspection ......................................... 310
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A ...............311
Description ............................................................311
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A .......................... 313
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 314
Component Inspection ......................................... 315
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B .............. 316
Description ........................................................... 316
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B .......................... 318
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 319
Component Inspection ......................................... 320
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ....... 321
Description ........................................................... 321

Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS .............................. 324
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 325
Component Inspection .......................................... 328
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE ..................................................................... 329
Description ............................................................ 329
Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV ...................... 331
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 332
Component Inspection .......................................... 333
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP
SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE). 334
Description ............................................................ 334
Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS ......................... 336
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 337
Component Inspection .......................................... 339
DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR .................. 340
Description ............................................................ 340
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR ...................... 342
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 343
DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR (VG33ER
ONLY) ...................................................................... 344
Description ............................................................ 344
Wiring Diagram — AT — TRSA/T ........................ 346
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 347
Component Inspection .......................................... 348
DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT
(ROM) ...................................................................... 349
Description ............................................................ 349
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 350
DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM) ......................... 351
Description ............................................................ 351
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 352
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS .......... 353
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC ...................... 353
1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On . 356
2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position. 358
3. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed .............................................. 359
4. In N Position, Vehicle Moves ............................ 360
5. Large Shock. N → R Position ........................... 362
6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position. 364
7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position ........................................................................ 367
8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ................. 369
9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 ..................................................... 372
10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 .......................... 374
11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 .......................... 376
12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up ...................... 378
13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition ............ 379
14. Lock-up Is Not Released ................................ 381
15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light
Braking D4 → D3 ) ................................................ 382
16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1 ..................... 383
17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3 , When Overdrive
Control Switch ON → OFF ................................... 385
18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22 , When Selector
Lever D → 2 Position ............................................ 386
19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When Selector

AT-3

Lever 2 → 1 Position ............................................ 387
20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake. 387
21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP,
Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches
Circuit Checks) ..................................................... 387
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ..................................... 395
Description ............................................................ 395
Wiring Diagram — SHIFT — ................................ 396
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 397
Component Check ................................................ 399
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE ...................................... 400
Components ......................................................... 400
Removal ............................................................... 400
Installation ............................................................. 401
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE .......................................... 402
Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators .......... 402
Revolution Sensor Replacement .......................... 403
Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement (VG33ER
only) ...................................................................... 404
Rear Oil Seal Replacement .................................. 404
Parking Components Inspection ........................... 405
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment ... 405
Manual Control Linkage Adjustment ..................... 406
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ........................... 407
Removal ............................................................... 407
Installation ............................................................. 408
OVERHAUL ............................................................. 410
Components ......................................................... 410
Oil Channel ........................................................... 412
Locations of Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and
Snap Rings ........................................................... 413
Disassembly ......................................................... 414
OIL PUMP ............................................................... 426
Components ......................................................... 426
Disassembly ......................................................... 426
Inspection ............................................................. 428
Assembly .............................................................. 428
CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY .............................. 431
Components ......................................................... 431
Disassembly ......................................................... 432
Inspection ............................................................. 433
Assembly .............................................................. 435
CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY .......................... 438
Components ......................................................... 438
Disassembly ......................................................... 439
Inspection ............................................................. 440
Assembly .............................................................. 441
CONTROL VALVE LOWER BODY ......................... 443
Components ......................................................... 443
Disassembly ......................................................... 444
Inspection ............................................................. 444
Assembly .............................................................. 444
REVERSE CLUTCH ................................................ 445
Components ......................................................... 445
Disassembly ......................................................... 445

Inspection .............................................................. 446
Assembly .............................................................. 447
HIGH CLUTCH ........................................................ 450
Components .......................................................... 450
Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 450
FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES .............. 453
Components .......................................................... 453
Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 454
LOW & REVERSE BRAKE ..................................... 458
Components .......................................................... 458
Disassembly .......................................................... 458
Inspection .............................................................. 459
Assembly .............................................................. 460
FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM ASSEMBLY .............. 463
Components .......................................................... 463
Disassembly .......................................................... 463
Inspection .............................................................. 464
Assembly .............................................................. 464
REAR INTERNAL GEAR AND FORWARD CLUTCH
HUB ......................................................................... 466
Components .......................................................... 466
Disassembly .......................................................... 466
Inspection .............................................................. 468
Assembly .............................................................. 468
BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY ...................... 470
Components .......................................................... 470
Disassembly .......................................................... 470
Inspection .............................................................. 472
Assembly .............................................................. 472
PARKING PAWL COMPONENTS ........................... 475
Components .......................................................... 475
Disassembly .......................................................... 475
Assembly .............................................................. 477
ASSEMBLY ............................................................. 478
Assembly (1) ......................................................... 478
Adjustment ............................................................ 486
Assembly (2) ......................................................... 489
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 496
General Specifications .......................................... 496
Shift Schedule ....................................................... 496
Stall Revolution ..................................................... 496
Line Pressure ........................................................ 497
Return Springs ...................................................... 497
Accumulator O-ring ............................................... 498
Clutches and Brakes ............................................. 498
Oil Pump and Low One-way Clutch ...................... 500
Total End Play ....................................................... 501
Reverse Clutch Drum End Play ............................ 501
Removal and Installation ....................................... 501
Shift Solenoid Valves ............................................ 501
Solenoid Valves .................................................... 501
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor .............................. 501
Turbine Revolution Sensor .................................... 502
Revolution Sensor ................................................. 502
Dropping Resistor ................................................. 502

AT-4

PRECAUTIONS
[RL4R01A]

PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”

ECS007IH

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system may include seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. If
equipped with dual stage front air bag modules, the SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the AT
front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and
whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is
included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
D
The vehicle may be equipped with a passenger air bag deactivation switch. Because no rear seat exists where
a rear-facing child restraint can be placed, the switch is designed to turn off the passenger air bag so that a
rear-facing child restraint can be used in the front passenger seat. The switch is located in the center of the E
instrument panel, near the ashtray. When the switch is turned to the ON position, the passenger air bag is
enabled and could inflate for certain types of collision. When the switch is turned to the OFF position, the passenger air bag is disabled and will not inflate. A passenger air bag OFF indicator on the instrument panel lights
up when the passenger air bag is switched OFF. The driver air bag always remains enabled and is not affected F
by the passenger air bag deactivation switch.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
●
The vehicle may be equipped with a passenger air bag deactivation switch which can be operated
by the customer. When the passenger air bag is switched OFF, the passenger air bag is disabled
and will not inflate. When the passenger air bag is switched ON, the passenger air bag is enabled
and could inflate for certain types of collision. After SRS maintenance or repair, make sure the
passenger air bag deactivation switch is in the same position (ON or OFF) as when the vehicle
arrived for service.

Precautions

ECS007II

Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transmission. It is important to
prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
2. Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
3. Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere
with the operation of the transmission.
4. Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly.
5. All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or
reassembly.
6. Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the transmission is disassembled.
7. The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced.
Place removed parts in order, on a parts rack, so they can be put back in the valve body in the same positions and sequences. Care will also prevent springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
8. Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along their bores in the valve body under their own
weight.
9. Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings
and seals, or hold small bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease.
10. Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.

AT-5

PRECAUTIONS
[RL4R01A]
11. If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.) or if an A/T is repaired, overhauled, or
replaced, inspect and clean the A/T oil cooler mounted in the radiator or replace radiator. Flush cooler
lines using cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair. Check Service Bulletins for latest A/T oil
cooler cleaning procedure. For radiator replacement refer to CO-30, "RADIATOR" .
12. After overhaul, refill the transmission with new ATF.
13. When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque
converter and ATF cooling system.
Always follow the procedures when changing A/T fluid. Refer to MA-38, "Changing A/T Fluid" .

Service Notice or Precautions

ECS007IJ

TORQUE CONVERTER SERVICE
The torque converter should be replaced under any of the following conditions:
●
External leaks in the hub weld area.
●
Converter hub is scored or damaged.
●
Converter pilot is broken, damaged or fits poorly into crankshaft.
●
Steel particles are found after flushing the cooler and cooler lines.
●
Pump is damaged or steel particles are found in the converter.
●
Vehicle has TCC shudder and/or no TCC apply. Replace only after all hydraulic and electrical diagnoses
have been made (Converter clutch material may be glazed).
●
Converter is contaminated with engine coolant containing antifreeze.
●
Internal failure of stator roller clutch.
●
Heavy clutch debris due to overheating (blue converter).
●
Steel particles or clutch lining material found in fluid filter or on magnet when no internal parts in unit are
worn or damaged — indicates that lining material came from converter.
The torque converter should not be replaced if:
●
The fluid has an odor, is discolored, and there is no evidence of metal or clutch facing particles.
●
The threads in one or more of the converter bolt holes are damaged.
●
Transmission failure did not display evidence of damaged or worn internal parts, steel particles or clutch
plate lining material in unit and inside the fluid filter.
●
Vehicle has been exposed to high mileage (only). The exception may be where the torque converter
clutch dampener plate lining has seen excess wear by vehicles operated in heavy and/or constant traffic,
such as taxi, delivery or police use.

ATF COOLER SERVICE
If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.) or if an A/T is repaired, overhauled, or replaced,
inspect and clean the A/T oil cooler mounted in the radiator or replace radiator. Flush cooler lines using cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair. Check Service Bulletins for latest A/T oil cooler cleaning procedure. For radiator replacement refer to CO-30, "RADIATOR" .

Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
Refer to GI-13, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" .
●
Refer to PG-9, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" for power distribution circuit.
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
Refer to GI-9, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" .
●
Refer to GI-25, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .

AT-6

ECS007IK

PREPARATION
[RL4R01A]

PREPARATION
Special Service Tools

PFP:00002

A
ECS007IL

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Description
Tool name
(J-34301-C)
Oil pressure gauge set
1 (J34301-1)
Oil pressure gauge
2 (J-34301-2)
Hose
3 (J-34298)
Joint pipe
4 (J-34282-2)
Adapter
5 (790-301-1230-A)
60° Adapter
6 (J-34301-15)
Square socket

Measuring line pressure and governor pressure

AAT546

ST07870000
(J-37068)
Transmission case stand

Disassembling and assembling A/T
a: 182 mm (7.17 in)
b: 282 mm (11.10 in)
c: 230 mm (9.06 in)
d: 100 mm (3.94 in)

H
NT421

KV31102100
(J-37065)
Torque converter one-way clutch
check tool

Checking one-way clutch in torque converter

J
NT098

ST25850000
(J-25721-A)
Sliding hammer

Removing oil pump assembly
a: 179 mm (7.05 in)
b: 70 mm (2.76 in)
c: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia.
d: M12 x 1.75P

NT422

KV31102400
(J-34285 and J-34285-87)
Clutch spring compressor

NT423

Installing oil pump housing oil seal
Installing rear oil seal
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 44.5 mm (1.752 in) dia.

NT091

AT-7

M
Removing and installing clutch return springs
a: 320 mm (12.60 in)
b: 174 mm (6.85 in)

ST33200000
(J-26082)
Drift

PREPARATION
[RL4R01A]
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name

Description

(J-34291)
Shim setting gauge set

Selecting oil pump cover bearing race and oil
pump thrust washer

NT101

(J-45499)
Ring gear stopper

Removing and Installing A/T assembly

LBIA0362E

AT-8

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RL4R01A]

OVERALL SYSTEM
Circuit Diagram

PFP:00000

A
ECS007IM

WCWA0086E

AT-9

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RL4R01A]

Wiring Diagram

ECS007IN

WCWA0145E

AT-10

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RL4R01A]
A

WCWA0088E

AT-11

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RL4R01A]

WCWA0089E

AT-12

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RL4R01A]

Cross-sectional View

ECS007IO

LCIA0279E

AT-13

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RL4R01A]

Hydraulic Control Circuits

ECS007IP

WCIA0157E

AT-14

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RL4R01A]

Shift Mechanism

ECS007IQ

The automatic transmission uses compact, dual planetary gear systems to improve power-transmission efficiency, simplify construction and reduce weight.
It also employs an optimum shift control and superwide gear ratios to improve starting performance and acceleration during medium and high-speed operation.
Two one-way clutches are also employed: one is used for the forward clutch, and the other for the low clutch.
These one-way clutches, combined with four accumulators, reduce shifting shock to a minimum.

CONSTRUCTION

L
SAT026HA

AT-15

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RL4R01A]
FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE
Clutch and brake components

Abbr.

Function

Reverse clutch 6

R/C

To transmit input power to front sun gear 9 .

High clutch 7

H/C

To transmit input power to front planetary carrier 11 .

Forward clutch 16

F/C

To connect front planetary carrier 11 with forward one-way clutch 17 .

Overrun clutch 18

O/C

To connect front planetary carrier 11 with rear internal gear 14 .

Brake band 5

B/B

To lock front sun gear 9 .

Forward one-way clutch 17

F/O.C

When forward clutch 16 is engaged, to stop rear internal gear 14 from rotating in
opposite direction.

Low one-way clutch 19

L/O.C

At D1 position, to prevent rear internal gear 14 from rotating in opposite direction.

Low & reverse brake 20

L & R/B

To lock rear internal gear 14 (2, 12 and 11 ), to lock front planetary carrier 11 (R position).

CLUTCH AND BAND CHART
Band servo
Shift position

Reverse
clutch 6

High
clutch
7

Forward
clutch
16

Overrun
clutch
18

2nd
apply

3rd
releas
e

4th
apply

Forward
oneway
clutch
17

Low
oneway
clutch
19

Low &
revers
e
brake
20

Lock-up

Remarks

PARK
POSITION

REVERS
E POSITION

NEUTRAL
POSITION
1st

2nd

*1A

3rd

D *4
4th
1st

*2C

*3C

2
2nd

1st

2nd

Automatic
shift
1 ←→ 2
←→ 3
←→ 4
Automatic
shift
1 ←→ 2
Locks
(held stationary) in
1st speed
1←2

*1 : Operates when overdrive control switch is set in OFF position.
*2 : Oil pressure is applied to both 2nd “apply” side and 3rd “release” side of band servo piston. However, brake band does not contract
because oil pressure area on the “release” side is greater than that on the “apply” side.
*3 : Oil pressure is applied to 4th “apply” side in condition *2 above, and brake band contracts.
*4 : A/T will not shift to 4th when overdrive control switch is set to OFF position.
: Operates.
A: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, activating engine brake.
B: Operates during “progressive” acceleration.
C: Operates but does not affect power-transmission.
D: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, but does not affect engine brake.

AT-16

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RL4R01A]
POWER TRANSMISSION
“N” and “P” Positions
●

●

“N” position
No control members operate. Power from the input shaft is not transmitted to the output shaft because the
B
clutches do not operate.
“P” position
Similar to the “N” position, no control members operate. The parking pawl interconnected with the select
lever engages with the parking gear to mechanically hold the output shaft so that the powertrain is locked. AT

K
SAT039J

AT-17

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RL4R01A]
“11 ” Position

SAT100J

●

Forward clutch

●

Forward one-way clutch

●

Overrun clutch

●

Low and reverse brake

Engine brake

As overrun clutch engages, rear internal gear is locked by the operation of low and
reverse brake.
This is different from that of D1 and 21 .

Overrun clutch always engages, therefore engine brake can be obtained when decelerating.

AT-18

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RL4R01A]
“D1 ” and “21 ” Positions
A

SAT096J

●

Forward one-way clutch

●

Forward clutch

●

Low one-way clutch

Overrun clutch
engagement conditions
(Engine brake)

Rear internal gear is locked to rotate counterclockwise because of the functioning of
these three clutches (Start-up at D1 ).

D1 : Overdrive control switch “OFF” and throttle opening is less than 3/16
21 : Throttle opening less than 3/16
At D1 and 21 positions, engine brake is not activated due to free turning of low oneway clutch.

AT-19

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RL4R01A]
“D2 ”, “22 ” and “12 ” Positions

SAT097J

●

Forward clutch

●

Forward one-way clutch

●

Brake band

Overrun clutch
engagement conditions

Rear sun gear drives rear planetary carrier and combined front internal gear. Front
internal gear now rotates around front sun gear accompanying front planetary carrier.
As front planetary carrier transfers the power to rear internal gear through forward
clutch and forward one-way clutch, this rotation of rear internal gear increases the
speed of rear planetary carrier compared with that of the 1st speed.
D2 : Overdrive control switch “OFF” and throttle opening is less than 3/16
22 : Throttle opening less than 3/16
12 : Always engaged

AT-20

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RL4R01A]
“D3 ” Position
A

SAT098J

●

High clutch

●

Forward clutch

●

Forward one-way clutch

Overrun clutch
engagement conditions

Input power is transmitted to front planetary carrier through high clutch. And front planetary carrier is connected to rear internal gear by operation of forward clutch and forward one-way clutch.
This rear internal gear rotation and another input (the rear sun gear) accompany rear
planetary carrier to turn at the same speed.
D3 : Overdrive control switch “OFF” and throttle opening is less than 3/16
Throttle opening less than 3/16

AT-21

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RL4R01A]
“D4 ” (O/D) Position

SAT099J

●

High clutch

●

Brake band

●

Forward clutch (Does not affect power
transmission)

Engine brake

Input power is transmitted to front carrier through high clutch.
This front carrier turns around the sun gear, which is fixed by brake band, and makes
front internal gear (output) turn faster.

At D4 position, there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line and engine
brake can be obtained when decelerating.

AT-22

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RL4R01A]
“R” Position
A

SAT101J

●

Reverse clutch

●

Low and reverse brake

Engine brake

Front planetary carrier is stationary because of the operation of low and reverse brake.
Input power is transmitted to front sun gear through reverse clutch, which drives front
internal gear in the opposite direction.
As there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line, engine brake can be
obtained when decelerating.

AT-23

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RL4R01A]
FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVES
Valve Name

Function

Pressure regulator valve

Optimally controls oil under pressure discharged from oil pump in response to driving
conditions.

Throttle valve

Regulates line pressure to throttle pressure corresponding with throttle opening.

Detent valve

Activates throttle valve via spring in response to changes in throttle opening, thereby
regulating throttle pressure.

Pressure modifier valve

Serves as an auxiliary signal valve of pressure regulator valve to control line pressure
in response to driving conditions.

Accumulator control valve

Regulates accumulator pressure to pressure corresponding with driving conditions.

Manual valve

Directs line pressure to each oil circuit selected by the selector lever position.
Circuit

Position
1

P
R
N
D
2
1

AAT681A

Hydraulic pressure drains when the shift lever is in N and P.
●

1-2 shift valve

●

2-3 shift valve

●

3-4 shift valve

Provides automatic shift control in response to driving conditions, such as vehicle
speed, throttle opening, etc. Shift control is accomplished by activating or deactivating
the clutch, brakes, brake bands, etc.

2-3 throttle modifier valve

Controls line pressure to provide optimum shifting point (2nd → 3rd) during partialopen throttle.
(2-3 throttle modulator pressure)

3-2 downshift valve

Delivers throttle pressure in a direction that overcomes 2-3 shift valve's governor pressure while shifting from “3rd” to “2nd” in the “D” position.

Kickdown modifier valve

Controls line pressure to provide optimum shifting points (1st → 2nd) and (2nd → 3rd)
during kickdowns.
(Kickdown modifier pressure)

4-2 relay valve

Operates in conjunction with the 4-2 sequence valve to prevent downshifting from 4th
to 3rd, then to 2nd while directly shifting from 4th to 2nd.

4-2 sequence valve

Prevents 4th band servo “apply” pressure from draining during direct shifting from 4th
to 2nd before high clutch “apply” pressure and band servo “release” pressure in the
same oil circuit are drained.

3-2 timing valve

Engine speed increases in a short period of time at low engine speeds when accelerator is depressed during downshifts from D3 to D2 . However, it takes longer for the
engine to increase speed at high engine speeds. The 3-2 timing valve serves to delay
the band servo “release” draining speed (At this point, the transmission is tentatively
set in Neutral) during downshifts from D3 to D2 at speeds greater than those in the
specifications, thereby providing smooth shifting.

1st reducing valve

Controls low & reverse brake “apply” pressure to relief shocks caused by engine
brakes while shifting from 2nd to 1st in the 1 position.

AT-24

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RL4R01A]
Valve Name
Overrun clutch reducing valve

4th speed cut valve
●

Torque converter clutch control valve

●

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

Torque converter relief valve

Function
Controls pressure that operates the overrun clutch to relief shocks caused during
engine braking.
Line pressure acts on the overrun clutch reducing valve in the 1st or 2nd position to
increase the pressure-regulating point with resultant high engine braking capabilities.

Determines lock-up speed while operating in 4th gear.
Activates or deactivates lock-up system.

AT
Prevents abnormal increase of converter oil pressure.

AT-25

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RL4R01A]

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
A/T Fluid Check

PFP:00000
ECS007IR

FLUID LEAKAGE CHECK
1.
2.
3.
4.

Clean area suspected of leaking, — for example, mating surface
of converter housing and transmission case.
Start engine, apply foot brake, place selector lever in D position
and wait a few minutes.
Stop engine.
Check for fresh leakage.

SAT288G

FLUID CONDITION CHECK
Fluid color
Dark or black with burned odor

Suspected problem
Wear of frictional material
Water contamination

Milky pink

●

Road water entering through filler
tube or breather

Oxidation
Varnished fluid, light to dark brown and
tacky

●

Over or under filling

●

Overheating
SAT638A

FLUID LEVEL CHECK
Refer to MA-37, "Checking A/T Fluid" .

Stall Test

ECS007IS

STALL TEST PROCEDURE
1.
2.

Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add fluid and
oil.
Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until fluid and oil reach
operating temperature.
ATF operating temperature : 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)

SAT647B

3.
4.

Set parking brake and block wheels.
Install a tachometer where it can be seen by driver during test.
● It is good practice to put a mark on point of specified
engine speed on indicator.

SAT513G

AT-26

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RL4R01A]
5.
6.

Start engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in D
position.
Accelerate to wide open throttle gradually while applying foot
brake.
● During test, never hold throttle wide open for more than 5
seconds.
Quickly note the engine stall revolution and immediately release
throttle.
Stall revolution standard

: 2,100 - 2,300 rpm
SAT514G

8.
9.

Shift selector lever to N position.
Cool off ATF.
● Run engine at idle for at least one minute.
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 with selector lever in 2, 1 and R positions.

G
SAT414F

AT-27

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RL4R01A]
JUDGEMENT OF STALL TEST

LCIA0280E

AT-28

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RL4R01A]

Line Pressure Test

ECS007IT

LINE PRESSURE TEST PORTS

Location of line pressure test ports are shown in illustration.
●
Line pressure plugs are hexagon-headed bolts.
●
Always replace line pressure plugs as they are self-sealing
bolts.

D
SAT176G

LINE PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE
1.
2.

Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add fluid and
oil.
Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until fluid and oil reach
operating temperature.
ATF operating temperature

: 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)
G

H
SAT647B

Install pressure gauge to line pressure port.

AAT809

— D, 2 and 1 positions —
— R position —

AAT810

AT-29

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RL4R01A]
4.

Set parking brake and block wheels.
● Continue to depress brake pedal fully while performing
line pressure test at stall speed.

SAT513G

Start engine and measure line pressure at idle and stall speed.
● When measuring line pressure at stall speed, follow the
stall test procedure.
Line pressure

: Refer to AT-150, "Line Pressure" .

SAT494G

JUDGEMENT OF LINE PRESSURE TEST
Judgement
At idle

Suspected parts

Line pressure is low in all positions.

Line pressure is low in particular position.

Line pressure is high.

At stall speed

Line pressure is low.

AT-30

●

Oil pump wear

●

Control piston damage

●

Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking

●

Spring for pressure regulator valve damaged

●

Fluid pressure leakage between oil strainer and pressure regulator valve

●

Clogged strainer

●

Fluid pressure leakage between manual valve and particular clutch.

●

For example, line pressure is:
— Low in R and 1 positions, but
— Normal in D and 2 positions.
Therefore, fluid leakage exists at or around low &
reverse brake circuit.
Refer to AT-152, "Clutch and Brakes" .

●

Maladjustment of throttle position sensor

●

Fluid temperature sensor damaged

●

Line pressure solenoid valve sticking

●

Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit

●

Pressure modifier valve sticking

●

Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking

●

Maladjustment of throttle position sensor

●

Control piston damaged

●

Line pressure solenoid valve sticking

●

Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit

●

Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking

●

Pressure modifier valve sticking

●

Pilot valve sticking

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RL4R01A]
Governor Pressure Testing
1.
2.

ATF operating temperature
3.

Check A/T and engine fluid levels. If necessary, add fluid.
Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until engine oil and ATF
reach operating temperature.

: 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)

Install pressure gauge to governor pressure port.
AT

AAT682A

4.
5.
●

Jack up front and rear wheels.
Set selector lever in D position and gradually depress accelerator pedal.
Be careful of rotating wheels.

AAT875

●
●

Governor pressure is not generated when vehicle is
stopped.
Governor pressure rises gradually in response to vehicle
speed.
Governor pressure

: Refer to AT-150, "Governor
Pressure" .

If not, check governor valve assembly. Refer to AT-101, "GOVERNOR VALVE ASSEMBLY" .

K
AAT876

Road Test

ECS007IU

Perform road tests using symptom chart. Refer to AT-33, "Symptom Chart" .

P POSITION
1.
2.

Place selector lever in P position and start the engine. Stop the engine and repeat the procedure in all
positions, including N position.
Stop vehicle on a slight upgrade and place selector lever in P position. Release parking brake to make
sure vehicle remains locked.

R POSITION
1.
2.

Manually move selector lever from P or R, and note shift quality.
Drive vehicle in reverse long enough to detect slippage or other abnormalities.

N POSITION
1.
2.

Manually move selector lever from R and D to N and note shift quality.
Release parking brake with selector lever in N position. Lightly depress accelerator pedal to make sure
vehicle does not move. (When vehicle is new or soon after clutches have been replaced, vehicle may
move slightly. This is not a problem.)

AT-31

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RL4R01A]
D POSITION
1.
2.

3.
4.
5.

Manually shift selector lever from N to D position, and note shift
quality.
Using the shift schedule as a reference, drive vehicle in D position. Record, on Symptom Chart, respective vehicle speeds at
which up-shifting and down-shifting occur. These speeds are to
be read at three different throttle positions light, half and full.
Also determine the timing at which shocks are encountered during shifting and which clutches are engaged.
Determine whether lock-up properly occurs while driving vehicle
in proper gear position and at proper speeds.
Check to determine if shifting to overdrive gear cannot be made
while overdrive control switch is OFF.
Drive vehicle at 65 to 80 km/h (40 to 50 MPH) with half to light
throttle position (D3 position). Fully depress accelerator pedal to
make sure transmission downshifts from 3rd to 2nd gear.
Drive vehicle at 35 to 45 km/h (22 to 28 MPH) with half to light
throttle position (D2 position). Fully depress accelerator pedal to
make sure transmission downshifts from 2nd to 1st gear.

AAT164A

AAT165A

2 POSITION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Shift to 2 position and make sure vehicle starts in 1st gear.
Increase vehicle speed to make sure transmission upshifts from 1st to 2nd gear.
Further increase vehicle speed. Make sure transmission does not upshift to 3rd gear.
Drive vehicle at 35 to 45 km/h (22 to 28 MPH) with throttle at half to light position (22 position). Fully
depress accelerator pedal to make sure transmission downshifts from 2nd to 1st gear.
Drive vehicle at idle in 2 position to make sure that transmission downshifts to 1st gear.
Move selector lever to D position and drive vehicle at 40 to 50 km/h (25 to 31 MPH). Then, move selector
lever to 2 position to make sure transmission downshifts to 2nd gear.

1 POSITION
1.
2.
3.

Place selector lever in 1 position and accelerate. Make sure transmission does not shift from 1st to 2nd
gear although vehicle speed increases.
While driving vehicle in 1 position, release accelerator pedal to make sure that engine compression acts
as a brake.
Place selector lever in D or 2 position and drive vehicle at 20 to 30 km/h (12 to 19 MPH). Then move
selector lever to 1 position to make sure transmission downshifts to 1st gear.

AT-32

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[RL4R01A]

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart

PFP:00000

A
ECS007IV

Numbers are arranged in order of the inspection.
Perform inspections starting with number one and work up.
Numbers in the OFF VEHICLE columns indicate that the transmission must be removed from the vehicle to perform the inspection.
*: Valve suspected to be malfunctioning
Symptom
Condition
Diagnostic Item

ON VEHICLE

Sharp shocks in shifting from N to D position

When shifting from 1st to 2nd or 2nd to
3rd.

OFF VEHICLE

9. Reverse clutch

ON VEHICLE

1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Control linkage
3. Line pressure
4. Throttle wire
5. Accumulator 1-2
6. Accumulator 2-3
7. Control valve
* Pressure regulator valve
* Pressure modifier valve
* Accumulator control valve

ON VEHICLE
When shifting from 3rd to 4th.
Shift shocks

When shifting from D to 2 and 1 position.
When overdrive control switch is set
from ON to OFF

Shift shocks

When shifting from 2nd to 1st in 1 position

1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Control linkage
3. Engine idling speed
4. Line pressure
5. Throttle wire
6. Accumulator N-D
7. Accumulator 3-4 (N-R)
8. Control valve
* Pressure regulator valve
* Pressure modifier valve
* Accumulator control valve
* Throttle valve & detent valve
* Kickdown modifier valve

1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Control linkage
3. Line pressure
4. Throttle wire
5. Accumulator 3-4 (N-R)
6. Control valve
* 4th speed cut valve
* Pressure regulator valve
* Pressure modifier valve

OFF VEHICLE

7. Brake band
8. Overrun clutch

ON VEHICLE

1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Control linkage
3. Line pressure
4. Throttle wire
5. Control valve
* Pressure regulator valve
* Pressure modifier valve
* Throttle valve & detent valve
* Overrun clutch reducing valve

OFF VEHICLE

6. Brake band
7. High clutch

ON VEHICLE

1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Control linkage
3. Line pressure
4. Throttle wire
5. Control valve
* Pressure regulator valve
* Pressure modifier valve
* 1st reducing valve

OFF VEHICLE

6. Low one-way clutch

AT-33

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[RL4R01A]
Symptom

When shifting from 1st to 2nd

Shift slippage when
upshifting

Condition

Diagnostic Item

ON VEHICLE

1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Control linkage
3. Line pressure
4. Throttle wire
5. Accumulator 1-2
6. Control valve
* Pressure regulator valve
* Pressure modifier valve
* Throttle valve & detent valve
* Kickdown modifier valve

OFF VEHICLE

7. Brake band

ON VEHICLE

1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Control linkage
3. Line pressure
4. Throttle wire
5. Accumulator 2-3
6. Control valve
* Pressure regulator valve
* Pressure modifier valve
* Throttle valve & detent valve
* Kickdown modifier valve

OFF VEHICLE

7. Brake band
8. High clutch

ON VEHICLE

1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Control linkage
3. Line pressure
4. Throttle wire
5. Accumulator 3-4 (N-R)
6. Control valve
* Pressure regulator valve
* Pressure modifier valve
* Throttle valve & detent valve
* Kickdown modifier valve

OFF VEHICLE

7. Brake band
8. High clutch

When shifting from 2nd to 3rd

When shifting from 3rd to 4th

AT-34

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[RL4R01A]
Symptom

Condition

Diagnostic Item

ON VEHICLE

1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Control linkage
3. Line pressure
4. Governor pressure
5. Throttle wire
6. Accumulator N-D
7. Control valve
* Pressure regulator valve
* Pressure modifier valve
* Throttle valve & detent valve
* Kickdown modifier valve
* 4-2 sequence valve
8. Accumulator 3-4 (N-R)
9. Accumulator 1-2
10. Accumulator 2-3
11. Governor valve
* Primary governor valve
* Secondary governor valve 1
* Secondary governor valve 2

When shifting from 4th to 2nd.

Shift slippage with
accelerator pedal
depressed

OFF VEHICLE

ON VEHICLE
When shifting from 4th to 3rd.

OFF VEHICLE

AT-35

12. Torque converter
13. Fluid pump
14. Reverse clutch
15. High clutch
16. Forward clutch
17. Forward one-way clutch
18. Overrun clutch
19. Low one-way clutch
20. Low & reverse clutch
21. Brake band
1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Control linkage
3. Line pressure
4. Throttle wire
5. Accumulator 1-2
6. Control valve
* Pressure regulator valve
* Pressure modifier valve
* Throttle valve & detent valve
* Kickdown modifier valve
7. Accumulator 2-3
8. Accumulator 3-4 (N-R)
9. Fluid pump
10. High clutch
11. Brake band
12. Overrun clutch
13. Low & reverse clutch

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[RL4R01A]
Symptom

Shift slippage with
accelerator pedal
depressed

Condition

Diagnostic Item

ON VEHICLE

1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Control linkage
3. Line pressure
4. Governor pressure
5. Throttle wire
6. Accumulator 2-3
7. Control valve
* Pressure regulator valve
* Pressure modifier valve
* Throttle valve & detent valve
* Kickdown modifier valve
* 3-2 timing valve
8. Governor valve
* Primary governor valve
* Secondary governor valve 1
* Secondary governor valve 2

OFF VEHICLE

9. High clutch
10. Brake band
11. Forward one-way clutch

ON VEHICLE

OFF VEHICLE

7. High clutch
8. Forward clutch

ON VEHICLE

1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Control linkage
3. Line pressure
4. Throttle wire
5. Governor pressure
6. Accumulator 2-3
7. Control valve
* Pressure regulator valve
* Pressure modifier valve
* Throttle valve & detent valve
* Kickdown modifier valve
* 3-2 timing valve
8. Governor valve
* Primary governor valve
* Secondary governor valve 1
* Secondary governor valve 2

OFF VEHICLE

9. Forward clutch

ON VEHICLE

OFF VEHICLE

7. Overrun clutch

When shifting from 4th to 1st and shifting from 3rd to 1st.

When vehicle starts.

Poor power/acceleration

When upshifting.

No engine braking

When shifting from D to 2 and 1 position.

AT-36

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[RL4R01A]
Symptom

Condition

When overdrive control switch is set
from ON to OFF.

ON VEHICLE

No engine braking

When shifting from 2nd to 1st in 1 position.

Too low a gear change point from 2nd
to 3rd and from 3rd to 2nd.

Too high a gear change point from 2nd
to 3rd and from 3rd to 2nd.

1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Control linkage
3. Line pressure
4. Throttle wire
5. Accumulator 2-3
6. Overdrive control switch, overdrive hold
control module (if equipped), overdrive cancel
relay (if equipped), and wiring
7. Overdrive cancel solenoid valve
8. Control valve
* Pressure regulator valve
* Pressure modifier valve
* Throttle valve & detent valve
* Overrun clutch reducing valve

OFF VEHICLE

9. Overrun clutch

ON VEHICLE

1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Control linkage
3. Line pressure
4. Throttle wire
6. Control valve
* Pressure regulator valve
* Pressure modifier valve
* Throttle valve & detent valve
* 1st reducing valve

OFF VEHICLE

7. Overrun clutch
8. Low & reverse clutch

ON VEHICLE

1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Line pressure
3. Governor pressure
4. Throttle wire
5. Control valve
* 2-3 throttle modifier valve
6. Governor valve
* Primary governor valve
* Secondary governor valve 1
* Secondary governor valve 2

ON VEHICLE

Shift quality

Too low a gear change point from 2nd
to 1st in 1 position.

Diagnostic Item

ON VEHICLE

AT-37

1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Line pressure
3. Governor pressure
4. Throttle wire
5. Control valve
* 2-3 shift valve
* 2-3 throttle modifier valve
6. Governor valve
* Primary governor valve
* Secondary governor valve 1
* Secondary governor valve 2
1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Line pressure
3. Governor pressure
4. Throttle wire
5. Control valve
* Pressure regulator valve
* Pressure modifier valve
* Throttle valve & detent valve
* 1st reducing valve
6. Governor valve
* Primary governor valve
* Secondary governor valve 1
* Secondary governor valve 2

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[RL4R01A]
Symptom

Condition

Too high a gear change point from 2nd
to 1st in 1 position.

Failure to change gear from 4th to 2nd
with accelerator pedal depressed.

Shift quality

Failure to change gear from 3rd to 2nd
with accelerator pedal depressed.

Failure to change gear from 1st to 2nd
in D and 2 position.

Vehicle does not start from 1st in D
and 2 position.

Diagnostic Item

ON VEHICLE

1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Line pressure
3. Governor pressure
4. Throttle wire
5. Control valve
* 1st reducing valve
6. Governor valve
* Primary governor valve
* Secondary governor valve 1
* Secondary governor valve 2

ON VEHICLE

1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Line pressure
3. Governor pressure
4. Throttle wire
5. Control valve
* 4-2 relay valve
* 4-2 sequence valve
6. Governor valve
* Primary governor valve
* Secondary governor valve 1
* Secondary governor valve 2

ON VEHICLE

1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Line pressure
3. Governor pressure
4. Throttle wire
5. Control valve
* 3-2 downshift valve
6. Governor valve
* Primary governor valve
* Secondary governor valve 1
* Secondary governor valve 2

ON VEHICLE

1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Line pressure
3. Governor pressure
4. Throttle wire
5. Control valve
* 1-2 shift valve
6. Governor valve
* Primary governor valve
* Secondary governor valve 1
* Secondary governor valve 2

ON VEHICLE

AT-38

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[RL4R01A]
Symptom

Condition

Failure to change gear to 3rd to 4th in
D position.

Changes gear to 1st directly when
selector lever is set from D to 1 position.

ON VEHICLE

Shift quality

Changes gear to 2nd in 1 position.

ON VEHICLE

Too high or low a change point when
lock-up operates.

ON VEHICLE

AT-39

Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Line pressure
3. Governor pressure
4. Throttle wire
5. Overdrive control switch, overdrive hold
control module (if equipped), overdrive cancel
relay (if equipped), and wiring
6. Overdrive cancel solenoid valve
7. Control valve
* 2-3 shift valve
* 3-4 shift valve
8. Governor valve
* Primary governor valve
* Secondary governor valve 1
* Secondary governor valve 2
1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Line pressure
3. Governor pressure
4. Throttle wire
5. Control valve
* 1st reducing valve
6. Governor valve
* Primary governor valve
* Secondary governor valve 1
* Secondary governor valve 2
1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Line pressure
3. Governor pressure
4. Throttle wire
5. Control valve
* Pressure regulator valve
* Pressure modifier valve
* Throttle valve & detent valve
* 1st reducing valve
6. Governor valve
* Primary governor valve
* Secondary governor valve 1
* Secondary governor valve 2
1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Line pressure
3. Governor pressure
4. Throttle wire
5. Control valve
* Pressure regulator valve
* Pressure modifier valve
* Throttle valve & detent valve
* Kickdown modifier valve
6. Governor valve
* Primary governor valve
* Secondary governor valve 1
* Secondary governor valve 2

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[RL4R01A]
Symptom

Condition

Lock-up point is extremely high or low.

ON VEHICLE

1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Line pressure
3. Governor pressure
4. Throttle wire
5. Control valve
* 4th speed cut valve
* Pressure regulator valve
* Pressure modifier valve
* Torque converter clutch control valve
* Throttle valve & detent valve
6. Governor valve
* Primary governor valve
* Secondary governor valve 1
* Secondary governor valve 2

ON VEHICLE

1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Line pressure
3. Governor pressure
4. Throttle wire
5. Control valve
* 4th speed cut valve
* Torque converter clutch control valve
6. Governor valve
* Primary governor valve
* Secondary governor valve 1
* Secondary governor valve 2

OFF VEHICLE

7. Torque converter

ON VEHICLE

1. Fluid level and fluid quality
2. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

ON VEHICLE

1. Ignition switch and starter motor
2. Control linkage
3. PNP switch and wiring

ON VEHICLE

1. Control linkage

OFF VEHICLE

2. Parking components

Lock-up quality

Torque converter does not lock-up.

Lock-up is not released when accelerator pedal is released.
Engine does not start in P and N positions, or engine starts in
positions other than P and N positions.
Vehicle moves with selector lever in P position.

Diagnostic Item

AT-40

DTC P1775 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID
[RL4R01A]

DTC P1775 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID
Diagnostic Procedure

PFP:31940

A
ECS007IW

When the malfunction indicator lamp indicates DTC P1775, refer to
EC-524, "DTC P1775 TCC SOLENOID VALVE" .

D
AAT127A

1. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect ECM harness connector and torque converter clutch solenoid valve harness connector.
Check resistance between solenoid valve unit harness connector E36 terminal 3 and ECM harness connector F29 terminal 115.
Resistance

: Approximately 0Ω

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between ECM and torque
converter clutch solenoid valve.

J
AAT128A

2. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between solenoid valve unit harness connector E36 terminal 1 and ground.
Voltage

: Battery voltage

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.

AAT129A

AT-41

DTC P1775 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID
[RL4R01A]

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
Ignition switch and fuse
Refer to PG-9, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" .
●
Harness continuity between fuse and torque converter clutch solenoid valve.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.

4. CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE (RESISTANCE)
Check resistance between solenoid valve unit connector E36 terminals 1 and 3.
Resistance

: Approximately 25Ω

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace torque converter clutch solenoid valve.

AAT130A

5. CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE (OPERATION)
1. Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Refer to AT-62, "Removal" .
2. Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace torque converter clutch solenoid valve.

AAT131A

AT-42

DTC P1775 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID
[RL4R01A]

6. CHECK CONTROL VALVE

1.
2.

Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-88, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" .
Check torque converter clutch control valve.
–
Valve, and sleeve slide along valve bore under their own weight.
–
Valve, and sleeve are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
–
Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.
–
Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair control valve.

F
SAT740H

7. CHECK MALFUNCTION

Is malfunction eliminated?
Yes or No
Yes
>> INSPECTION END.
No
>> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.

AT-43

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
[RL4R01A]

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Component Inspection

PFP:00004
ECS007IX

OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH AND OVERDRIVE CANCEL SOLENOID VALVE

WCIA0158E

1. CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
(Do not start engine).
Press and release overdrive control switch.
Resistance

: Approximately 25Ω

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK OVERDRIVE CANCEL RELAY
Refer to AT-50, "OVERDRIVE CANCEL RELAY"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace overdrive cancel relay.

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
●
O/D OFF indicator lamp
Refer to DI-25, "WARNING LAMPS" .
●
Ignition switch and fuse for overdrive hold control module and overdrive cancel solenoid
Refer to PG-9, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-44

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
[RL4R01A]

4. CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH

Check continuity between overdrive control switch terminals 1 and 2.
B

D
LAT500

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace overdrive control switch.

5. CHECK OVERDRIVE CANCEL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT
Check resistance between overdrive cancel solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance

: Approximately 25Ω

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace overdrive cancel solenoid valve.

J
AAT132A

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following items:
1. Harness continuity between fuse and overdrive cancel solenoid valve
2. Harness continuity between fuse and overdrive hold control module
3. Harness continuity between overdrive cancel solenoid valve and overdrive cancel relay
4. Condition of diode
5. Harness continuity between overdrive hold control module and overdrive cancel relay
6. Harness continuity between overdrive hold control module and overdrive control switch
7. Harness continuity between overdrive hold control module and ground
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace overdrive hold control module.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-45

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
[RL4R01A]
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH

AAT133A

1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT STEP 1
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
(Do not start engine).
Check voltage between ECM harness connector F29 terminal 22 and ground while moving selector lever
through each position.
P, N position
R, D, 2, 1 position

: 0V
: Approximately 5V

OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> GO TO 2.

AAT148A

AT-46

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
[RL4R01A]

2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR PNP SWITCH

1.
2.

Disconnect PNP switch harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
(Do not start engine).
Do approximately 12 volts exist between PNP switch harness connector E35 terminal 1 and body ground?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> Check 10A fuse (No. 11, located in the fuse block), harness and connector. Refer to PG-9, "POWER SUPPLY
ROUTING" .

E
AAT519A

3. CHECK PNP SWITCH
●
●

Check continuity in N and P positions.
With manual lever held in each position, turn manual shaft 1.5° in both directions (When manual lever is in
each position, continuity normally exists within 1.5° range). If continuity does not exist equally in either
direction, properly adjust PNP switch. Refer to AT-60, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" .

LAT394

AAT520A

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace PNP switch.

AT-47

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
[RL4R01A]

4. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR PNP RELAY
1. Reconnect PNP switch harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Disconnect PNP relay harness connector.
4. Put selector lever in P or N position.
Do approximately 12 volts exist between PNP relay harness connector E27 terminal 2 and body ground?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 6.
No
>> GO TO 5.

AAT521A

5. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT STEP 2
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect PNP switch harness connector E35. Check circuit continuity between PNP switch harness
connector E35 terminal 2 and PNP relay harness connector E27 terminal 2.
Continuity should exist.

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.

AAT522A

6. CHECK BODY GROUND CIRCUIT FOR PNP RELAY
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Does continuity exist between PNP relay E27 terminals (1, 6) and body ground?
Continuity should exist.

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.

AAT523A

AT-48

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
[RL4R01A]

7. CHECK PNP RELAY

Check continuity between terminals 6 and 7.
B

D
AAT124A

H
MTBL0198

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace PNP relay.

8. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT STEP 3
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check circuit continuity between ECM harness connector F27 terminal 22 and PNP relay harness connector E27 terminal 7.

Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.

AAT524A

AT-49

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
[RL4R01A]

Electrical Component Inspection

ECS007IY

OVERDRIVE CANCEL RELAY
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5.
Conditions

Continuity

12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2

Yes

No current supply

If NG, replace relay.

SEF090M

AT-50

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[RL4R01A]

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Description
●

●

PFP:34950

A
ECS007IZ

The mechanical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock:
With the key switch turned to ON, the selector lever cannot be shifted from P (Park) to any other position B
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from P to any other position.
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in P.
AT
The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock solenoid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder, respectively.

Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location

ECS007J0

L
AAT149A

Removal and Installation

ECS007J1

SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Remove lower instrument cover LH and knee protector.
Remove steering column covers.
Disconnect A/T device connector.
Remove two screws and two nuts attaching steering column.
Disconnect shift lock rod.
Remove shift control cable.
Remove two bolts attaching shift control tube and remove shift control tube.
Remove two screws from shift lock solenoid and two screws from park position switch.

AT-51

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[RL4R01A]
SHIFT LOCK ROD

AAT683A

Removal
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition key to ACC position.
Unlock slider by squeezing lock tabs.
Remove shift lock rod from key interlock rod.

Installation and Adjustment
1. Place selector lever in P (Park) position.
2. Turn ignition key to ACC position.
3. Insert shift lock rod into slider.
4. Grab key interlock rod and push toward shift lock rod to adjust.
Do not hold shift lock rod.
5. Lock slider into position.
6. Test shift lock operation.

AAT163A

AT-52

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[RL4R01A]

Wiring Diagram

ECS007J2

WCWA0113E

AT-53

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[RL4R01A]

Diagnostic Procedure

ECS007J3

SYMPTOM 1:
●
Selector lever cannot be moved from P position with key in ON position and brake pedal applied.
●
Selector lever can be moved from P position with key in ON position and brake pedal released.
●
Selector lever can be moved from P position when key is removed from key cylinder.
SYMPTOM 2:
●
Ignition key cannot be removed when selector lever is set to P position.
●
Ignition key can be removed when selector lever is set to any position except P.

1. CHECK SHIFT LOCK ROD
Check shift lock rod for damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair shift lock rod. Refer to AT-52, "SHIFT LOCK ROD" .

2. CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION
Check selector lever position indicator and selector lever for damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check selector lever. Refer to AT-60, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" and AT61, "Control Cable Adjustment" .

3. CHECK POWER SOURCE
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
(Do not start engine.)
Check voltage between A/T shift lock switch (ASCD brake switch) harness connector M48 terminal 1 and
ground.
Voltage

: Battery voltage

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.

AAT140A

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items:
7.5A fuse (No. 5, located in the fuse block)
●
Harness for short or open between fuse and A/T shift lock switch (ASCD brake switch) harness connector
terminal 1
●
Ignition switch. Refer to PG-14, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
●

AT-54

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[RL4R01A]

5. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL [A/T SHIFT LOCK SWITCH (ASCD BRAKE SWITCH)]
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON.
(Do not start engine.)
Check voltage between A/T device harness connector M35, terminal 2 (B/W) and ground.

E
WAT524

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 6.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check the following items:
●
Harness for short or open between A/T device harness connector M35 terminal 2 and A/T shift lock switch
(ASCD brake switch) harness connector terminal 2
●
A/T shift lock switch (ASCD brake switch)
Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2

AAT145A

MTBL0208

Check A/T shift lock switch (ASCD brake switch) after adjusting brake pedal. Refer to BR-7,
"BRAKE PEDAL AND BRACKET" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-55

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[RL4R01A]

7. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/T device harness connector.
Check continuity between A/T device harness connector M35 terminal 1 and ground.
Continuity should exist.

If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.

AAT142A

8. CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH
●

Check continuity between A/T device harness connector M35 terminal 1 (B) and park position switch harness connector S1 terminal 2 (L).

WAT333

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace park position switch.

9. CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
●

Check operation by applying battery voltage to A/T device connector M35 terminal 2 (B/W) and shift lock
solenoid harness connector S1 terminal 2 (B).

WAT334

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> Replace shift lock solenoid.

AT-56

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[RL4R01A]

10. CHECK SHIFT LOCK OPERATION

1. Reconnect A/T device harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch from OFF to ON position. (Do not start engine.)
3. Recheck shift lock operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> 1. Perform A/T device input/output signal inspection test.
2. If NG, recheck harness connector connection.

AT-57

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
[RL4R01A]

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators

PFP:00000
ECS007J4

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Drain ATF from drain plug.
Remove oil pan and gasket.
Remove oil strainer.
Disconnect harness connector.

SAT103C

Remove control valve assembly by removing fixing bolts.

SAT714C

Bolt length and location
Bolt symbol

mm (in)

33 (1.30)

45 (1.77)

Be careful not to drop manual valve out of valve body.
Remove solenoids and valves from valve body if necessary.
Remove terminal cord assembly if necessary.
●

6.
7.

AT-58

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
[RL4R01A]
8.

Remove accumulators A , B , C and D by applying compressed
air if necessary.
● Hold each piston with a rag.
Reinstall any part removed.
● Always use new sealing parts.
● Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing
bolts.
● After installing control valve assembly, make sure that
selector lever can be moved to all positions.

AT
SAT074BA

Rear Oil Seal Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.

ECS007J5

Remove propeller shaft from vehicle. Refer to PR-8, "Removal
and Installation" .
Remove rear oil seal.
Install rear oil seal.
● Apply ATF before installing.
Reinstall any part removed.

G
SAT614G

Parking Components Inspection
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

ECS007J6

Remove propeller shaft from vehicle. Refer to PR-8, "Removal
and Installation" .
Support A/T assembly with a jack.
Remove rear engine mounting member.
Remove rear extension from transmission case.
Replace parking components if necessary.
Reinstall any part removed.
● Always use new sealing parts.

K
SAT107C

Governor Valve
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

ECS007J7

Remove propeller shaft from vehicle. Refer to PR-8, "Removal
and Installation" .
Support A/T assembly with a jack.
Remove rear engine mounting member from A/T assembly.
Remove rear extension from transmission case.
Remove governor valve assembly.
Inspect and repair governor valve assembly. Refer to AT-101,
"Inspection" .

SAT108C

AT-59

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
[RL4R01A]

Throttle Wire Adjustment
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
While pressing lock plate, move adjusting tube in Direction T.
Release lock plate. (Adjusting tube is locked at this time.)
Move throttle drum from P2 (Idling position) to P1 (Full throttle
position) quickly and release.
Ensure that throttle wire stroke “L” is within the specified range,
between full throttle and idle.
Throttle wire stroke “L”

●
●

ECS007J8

: 39 - 43 mm (1.54 - 1.69 in)

Adjust throttle wire stroke after accelerator wire is installed
and adjusted.
When connecting throttle wire to throttle drum, do not use
tools. Manually hook wire.

SAT551D

Put mark on throttle wire for measuring wire stroke.
If throttle wire stroke is improperly adjusted, the following problems
may arise.
●
When the throttle drum fully-open position P1 is too far toward
Direction T, the shift schedule will be as shown by 2 in the figure, and the kickdown range will greatly increase.
●
When the throttle drum fully-open position P1 is too far toward
Direction U, the shift schedule will be as shown by 1 in the figure, and kickdown will not occur.
●

SAT411

Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Remove control linkage and manual lever from manual shaft.
Set manual shaft in N position.
Loosen PNP switch fixing bolts.
Insert pin into adjustment holes in both PNP switch and manual
as near vertical as possible.
Tighten PNP switch fixing bolts.
Remove pin.
Reinstall any part removed.
Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-61, "Control Cable Adjustment" .
Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to AT-46, "PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" .

AT-60

ECS007J9

SAT081B

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
[RL4R01A]

Control Cable Adjustment

ECS007JA

F
LCIA0294E

Move the selector lever from the P position to 1 position. You should be able to feel the detents in each position.
If the detents cannot be felt, the linkage needs adjustment.
1. Place selector lever in P position.
2. Loosen control cable lock nut and place manual shaft in P position.
3. Push control cable in the direction of the arrow shown in the illustration by specified force.
Specified force
4.
5.
6.
7.
●
●

: 19.6 N (2.0 kg, 4.4 lb)

Return control cable in the opposite direction of the arrow for 1.0 mm (0.039 in).
Tighten control cable lock nut.
Move selector lever from P to 1 position again. Make sure that selector lever moves smoothly.
Apply grease to contacting areas of selector lever and control cable. Install any part removed.
Make sure that the starter operates when the selector lever is placed in the N or P position.
Make sure that the transmission is locked properly when the selector lever is placed in the P position.

AT-61

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
[RL4R01A]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal

PFP:00000
ECS007JB

AAT151A

AT-62

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
[RL4R01A]
CAUTION:
Before separating the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (OBD) A
from the assembly. Be careful not to damage sensor edge.
NOTE:
To prevent oil spills, drain the A/T fluid before removing A/T assembly, Refer to MA-38, "Changing A/T B
Fluid" or insert plug into rear oil seal after removing propeller shaft.
1. Disconnect battery negative terminal.
2. Remove fluid charging pipe from A/T assembly and plug opening.
AT
3. Remove oil cooler pipe from A/T assembly and plug opening.
4. Remove A/T vent hose.
D
5. Remove propeller shaft.
Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" .
● Be careful not to damage spline, sleeve yoke and rear oil seal.
E
6. Remove A/T control cable from manual shaft.
7. Disconnect A/T harness connectors and vehicle speed sensor harness connector.
8. Disconnect throttle wire from A/T assembly.
F
9. Remove the starter motor. Refer to SC-25, "Removal and Installation" .
10. Remove the rear plate
11. Remove bolts securing torque converter to drive plate.
G
● Rotate crankshaft to gain access to securing bolts.
H

SAT800C

●

If necessary, install tool to keep crankshaft from rotating
Tool number

—

J-45499

M
LBIA0364E

12. Support A/T assembly with a jack.
13. Remove rear mounting bracket from body and A/T assembly.
Refer to EM-47, "REMOVAL" .
14. Remove bolts securing A/T assembly to engine.
15. Pull A/T assembly backwards.
● Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.
● Secure A/T assembly to a jack.
SAT802C

AT-63

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
[RL4R01A]
16. Slant and lower A/T assembly.

SAT803C

Installation
1.

ECS007JC

Check drive plate runout.
CAUTION:
Do not allow any magnetic materials to contact the ring
gear teeth.
Maximum allowable
runout

: Refer to EM-58, "FLYWHEEL/DRIVE PLATE
RUNOUT" .

If this runout is out of specification, replace drive plate with ring
gear.
SAT977H

When connecting torque converter to transmission, measure
distance “A” to be certain that they are correctly assembled.
Distance “A”

: 26.0 mm (1.024 in) or
more

SAT017B

Install converter to drive plate.
● Rotate crankshaft to gain access to securing bolts.
● If necessary, install tool to keep crankshaft from rotating.
Tool number
●

—

J-45499

With converter installed, rotate crankshaft several turns
to check that transmission rotates freely without binding.

SAT006G

AT-64

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
[RL4R01A]
4.

Install the rear plate.
Rear plate bolts
10 mm
14 mm

3-4 Nm (0.3-0.4 kg-m, 3235 in-lb)
16-22 Nm (1.6 2.2kg-m, 1216 ft-lb)

AT
LBIA0363E

Tighten bolts securing transmission.
Bolt No.

Tightening torque
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

39 - 49 (4.0 - 5.0, 29 - 36)

43 (1.69)

3 - 4 (0.3 - 0.4, 2.2 - 2.9)

16 (0.63)

16 - 22 (1.6 - 2.2, 12 - 16)

16 (0.63)

Bolt length “
mm (in)

”

Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order
of removal.

G
AAT153A

Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-61, "Control Cable Adjustment"
.
8. Adjust throttle wire. Refer to AT-60, "Throttle Wire Adjustment" .
9. Adjust PNP switch. Refer to AT-60, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP)
Switch Adjustment" .
10. Refill transmission with ATF and check fluid level.
11. Move selector lever through all positions to be sure that transmission operates correctly.
With parking brake applied, allow engine to idle. Move selector
lever through N to D, to 2, to 1 and to R. A slight shock should
be felt through hand gripping the selector each time the transmission is shifted.
12. Perform road test. Refer to AT-31, "Road Test" .

SAT638A

AT-65

OVERHAUL
[RL4R01A]

OVERHAUL
Components

PFP:00000
ECS007JD

WAT516

AT-66

OVERHAUL
[RL4R01A]
A

WCIA0159E

AT-67

OVERHAUL
[RL4R01A]

Oil Channel

ECS007JE

WCIA0160E

AT-68

OVERHAUL
[RL4R01A]

Locations of Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings

ECS007JF

WAT378

AT-69

OVERHAUL
[RL4R01A]

Disassembly
1.

ECS007JG

Removing torque converter by holding it firmly and turning while
pulling straight out.

SAT018B

2.
a.
b.
c.

Check torque converter one-way clutch.
Insert Tool into spline of one-way clutch inner race.
Hook bearing support unitized with one-way clutch outer race
with suitable wire.
Check that one-way clutch inner race rotates only clockwise with
Tool while holding bearing support with wire.

SAT019BA

Remove PNP switch from transmission case.

AAT528A

4.
a.
b.
c.

Separate the oil pan and transmission case.
Drain ATF from drain plug.
Raise oil pan by placing wooden blocks under converter housing
and adapter case.
Remove oil pan and gasket.
● Always place oil pan straight down so that foreign particles inside will not move.
● Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing
bolts.
SAT186B

AT-70

OVERHAUL
[RL4R01A]
5.

Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine cause of
malfunction. If the fluid is very dark, smells burned, or contains
foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may
need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates
varnish buildup. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches
to stick and may inhibit pump pressure.
● If frictional material is detected, replace radiator after
repair of A/T. Refer to CO-14, "RADIATOR" .

AT
SAT171B

Place transmission into Tool with the control valve facing up.
E

G
SAT522G

Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve and overdrive
cancel solenoid valve connectors.

K
SAT132C

8.
a.

Remove oil strainer.
Remove oil strainer from control valve assembly.
Then remove O-ring from oil strainer.

SAT306I

AT-71

OVERHAUL
[RL4R01A]
b.

Check oil strainer screen for damage.

SAT025B

9.
a.

Remove control valve assembly.
Straighten terminal clips to free terminal cords, then remove terminal clips.

SAT307I

Remove bolts A and B , and remove control valve assembly
from transmission.
Bolt

mm (in)

33 (1.30)

45 (1.77)

SAT146HA

Remove manual valve from control valve assembly.

SAT127B

AT-72

OVERHAUL
[RL4R01A]
10. Remove terminal cord assembly from transmission case while
pushing on stopper.
● Be careful not to damage cord.
● Do not remove terminal cord assembly unless it is damaged.

AT
SAT308I

11. Remove converter housing.
a. Remove converter housing bolts.
b. Remove traces of sealant.
● Be careful not to scratch converter housing.

G
SAT999A

12. Remove O-ring from input shaft.

K
SAT995A

13. Remove oil pump assembly.
a. Attach Tool to oil pump assembly and extract it evenly from
transmission case.

SAT027B

AT-73

OVERHAUL
[RL4R01A]
b.
c.

Remove O-ring from oil pump assembly.
Remove traces of sealant from oil pump housing.
● Be careful not to scratch pump housing.

SAT028B

Remove needle bearing and thrust washer from oil pump
assembly.

SAT108B

14. Remove input shaft and oil pump gasket.

SAT988A

15. Remove brake band and band strut.
a. Loosen lock nut and remove band servo anchor end pin from
transmission case.

SAT029B

AT-74

OVERHAUL
[RL4R01A]
b.

Remove brake band and band strut from transmission case.
A

AT
SAT986A

To prevent brake linings from cracking or peeling, do not
stretch the flexible band unnecessarily. When removing
the brake band, always secure it with a clip as shown in
the figure at left. Leave the clip in position after removing
the brake band.
Check brake band facing for damage, cracks, wear and burns.

●

G
SAT655

16. Remove front side clutch and gear components.
a. Remove clutch pack (reverse clutch, high clutch and front sun
gear) from transmission case.

K
SAT030B

b.
c.

Remove front bearing race from clutch pack.
Remove rear bearing race from clutch pack.

SAT374I

AT-75

OVERHAUL
[RL4R01A]
d.

Remove front planetary carrier from transmission case.

SAT031B

e.
f.

Remove front needle bearing from front planetary carrier.
Remove rear bearing from front planetary carrier.

SAT968A

Remove rear sun gear from transmission case.

SAT974A

17. Remove rear extension case.
a. Remove rear extension case from transmission case.
b. Remove rear extension gasket from transmission case.

SAT309I

Remove oil seal from rear extension case.
● Do not remove oil seal unless it is to be replaced.

SAT190B

AT-76

OVERHAUL
[RL4R01A]
18. Remove output shaft and parking gear.
a. Remove governor valve assembly.

SAT120C

Remove rear snap ring from output shaft.
E

G
SAT310I

c.
d.

Slowly push output shaft all the way forward.
● Do not use excessive force.
Remove snap ring from output shaft.

SAT957A

Remove output shaft and parking gear as a unit from transmission case.

SAT311I

Remove parking gear from output shaft.

AT-77

OVERHAUL
[RL4R01A]
g.

Remove needle bearing from transmission case.

SAT033B

19. Remove rear side clutch and gear components.
a. Remove front internal gear.

SAT954A

Remove bearing race from front internal gear.

SAT110B

Remove needle bearing from rear internal gear.

SAT111B

Remove rear internal gear, forward clutch hub and overrun
clutch hub as a set from transmission case.

SAT951A

AT-78

OVERHAUL
[RL4R01A]
e.
f.

Remove needle bearing from overrun clutch hub.
Remove overrun clutch hub from rear internal gear and forward
clutch hub.

SAT682H

Remove thrust washer from overrun clutch hub.
E

G
SAT036B

Remove forward clutch assembly from transmission case.

SAT037B

20. Remove band servo and accumulator components.
a. Remove band servo retainer from transmission case.

SAT038B

Apply compressed air to oil hole until band servo piston comes
out of transmission case.
● Hold piston with a rag and gradually direct air to oil hole.
Remove return springs.

SAT039B

AT-79

OVERHAUL
[RL4R01A]
d.
e.

Remove springs from accumulator pistons A , B , C and D .
Apply compressed air to each oil hole until piston comes out.
● Hold piston with a rag and gradually direct air to oil hole.

SAT040BA

Identification of accumulator pistons

Identification of oil holes

Remove O-ring from each piston.

SAT618GA

21. Remove throttle wire components if necessary.
a. Remove throttle wire from A/T assembly.

SAT135C

b.
c.
d.

Remove throttle lever shaft E-ring.
Remove return spring.
Remove throttle lever.

SAT136C

AT-80

OVERHAUL
[RL4R01A]
e.

Remove throttle lever shaft retaining pin and throttle lever shaft.
A

AT
SAT137C

22. Remove manual shaft components, if necessary.
a. Hold width across flats of manual shaft (outside the transmission
case) and remove lock nut from shaft.

G
SAT041B

Remove retaining pin from transmission case.

SAT042B

While pushing detent spring down, remove manual plate and
parking rod from transmission case.

SAT935A

Remove manual shaft from transmission case.

SAT043B

AT-81

OVERHAUL
[RL4R01A]
e.

Remove spacer and detent spring from transmission case.

SAT934A

Remove oil seal from transmission case.

SAT044B

AT-82

OIL PUMP
[RL4R01A]

OIL PUMP
Components

PFP:15010

A
ECS007JH

LCIA0295E

Disassembly
1.

ECS007JI

Loosen bolts in numerical order and remove oil pump cover.

SAT649A

Remove rotor, vane rings and vanes.
● Inscribe a mark on back of rotor for identification of foreaft direction when reassembling rotor. Then remove
rotor.

SAT650A

AT-83

OIL PUMP
[RL4R01A]
3.

While pushing on cam ring, remove pivot pin.
● Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing.

SAT651A

While holding cam ring and cam ring return spring, lift out cam
ring return spring.
● Be careful not to damage oil pump housing.
● Hold cam ring return spring to prevent it from jumping.

SAT652A

Remove cam ring and cam ring return spring from oil pump
housing.

SAT653A

Remove pivot pin from control piston and remove control piston
assembly.

SAT654A

AT-84

OIL PUMP
[RL4R01A]
7.

Remove oil seal from oil pump housing.
● Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing.

AT
SAT655A

Inspection

ECS007JJ

OIL PUMP COVER, ROTOR, VANES, CONTROL PISTON, SIDE SEALS, CAM RING AND FRICTION RING
●

Check for wear and damage.

H
SAT656A

SIDE CLEARANCES
●

Measure side clearances between end of oil pump housing and
cam ring, rotor, vanes and control piston in at least four places
along their circumferences. Maximum measured values should
be within specified ranges.

SAT657A

SAT658A

●

Before measuring side clearance, check that friction rings, O-ring, control piston side seals and
cam ring return spring are removed.
Standard clearance (Cam ring, rotor,
vanes and control piston)

●

: Refer to AT-154, "Oil Pump and Low One-way
Clutch" .

If not within standard clearance, replace oil pump assembly except oil pump cover assembly.

AT-85

OIL PUMP
[RL4R01A]
SEAL RING CLEARANCE
●

Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove.
Standard clearance
Wear limit

●

: 0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 0.0098 in)
: 0.25 mm (0.0098 in)

If not within wear limit, replace oil pump cover assembly.

Assembly
1.

ECS007JK

Drive oil seal into oil pump housing.
● Apply ATF to outer periphery and lip surface.

SAT081E

2.
a.

Install cam ring in oil pump housing as follows:
Install side seal on control piston.
● Pay attention to its direction — black surface faces
toward control piston.
● Apply petroleum jelly to side seal.
Install control piston on oil pump.

SAT654A

Install O-ring and friction ring on cam ring.
● Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.

SAT660A

Assemble cam ring, cam ring return spring and spring seat.
Install spring by pushing it against pump housing.

SAT661A

AT-86

OIL PUMP
[RL4R01A]
e.

While pushing on cam ring, install pivot pin.
A

AT
SAT651A

Install rotor, vanes and vane rings.
● Pay attention to direction of rotor.

G
SAT662A

4.
a.

Install oil pump housing and oil pump cover.
Wrap masking tape around splines of oil pump cover assembly
to protect seal. Position oil pump cover assembly in oil pump
housing assembly, then remove masking tape.
Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown.

K
SAT649A

Install seal rings carefully after packing ring grooves with petroleum jelly. Press rings down into jelly for a close fit.
● Seal rings come in two different diameters. Check fit
carefully in each groove.
Small dia. seal ring
Large dia. seal ring
●

: No mark
: Yellow mark in area
shown by arrow

Do not spread gap of seal ring excessively while installing. It may deform ring.
SAT663A

AT-87

CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]

CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY
Components

PFP:31705
ECS007JL

LCIA0281E

AT-88

CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]

Disassembly
1.
a.
b.

ECS007JM

Remove solenoids.
Remove overdrive cancel solenoid valve and side plate from
lower body.
Remove O-ring from solenoid.

D
AAT814

c.
d.

Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve from upper
body.
Remove O-ring from solenoid valve.

G
SAT144G

2.
a.
b.

Disassemble upper and lower bodies.
Place upper body facedown, and remove bolts, reamer bolts,
side plate and support plates.
Remove lower body and separator plate as a unit from upper
body.
● Be careful not to drop orifice check valve, spring and
steel balls.

K
SAT138C

c.
d.

Place lower body facedown, and remove separator plate.
Remove orifice check valve and orifice check spring.

AAT258A

AT-89

CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]
e.

Check to see that steel balls are properly positioned in upper
body and side plate, then remove them from upper body.

SAT726C

Inspection

ECS007JN

LOWER AND UPPER BODIES
●

Check to see that there are pins and retainer plates in lower
body.

SAT139C

●
●

Check to see that there are pins and retainer plates in upper
body.
Be careful not to lose these parts.

SAT140C

●
●

Check to make sure that oil circuits are clean and free from
damage.
Check tube brackets and tube connectors for damage.

SAT141C

AT-90

CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]
SEPARATOR PLATES
●

Check to make sure that separator plate is free of damage and
not deformed and oil holes are clean.

SAT151G

OVERDRIVE CANCEL SOLENOID VALVE AND TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE
●
●

Check that filter is not clogged or damaged.
Measure resistance. Refer to AT-44, "Component Inspection" .

Assembly
1.
a.

ECS007JO

Install upper and lower bodies.
Position upper body with oil circuit facing up. Install steel balls in
their proper positions.

I
SAT726C

Install reamer bolts from bottom of upper body.

SAT147H

Position lower body with oil circuit facing up. Install orifice check
spring, orifice check valve.
D

: 2.0 mm (0.079 in)

SAT763G

AT-91

CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]
d.
e.

Install separator plate on lower body.
Temporarily install support plates, side plate (with steel ball) and
tube brackets.

SAT312I

Temporarily assemble lower and upper bodies, using reamer
bolt as a guide.
● Be careful not to dislocate or drop steel balls, orifice
check spring and orifice check valve.

SAT198B

Install and temporarily tighten bolts and tube brackets in their
proper locations.

AAT877

AT-92

CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]
Bolt length and location:
A

Bolt symbol
Bolt length
(in)
2.
a.

45 (1.77)

33 (1.30)

Install solenoids.
Attach O-ring and install overdrive cancel solenoid valve and
side plate onto lower body.

AAT815

b.
3.

Attach O-ring and install torque converter clutch solenoid valve
onto upper body.
Tighten bolt.

I
SAT144G

AT-93

CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY
[RL4R01A]

CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY
Components

PFP:31711
ECS007JP

LCIA0282E

Apply ATF to all components before their installation.
Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in Return Springs Chart. Refer to AT-151,
"Return Springs" .

AT-94

CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY
[RL4R01A]

Disassembly
1.

ECS007JQ

Remove valves at parallel pins.
● Do not use a magnetic pick-up tool.

D
SAT140C

Use a wire paper clip to push out parallel pins.

SAT822A

Remove parallel pins while pressing their corresponding plugs
and sleeves.
● Remove plug slowly to prevent internal parts from jumping out.

K
SAT823A

Place mating surface of valve facedown, and remove internal
parts.
● If a valve is hard to remove, place valve body facedown
and lightly tap it with a soft hammer.
● Be careful not to drop or damage valves and sleeves.

SAT824A

AT-95

CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY
[RL4R01A]
2.
a.

Remove valves at retainer plates.
Pry out retainer plate with wire paper clip.

SAT825A

Remove retainer plates while holding spring.

SAT826A

Place mating surface of valve facedown, and remove internal
parts.
● If a valve is hard to remove, lightly tap valve body with a
soft hammer.
● Be careful not to drop or damage valves, sleeves, etc.

SAT827A

Inspection

ECS007JR

VALVE SPRINGS
●

Measure free length and outer diameter of each valve spring.
Also check for damage or deformation.
Inspection standard

●

: Refer to AT-151, "Return
Springs" .

Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued.

SAT829A

CONTROL VALVES
●

Check sliding surfaces of valves, sleeves and plugs.

AT-96

CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY
[RL4R01A]

Assembly
1.

ECS007JS

Lubricate the control valve body and all valves with ATF. Install
control valves by sliding them carefully into their bores.
● Be careful not to scratch or damage valve body.

D
SAT830A

●

Wrap a small screwdriver with vinyl tape and use it to insert
the valves into proper position.

SAT831A

ACCUMULATOR CONTROL PLUG
●
●

Align protrusion of accumulator control sleeve with notch in plug.
Align parallel pin groove in plug with parallel pin, and install
accumulator control valve.

K
SAT833A

Install parallel pins and retainer plates.
M

SAT140C

AT-97

CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY
[RL4R01A]
●
●

While pushing plug, install parallel pin.
Insert retainer plate while pushing spring.

SAT449E

AT-98

CONTROL VALVE LOWER BODY
[RL4R01A]

CONTROL VALVE LOWER BODY
Components

PFP:31713

A
ECS007JT

LCIA0283E

Apply ATF to all components before their installation.
Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in Return Springs Chart in SDS. Refer to AT151, "Return Springs" .

AT-99

CONTROL VALVE LOWER BODY
[RL4R01A]

Disassembly
1.
2.

ECS007JU

Remove valves at parallel pins.
Remove valves at retainer plates.
For removal procedures, refer to AT-89, "Disassembly" .

SAT139C

Inspection

ECS007JV

VALVE SPRINGS
●

Check each valve spring for damage and deformation. Also
measure free length and outer diameter.
Inspection standard

●

: Refer to AT-151, "Return
Springs" .

Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued.

SAT829A

CONTROL VALVES
●

Check sliding surfaces of control valves, sleeves and plugs for damage.

Assembly
●

ECS007JW

Install control valves.
For installation procedures, refer to AT-91, "Assembly" .

SAT139C

AT-100

GOVERNOR VALVE ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]

GOVERNOR VALVE ASSEMBLY
Components

PFP:31860

A
ECS007JX

SAT450EB

Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in AT-151, "Return Springs" .

Inspection

ECS007JY

VALVE SPRINGS
●

Measure free length and outer diameter of each valve spring.
Also check for damage or deformation.
Inspection standard

: Refer to AT-151, "Return
Springs" .
J

K
SAT829A

GOVERNOR VALVES AND VALVE BODY
●

Check governor valves and valve body for indication of burning or scratches.
M

AT-101

PARKING GEAR
[RL4R01A]

PARKING GEAR
Inspection
●
●

PFP:31486
ECS007JZ

Check contacting surface of parking gear and ring groove areas
for wear.
Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove.
Standard clearance
Wear limit

: 0.15 - 0.40 mm (0.0059 0.0157 in)
: 0.40 mm (0.0157 in)

SAT152G

AT-102

REVERSE CLUTCH
[RL4R01A]

REVERSE CLUTCH
Components

PFP:31510

A
ECS007K0

I
AAT108A

Disassembly
1.
a.
b.
c.

ECS007K1

Check operation of reverse clutch.
Install seal ring onto oil pump cover and install reverse clutch.
Apply compressed air to oil hole.
Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring.
If retaining plate does not contact snap ring,
● D-ring might be damaged.
● Oil seal might be damaged.
● Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball.

M
SAT841A

Remove snap ring, drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate
and dish plate.

SAT842A

AT-103

REVERSE CLUTCH
[RL4R01A]
3.

Remove snap ring from clutch drum while compressing clutch
springs.
● Set Tool directly over springs.
● Do not expand snap ring excessively.
Remove spring retainer and return spring.

SAT620G

Install seal ring onto oil pump cover and install reverse clutch
drum. While holding piston, gradually apply compressed air to
oil hole until piston is removed.
● Do not apply compressed air abruptly.
Remove D-ring and oil seal from piston.

SAT844A

Inspection

ECS007K2

REVERSE CLUTCH SNAP RING AND SPRING RETAINER
●

Check for deformation, fatigue and damage.

REVERSE CLUTCH RETURN SPRINGS
●

Check for deformation and damage. Also, measure free length
and outside diameter.
Inspection standard

: Refer to AT-151, "Return
Springs" .

SAT829A

REVERSE CLUTCH DRIVE PLATES
●
●

Check facing for burns, cracks and damage.
Measure thickness of facing.
Thickness of drive plate
Standard value : 1.90 - 2.05 mm (0.0748 - 0.0807 in)
Wear limit
: 1.80 mm (0.0709 in)

●

If not within wear limit, replace.

SAT845A

REVERSE CLUTCH DISH PLATE
●

Check for deformation and damage.

AT-104

REVERSE CLUTCH
[RL4R01A]
REVERSE CLUTCH PISTON
●
●
●

Shake piston to assure that balls are not seized.
Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole opposite the return
spring to assure that there is no air leakage.
Also apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side to
assure that air leaks past ball.

SAT846A

Assembly
1.

ECS007K3

Install D-ring and oil seal on piston.
● Apply ATF to both parts.
● Take care with the direction of oil seal.

SAT847A

Install piston assembly by turning it slowly and evenly.
● Apply ATF to inner surface of drum.

K
SAT848A

Install return springs and spring retainer.
M

SAT849A

AT-105

REVERSE CLUTCH
[RL4R01A]
4.

Set Tool on spring retainer and install snap ring while compressing clutch springs.

SAT620G

●

Do not align snap ring gap with spring retainer stopper.

SAT850A

5.
6.

Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate.
Install snap ring.

SAT842A

Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not
within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate.
Specified clearance
Standard
Allowable limit
Retaining plate

: 0.5 - 0.8 mm (0.020 0.031 in)
: 1.2 mm (0.047 in)
: Refer to AT-104, "Inspection" .
SAT852A

AT-106

REVERSE CLUTCH
[RL4R01A]
8.

Check operation of reverse clutch.
Refer to AT-104, "Inspection" .

AT
SAT841A

AT-107

HIGH CLUTCH
[RL4R01A]

HIGH CLUTCH
Components

PFP:31410
ECS007K4

LCIA0284E

Disassembly and Assembly

ECS007K5

Service procedures for high clutch are essentially the same as those
for reverse clutch, with the following exceptions:
●
Check of high clutch operation

SAT854A

●

Removal and installation of return spring

SAT621G

AT-108

HIGH CLUTCH
[RL4R01A]
●

Inspection of high clutch return springs
Inspection standard

: Refer to AT-151, "Return
Springs" .

AT
SAT829A

D
●

Inspection of high clutch drive plate
Thickness of drive plate
Standard
: 1.52 - 1.67 mm (0.0598 - 0.0657 in)
Wear limit
: 1.40 mm (0.0551 in)

G
SAT845A

●

Measurement of clearance between retaining plate and snap
ring

Specified clearance
Standard
: 1.8 - 2.2 mm (0.071 - 0.087 in)
Allowable limit : 2.8 mm (0.110 in)
Retaining plate : Refer to AT-152, "Clutch and
Brakes" .

SAT858A

AT-109

FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES
[RL4R01A]

FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES
Components

PFP:31570
ECS007K6

LCIA0285E

AT-110

FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES
[RL4R01A]

Disassembly and Assembly

ECS007K7

Service procedures for forward and overrun clutches are essentially
the same as those for reverse clutch, with the following exceptions:
●
Check of forward clutch operation

D
SAT860A

●

Check of overrun clutch operation

SAT861A

●

Removal of forward clutch drum
Remove forward clutch drum from transmission case by holding
snap ring.

K
SAT865A

L
●

–

Removal of forward clutch and overrun clutch pistons
While holding overrun clutch piston, gradually apply compressed air to oil hole.

SAT862A

AT-111

FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES
[RL4R01A]
–

Remove overrun clutch from forward clutch.

SAT863A

●

Removal and installation of return springs

SAT148H

●

Inspection of forward clutch and overrun clutch return springs
Inspection standard

: Refer to AT-151, "Return
Springs" .

SAT829A

●

Inspection of forward clutch drive plates
Thickness of drive plate
Standard
: 1.52 - 1.67 mm (0.0598 - 0.0657 in)
Wear limit : 1.40 mm (0.0551 in)

SAT845A

AT-112

FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES
[RL4R01A]
●

Inspection of overrun clutch drive plates
A

Thickness of drive plate
Standard
: 1.90 - 2.05 mm (0.0748 - 0.0807 in)
Wear limit
: 1.80 mm (0.0709 in)

AT
SAT845A

D
●

–

•

Installation of forward clutch piston and overrun clutch piston
Install forward clutch piston by turning it slowly and evenly.
Apply ATF to inner surface of clutch drum.

G
SAT741G

•
–

•

Align notch in forward clutch piston with groove in forward
clutch drum.
Install overrun clutch by turning it slowly and evenly.
Apply ATF to inner surface of forward clutch piston.

SAT153G

●

Measurement of clearance between retaining plate and snap
ring of overrun clutch

Specified clearance
Standard
: 1.0 - 1.4 mm (0.039 - 0.055 in)
Allowable limit
: 2.0 mm (0.079 in)
Retaining plate : Refer to AT-153, "OVERRUN
CLUTCH" .

SAT869A

AT-113

FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES
[RL4R01A]
●

Measurement of clearance between retaining plate and snap
ring of forward clutch
Specified clearance
Standard
: 0.35 - 0.75 mm (0.0138 - 0.0295 in)
Allowable limit
: 1.85 mm (0.728 in)
Retaining plate
: Refer to AT-153, "FORWARD
CLUTCH" .
SAT870A

AT-114

LOW & REVERSE BRAKE
[RL4R01A]

LOW & REVERSE BRAKE
Components

PFP:31645

A
ECS007K8

I
AAT111A

Disassembly
1.
a.
b.
c.

ECS007K9

Check operation of low and reverse brake.
Install seal ring onto oil pump cover and install reverse clutch.
Apply compressed air to oil hole.
Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring.
If retaining plate does not contact snap ring:
● D-ring might be damaged.
● Oil seal might be damaged.
● Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball.

M
SAT872A

Remove snap ring, low & reverse brake drive plates, driven
plates and dish plate.

SAT873A

AT-115

LOW & REVERSE BRAKE
[RL4R01A]
3.
4.
5.

Remove low one-way clutch inner race, spring retainer and
return spring from transmission case.
Remove seal rings from low one-way clutch inner race.
Remove needle bearing from low one-way clutch inner race.

SAT154G

6.
7.

Remove low & reverse brake piston using compressed air.
Remove oil seal and D-ring from piston.

SAT876A

Inspection

ECS007KA

LOW & REVERSE BRAKE SNAP RING AND SPRING RETAINER
●
●

Check for deformation, or damage.
Replace if necessary.

LOW & REVERSE BRAKE RETURN SPRINGS
●

Check for deformation or damage. Also measure free length and
outside diameter.
Inspection standard

: Refer to AT-151, "Return
Springs" .

SAT829A

LOW & REVERSE BRAKE DRIVE PLATES
●
●

Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
Measure thickness of facing.
Thickness of drive plate
Standard value : 1.52 - 1.67 mm (0.0598 - 0.0657 in)
Wear limit
: 1.4 mm (0.055 in)

●

If not within wear limit, replace.

SAT845A

AT-116

LOW & REVERSE BRAKE
[RL4R01A]
LOW ONE-WAY CLUTCH INNER RACE
●
●
●
●

Check frictional surface of inner race for wear or damage.
Install new seal rings onto low one-way clutch inner race.
Be careful not to expand seal ring gap excessively.
Measure seal ring-to-groove clearance.

Inspection standard
Standard value : 0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in)
Allowable limit
: 0.25 mm (0.0098 in)
●

If not within allowable limit, replace low one-way clutch inner
race.

Assembly
1.

SAT155G

ECS007KB

Install needle bearing onto one-way clutch inner race.
● Pay attention to its direction — black surface faces to
rear side.
● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washers.

SAT112B

Install oil seal and D-ring onto piston.
Apply ATF to oil seal and D-ring.

●

SAT879A

Install piston by rotating it slowly and evenly.
Apply ATF to inner surface of transmission case.

●

SAT880A

AT-117

LOW & REVERSE BRAKE
[RL4R01A]
4.
5.
6.

Install return springs, spring retainer and low one-way clutch
inner race onto transmission case.
Install dish plate, low & reverse brake drive plates, driven plates
and retaining plate.
Install snap ring on transmission case.

SAT881A

Check operation of low & reverse brake clutch piston. Refer to
AT-115, "Disassembly" .

SAT872A

Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not
within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate.
Specified clearance
Standard
: 0.5 - 0.8 mm (0.020 - 0.031 in)
Allowable limit
: 2.3 mm (0.091 in)
Retaining plate
: Refer to AT-153, "LOW & REVERSE
BRAKE" .
SAT885A

Install low one-way clutch inner race seal ring.
● Apply petroleum jelly to seal ring.
● Make sure seal rings are pressed firmly into place and
held by petroleum jelly.

SAT884A

AT-118

FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]

FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM ASSEMBLY
Components

PFP:31571

A
ECS007KC

SAT886AA

Disassembly
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

ECS007KD

Remove snap ring from forward clutch drum.
Remove side plate from forward clutch drum.
Remove low one-way clutch from forward clutch drum.
Remove snap ring from forward clutch drum.
Remove needle bearing from forward clutch drum.

SAT887A

Inspection

ECS007KE

FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM
●
●

Check spline portion for wear or damage.
Check frictional surfaces of low one-way clutch and needle
bearing for wear or damage.

SAT892A

AT-119

FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]
NEEDLE BEARING AND LOW ONE-WAY CLUTCH
●

Check frictional surface for wear or damage.

SAT893A

Assembly
1.
2.

ECS007KF

Install needle bearing in forward clutch drum.
Install snap ring onto forward clutch drum.

SAT149H

Install low one-way clutch onto forward clutch drum by pushing
the roller in evenly.

SAT894A

Install low one-way clutch with flange facing rearward.
Install side plate onto forward clutch drum.
Install snap ring onto forward clutch drum.

●

4.
5.

SAT895A

AT-120

REAR INTERNAL GEAR AND FORWARD CLUTCH HUB
[RL4R01A]

REAR INTERNAL GEAR AND FORWARD CLUTCH HUB
Components

PFP:31450

A
ECS007KG

LCIA0286E

Disassembly
1.
2.
3.
4.

ECS007KH

Remove rear internal gear by pushing forward clutch hub forward.
Remove thrust washer from rear internal gear.
Remove snap ring from forward clutch hub.
Remove end bearing.

SAT897A

5.
6.

Remove forward one-way clutch and end bearing as a unit from
forward clutch hub.
Remove snap ring from forward clutch hub.

SAT287G

AT-121

REAR INTERNAL GEAR AND FORWARD CLUTCH HUB
[RL4R01A]

Inspection

ECS007KI

REAR INTERNAL GEAR AND FORWARD CLUTCH HUB
●
●
●

Check gear for excessive wear, chips or cracks.
Check frictional surfaces of forward one-way clutch and thrust
washer for wear or damage.
Check spline for wear or damage.

SAT902A

SNAP RING AND END BEARING
●

Check for deformation or damage.

SAT903A

Assembly
1.
2.

ECS007KJ

Install snap ring onto forward clutch hub.
Install end bearing.

SAT901A

4.
5.

Install forward one-way clutch onto clutch hub.
● Install forward one-way clutch with flange facing rearward.
Install end bearing.
Install snap ring onto forward clutch hub.

SAT904A

AT-122

REAR INTERNAL GEAR AND FORWARD CLUTCH HUB
[RL4R01A]
6.

Install thrust washer onto rear internal gear.
● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.
● Securely insert pawls of thrust washer into holes in rear
internal gear.

AT
SAT906A

Position forward clutch hub in rear internal gear.
E

G
SAT907A

After installing, check to assure that forward clutch hub rotates
clockwise.

K
SAT905A

AT-123

BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]

BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY
Components

PFP:31615
ECS007KK

AAT112A

Disassembly
1.
2.
3.

ECS007KL

Block one oil hole in O/D servo piston retainer and the center
hole in O/D band servo piston.
Apply compressed air to the other oil hole in piston retainer to
remove O/D band servo piston from retainer.
Remove D-ring from O/D band servo piston.

SAT909A

Remove band servo piston assembly from servo piston retainer
by pushing it forward.

SAT910A

AT-124

BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]
5.

Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing servo
piston spring retainer down, remove E-ring.

AT
SAT911A

Remove servo piston spring retainer, return spring C and piston
stem from band servo piston.
E

G
SAT912A

7.
8.
9.
10.

Remove E-ring from band servo piston.
Remove servo cushion spring retainer from band servo piston.
Remove D-rings from band servo piston.
Remove O-rings from servo piston retainer.

K
SAT914A

Inspection

ECS007KM

PISTONS, RETAINERS AND PISTON STEM
●

Check frictional surfaces for abnormal wear or damage.
M

SAT915A

AT-125

BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]
RETURN SPRINGS
●

Check for deformation or damage. Measure free length and
outer diameter.
Inspection standard

: Refer toAT-151, "Return
Springs" .

SAT916AA

Assembly
1.

ECS007KN

Install O-rings onto servo piston retainer.
● Apply ATF to O-rings.
● Pay attention to position of each O-ring.

SAT917A

Install servo cushion spring retainer onto band servo piston.

SAT918A

3.
4.

Install E-ring onto servo cushion spring retainer.
Install D-rings onto band servo piston.
● Apply ATF to D-rings.

SAT920A

AT-126

BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]
5.

Install servo piston spring retainer, return spring C and piston
stem onto band servo piston.

AT
SAT912A

Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing servo
piston spring retainer down, install E-ring.
E

G
SAT921A

Install band servo piston assembly onto servo piston retainer by
pushing it inward.

K
SAT922A

Install D-ring on O/D band servo piston.
● Apply ATF to D-ring.

SAT923A

AT-127

BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]
9.

Install O/D band servo piston onto O/D servo piston retainer by
pushing it inward.

SAT924A

AT-128

PARKING PAWL COMPONENTS
[RL4R01A]

PARKING PAWL COMPONENTS
Components

PFP:31991

A
ECS007KO

LCIA0287E

Disassembly
1.

ECS007KP

Slide return spring to the front of rear extension flange.

SAT226H

Remove return spring, pawl spacer and parking pawl from rear
extension.

SAT227H

Remove parking pawl shaft from rear extension.

AT-129

PARKING PAWL COMPONENTS
[RL4R01A]
4.

Remove parking actuator support from rear extension.

SAT228H

Inspection

ECS007KQ

PARKING PAWL AND PARKING ACTUATOR SUPPORT
●

Check contact surface of parking rod and parking gear for wear.

AAT888

Assembly
1.
2.

ECS007KR

Install parking actuator support onto rear extension.
Insert parking pawl shaft into rear extension.

SAT229H

Install return spring, pawl spacer and parking pawl onto parking
pawl shaft.

SAT227H

AT-130

PARKING PAWL COMPONENTS
[RL4R01A]
4.

Bend return spring upward and install it onto rear extension.
A

AT
SAT226H

AT-131

ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]

ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1)
1.
a.

b.
c.

PFP:00000
ECS007KS

Install manual shaft components.
Install oil seal onto manual shaft.
● Apply ATF to oil seal.
● Wrap threads of manual shaft with masking tape.
Insert manual shaft and oil seal as a unit into transmission case.
Remove masking tape.

SAT931A

Push oil seal evenly and install it onto transmission case.

SAT932A

Align groove in shaft with drive pin hole; then drive pin into position as shown in figure at left.

SAT933A

Install detent spring and spacer.

SAT934A

AT-132

ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]
g.

While pushing detent spring down, install manual plate onto
manual shaft.

AT
SAT935A

Install lock nuts onto manual shaft.
E

G
SAT936A

2.
a.
b.

Install throttle lever components.
Install throttle lever shaft.
Align groove in shaft with drive pin hole, then drive pin into position as shown in figure at left.

SAT148C

Install throttle lever, return spring, spring retainer and E-ring.
L

SAT149C

Install throttle wire.

SAT135C

AT-133

ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]
●

Apply ATF to O-ring.

SAT150C

3.
a.

Install accumulator piston.
Install O-rings onto accumulator piston.
● Apply ATF to O-rings.
Accumulator piston Orings

: Refer to AT-152, "Accumulator O-ring" .

SAT937AA

Install return spring for accumulator A onto transmission case.
Free length of return
spring

: Refer to AT-151, "Return
Springs" .

SAT938A

Install accumulator pistons A , B , C and D .

SAT939AA

●

Apply ATF to transmission case.

AT-134

ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]
4.
a.

Install band servo piston.
Install return springs onto band servo piston.

AT
SAT941A

Install band servo piston onto transmission case.
● Apply ATF to O-ring of band servo piston and transmission case.
Install gasket for band servo onto transmission case.

G
SAT942A

Install O/D servo piston retainer onto transmission case.

SAT940A

5.
a.

Install rear side clutch and gear components.
Place transmission case in vertical position.

SAT943A

Slightly lift forward clutch drum assembly and slowly rotate it
clockwise until its hub passes fully over the clutch inner race
inside transmission case.

SAT944A

AT-135

ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]
c.

Check to be sure that rotation direction of forward clutch assembly is correct.

SAT945A

Install thrust washer onto front of overrun clutch hub.
● Apply petroleum jelly to the thrust washer.
● Insert pawls of thrust washer securely into holes in overrun clutch hub.

SAT946A

Install overrun clutch hub onto rear internal gear assembly.

SAT947A

Install needle bearing onto rear of overrun clutch hub.
● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SAT697H

Check that overrun clutch hub rotates as shown while holding
forward clutch hub.

SAT949A

AT-136

ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]
h.
i.

Place transmission case into horizontal position.
Install rear internal gear, forward clutch hub and overrun clutch
hub as a unit onto transmission case.

SAT156G

Install needle bearing onto rear internal gear.
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
Install bearing race onto rear of front internal gear.
● Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.
● Securely engage pawls of bearing race with holes in front
internal gear.

●

G
SAT953A

Install front internal gear on transmission case.

SAT954A

6.
a.

Install output shaft and parking gear.
Insert output shaft from rear of transmission case while slightly
lifting front internal gear.
● Do not force output shaft against front of transmission
case.

SAT956A

Carefully push output shaft against front of transmission case.
Install snap ring on front of output shaft.
● Check to be sure output shaft cannot be removed in rear
direction.

SAT957A

AT-137

ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]
c.

Install needle bearing on transmission case.
● Pay attention to its direction — black side faces the rear.
● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SAT044E

Install parking gear on transmission case.

SAT311I

Install snap ring on rear of output shaft.
● Check to be sure output shaft cannot be removed in forward direction.

SAT310I

Install governor valve assembly on oil distributor.

SAT120C

7.
a.

Install rear extension case.
Install oil seal on rear extension case.
● Apply ATF to oil seal.

SAT528G

AT-138

ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]
b.

Install rear extension gasket on transmission case.
A

SAT963A

Install parking rod on transmission case.
E

G
SAT964A

Install rear extension case on transmission case. Tighten bolts
to specified torque.

: 20 - 25 N·m (2.0 - 2.5 kg-m, 14 - 18 ft-lb)
I

SAT309I

8.
a.

Install front side clutch and gear components.
Install rear sun gear on transmission case.
● Pay attention to its direction.

SAT974A

b.
c.

Install needle bearing on front of front planetary carrier.
● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
Install needle bearing on rear of front planetary carrier.
● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
● Pay attention to its direction — black side faces the front.

SAT967A

AT-139

ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]
d.

While rotating forward clutch drum clockwise, install front planetary carrier on forward clutch drum.

SAT969A

●

Check that portion A of front planetary carrier protrudes
approximately 2 mm (0.08 in) beyond portion B of forward
clutch assembly.

SAT970A

Install bearing races on front and rear of clutch pack.
● Apply petroleum jelly to bearing races.
● Securely engage pawls of bearing races with holes in
clutch pack.
Place transmission case in vertical position.

SAT971A

Install clutch pack into transmission case.

SAT973A

Adjustment

ECS007KT

When any parts listed in the following table are replaced, total end play or reverse clutch end play must be
adjusted.
Item
Part name

Total end play

Reverse clutch
end play

Transmission case

●

Low one-way clutch inner race

●

AT-140

ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]
Item
Part name

Total end play

Reverse clutch
end play

Overrun clutch hub

●

Rear internal gear

●

Rear planetary carrier

●

Rear sun gear

●

Front planetary carrier

●

Front sun gear

●

High clutch hub

●

High clutch drum

●

Oil pump cover

●

Reverse clutch drum

—

●

Adjust total end play.
F

Total end play “T1 ” : 0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in)

SAT975A

With original needle bearing installed, place J34291-1 (bridge),
J34291-2 (legs) and the J34291-5 (gauging cylinder) onto oil
pump. The long ends of legs should be placed firmly on
machined surface of oil pump assembly, and gauging cylinder
should rest on top of the needle bearing. Lock gauging cylinder
in place with set screw.

L
SAT976A

Install J34291-23 (gauging plunger) into gauging cylinder.

SAT977A

AT-141

ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]
c.

With original bearing race installed inside reverse clutch drum,
place shim selecting gauge with its legs on machined surface of
transmission case (no gasket) and allow gauging plunger to rest
on bearing race. Lock gauging plunger in place with set screw.

SAT978A

Remove Tool and use feeler gauge to measure gap between
gauging cylinder and gauging plunger. This measurement
should give exact total end play.
Total end play “T1
”
●

: 0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in)

If end play is out of specification, decrease or increase thickness of oil pump cover bearing race as necessary.
Available oil pump cover
bearing race

: Refer to AT-154, "Total
End Play" .
SAT979A

Adjust reverse clutch drum end play.
Reverse clutch drum
end play “T2 ”

: 0.55 - 0.90 mm (0.0217 0.0354 in)

SAT636G

Place J34291-1 (bridge), J34291-2 (legs) and J34291-5 (gauging cylinder) on machined surface of transmission case (no gasket) and allow gauging cylinder to rest on front thrust surface of
reverse clutch drum. Lock cylinder in place with set screw.

SAT981A

Install J34291-23 (gauging plunger) into gauging cylinder.

AAT125A

AT-142

ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]
c.

With original thrust washer installed on oil pump, place shim setting gauge legs onto machined surface of oil pump assembly
and allow gauging plunger to rest on thrust washer. Lock
plunger in place with set screw.

SAT983A

Use feeler gauge to measure gap between gauging plunger and
gauging cylinder. This measurement should give you exact
reverse clutch drum and play.
Reverse clutch drum
end play “T2 ”
●

: 0.55 - 0.90 mm (0.0217 0.0354 in)

: Refer to AT-154,
"Reverse Clutch Drum
End Play" .

Assembly (2)
1.
2.
a.

If end play is out of specification, decrease or increase thickness of oil pump thrust washer as necessary.
Available oil pump
thrust washer

G
SAT984A

ECS007KU

Place transmission case into horizontal position.
Install brake band and band strut.
Install band strut on brake band.
● Apply petroleum jelly to band strut.

K
SAT985A

Place brake band around reverse clutch drum, and insert band
strut into end of band servo piston stem.

SAT986A

AT-143

ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]
c.

Install anchor end pin on transmission case. Then, tighten
anchor end pin just enough so that reverse clutch drum (clutch
pack) will not tilt forward.

SAT987A

Install input shaft on transmission case.
● Pay attention to its direction — O-ring groove side faces
front.

SAT988A

4.
5.
a.
b.

Install gasket on transmission case.
Install oil pump assembly.
Install needle bearing on oil pump assembly.
● Apply petroleum jelly to the needle bearing.
Install selected thrust washer on oil pump assembly.
● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.

SAT989A

Carefully install seal rings into grooves and press them into the
petroleum jelly so that they are a tight fit.

SAT990A

AT-144

ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]
d.

Install O-ring on oil pump assembly.
● Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.

AT
SAT991A

Apply petroleum jelly to mating surface of transmission case and
oil pump assembly.
E

G
SAT992A

Install oil pump assembly.
● Install two converter housing securing bolts in bolt holes
in oil pump assembly as guides.

SAT993A

●

Insert oil pump assembly to the specified position in
transmission, as shown at left.

SAT994A

AT-145

ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]
6.

Install O-ring on input shaft.
● Apply ATF to O-rings.

SAT114B

7.
a.

Install converter housing.
Apply Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent around
bolt holes in converter housing. Refer to GI-42, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" .
● Do not apply too much sealant.

SAT397C

Apply Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent to seating
surfaces of bolts that secure front of converter housing. Refer to
GI-42, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" .
Install converter housing on transmission case.

SAT158G

8.
a.

Adjust brake band.
Tighten anchor end pin to specified torque.
Anchor end pin
: 4 - 6 N·m (0.4 - 0.6 kg-m, 35 - 52 in-lb)

Back off anchor end pin two and a half turns.

SAT001B

AT-146

ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]
c.

While holding anchor end pin, tighten lock nut.
A

AT
SAT002B

9.
a.
b.

Install terminal cord assembly.
Install O-ring on terminal cord assembly.
● Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.
Compress terminal cord assembly stopper and install terminal
cord assembly on transmission case.

G
SAT316I

10. Install control valve assembly.
a. Install accumulator piston return springs B , C and D .
Free length of return
springs

: Refer to AT-151, "Return
Springs" .

K
SAT004BA

Install manual valve on control valve.
● Apply ATF to manual valve.

SAT005B

c.
d.

Install control valve assembly on transmission case.
Install connector tube brackets and tighten bolts A and B .
● Check that terminal assembly harness does not catch.
Bolt

mm (in)

33 (1.30)

45 (1.77)

SAT448EA

AT-147

ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]
e.
f.

Install O-ring on oil strainer.
● Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.
Install oil strainer on control valve.

SAT306I

Securely fasten terminal harness with clips.

SAT307I

11. Install oil pan.
a. Attach a magnet to oil pan.

SAT011B

b.
c.

Install new oil pan gasket on transmission case.
Install oil pan and bracket on transmission case.
● Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing
bolts.
● Before installing bolts, remove traces of sealant and oil
from mating surface and thread holes.
● Tighten four bolts in a crisscross pattern to prevent dislocation of gasket.
Tighten drain plug.
SAT099H

AT-148

ASSEMBLY
[RL4R01A]
12.
a.
b.
c.

Install park/neutral position (PNP) switch.
Check that manual shaft is in 1 position.
Temporarily install PNP switch on manual shaft.
Move manual shaft to N.

AT
SAT299I

d.
i.
ii.
e.
f.

Use a 4 mm (0.16 in) pin for this adjustment.
Insert the pin straight into the manual shaft adjustment hole.
Rotate PNP switch until the pin can also be inserted straight into
hole in PNP switch.
Tighten PNP switch fixing bolts.
Remove pin from adjustment hole after adjusting PNP switch.

G
SAT081B

13. Install torque converter.
a. Pour ATF into torque converter.
● Approximately 2 liters (2-1/8 US qt, 1-3/4 Imp qt) of fluid
are required for a new torque converter.
● When reusing old torque converter, add the same amount
of fluid as was drained.

SAT015BA

Install torque converter while aligning notches and oil pump.
L

SAT016B

Measure distance A to check that torque converter is in proper
position.
Distance “A”

: 26.0 mm (1.024 in) or more

SAT017B

AT-149

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RL4R01A]

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications

PFP:00030
ECS007KV

Automatic transmission model

RL4R01A

Transmission model code number

49X11

Stall torque ratio

2.0 : 1

Transmission gear ratio

1st

2.785

2nd

1.545

Top

1.000

O/D

0.694

Reverse

2.272
Nissan Matic “D” (Continental U.S. and
Alaska) or Genuine Nissan Automatic
Transmission Fluid (Canada)*1

Recommended fluid
Fluid capacity

7.9 (8-3/8, 7)

(US qt, Imp qt)

*1: Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .

Shift Schedule

ECS007KW

VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Throttle position

D1 → D2

D2 → D3

D3 → D4

D4 → D3

D3 → D2

D2 → D1

12 → 11

Full throttle

46 - 50 (29 31)

88 - 96 (55 60)

—

126 - 136
(78 - 85)

80 - 88 (50 55)

41 - 45 (25 28)

Half throttle

29 - 33 (18 21)

56 - 64 (35 40)

105 - 114
(65 - 71)

60 - 70 (37 43)

26 - 32 (16 20)

12 - 16 (7 10)

41 - 45 (25 28)

VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING LOCK-UP
D4 (O/D ON)
Throttle position

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Lock-up ON

Lock-up OFF

4/8

105 - 113 (65 - 70)

61 - 69 (38 - 43)

3/8

76 - 84 (47 - 52)

55 - 63 (34 - 39)

2/8

58 - 66 (36 - 41)

55 - 63 (34 - 39)

1/8

58 - 66 (36 - 41)

55 - 63 (34 - 39)

Stall Revolution
Stall revolution

ECS007KX

rpm

2,100 - 2,300

Line Pressure
Engine
speed rpm

ECS007KY

Line pressure

kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)

D position (Overdrive control switch
ON and OFF)

2 and 1 positions

R position

Idle

471 - 510 (4.8 - 5.2, 68 - 74)

883 - 961 (9.0 - 9.8, 128 - 139)

736 - 775 (7.5 - 7.9, 107 - 112)

Stall

912 - 991 (9.3 - 10.1, 132 - 144)

883 - 961 (9.0 - 9.8, 128 - 139)

1,442 - 1,520 (14.7 - 15.5, 209 - 220)

Governor Pressure

ECS007KZ

Vehicle speed

Governor pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)

0 km/h (0 MPH)

0 (0, 0)

29 km/h (18 MPH)

119.6 - 123.6 (1.22 - 1.26, 17 - 18)

AT-150

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RL4R01A]
Vehicle speed

Governor pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)

57 km/h (35 MPH)

235.4 - 284.4 (2.40 - 2.90, 34 - 41)

86 km/h (53 MPH)

351.1 - 409.9 (3.58 - 4.18, 51 - 59)

Return Springs

ECS007L0

Unit: mm (in)
Item
Parts

Upper body

Control
valve

Lower body

Governor valve

Part No.*

Free length

Outer diameter

4th speed cut valve spring

31756-48X06

23.5 (0.925)

7.4 (0.2913)

Pressure regulator valve spring

31742-48X23

51.2 (2.016)

12.1 (0.476)

Pressure modifier valve spring

31742-48X13

40.83 (1.6075)

8.0 (0.315)

1-2 shift valve spring

31762-48X00

43.4 (1.709)

6.0 (0.236)

2-3 shift valve spring

31762-48X14

47.4 (1.866)

9.0 (0.354)

3-4 shift valve spring

31762-48X06

44.03 (1.7335)

8.0 (0.315)

Accumulator control valve spring

31742-48X24

30.3 (1.193)

8.0 (0.315)

—

3-2 downshift valve spring

—

2-3 throttle modifier valve spring

31742-41X21

33.0 (1.299)

6.5 (0.256)

4-2 relay valve spring

31756-41X00

29.1 (1.146)

6.95 (0.2736)

1
0

Torque converter clutch control
valve spring

31742-48X07

20.0 (0.787)

5.45 (0.2146)

Throttle valve & detent valve
spring

31802-48X02

34.23 (1.3476)

11.0 (0.433)

Kickdown modifier valve spring

31756-48X12

42.8 (1.685)

7.0 (0.276)

1st reducing valve spring

31756-48X04

34.1 (1.343)

7.0 (0.276)

31742-48X21

33.2 (1.307)

7.7 (0.303)

Overrun clutch reducing valve
spring

31742-48X05

31.0 (1.220)

5.2 (0.205)

3-2 timing valve spring

31742-48X15

23.0 (0.906)

7.0 (0.276)

Torque converter relief valve
spring

31742-41X23

38.0 (1.496)

9.0 (0.354)

4-2 sequence valve spring

31756-41X00

29.1 (1.146)

6.95 (0.2736)

Primary valve spring

31742-48X11

19.1 (0.752)

9.05 (0.3563)

Secondary governor valve I
spring

31742-48X09

30.58 (1.2039)

9.2 (0.362)

Secondary governor valve II
spring

31742-48X10

16.79 (0.6610)

9.0 (0.354)

Reverse clutch

16 pcs

31521-41X02
(Assembly)

19.7 (0.7756)

11.6 (0.457)

High clutch

10 pcs

31521-41X03
(Assembly)

24.2 (0.9528)

11.6 (0.457)

Forward clutch
(Overrun clutch)

20 pcs

31521-41X04
(Assembly)

35.77 (1.4083)

9.7 (0.382)

Low & reverse brake

18 pcs

31655-41X00
(Assembly)

22.3 (0.878)

11.2 (0.4409)

Spring A

31605-41X05

45.6 (1.795)

34.3 (1.350)

Spring B

31605-41X00

53.8 (2.118)

40.3 (1.587)

Spring C

31605-41X01

29.7 (1.1693)

27.6 (1.087)

Band servo

AT-151

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RL4R01A]
Item

Parts

Accumulator

Part No.*

Free length

Outer diameter

Accumulator A

31605-41X02

43.0 (1.693)

18.0 (0.709)

Accumulator B

31605-41X15

66.0 (2.598)

20.8 (0.819)

Accumulator C

31605-51X01

45.0 (1.772)

29.3 (1.154)

Accumulator D

31605-41X06

58.4 (2.299)

17.3 (0.681)

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

Accumulator O-ring

ECS007L1

Diameter mm (in)

Accumulator
A

Small diameter end

29 (1.14)

32 (1.26)

45 (1.77)

29 (1.14)

Large diameter end

45 (1.77)

50 (1.97)

45 (1.77)

Clutch and Brakes

ECS007L2

REVERSE CLUTCH
Code number

49X11

Number of drive plates

Number of driven plates

Thickness of drive plate
(in)
Clearance

mm (in)

Standard

1.90 - 2.05 (0.0748 - 0.0807)

Wear limit

1.80 (0.0709)

Standard

0.5 - 0.8 (0.020 - 0.031)

Allowable limit

1.2 (0.047)

Thickness of retaining plate

Thickness mm (in)

Part No.*

4.8 (0.189)
5.0 (0.197)
5.2 (0.205)
5.4 (0.213)
5.6 (0.220)

31537-42X02
31537-42X03
31537-42X04
31537-42X05
31537-42X06

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

HIGH CLUTCH
Code number

49X11

Number of drive plates

Number of driven plates

Thickness of drive plate
(in)
Clearance

mm (in)

Standard

1.52 - 1.67 (0.0598 - 0.0657)

Wear limit

1.40 (0.0551)

Standard

1.8 - 2.2 (0.071 - 0.087)

Allowable limit

3.2 (0.126)

Thickness of retaining plate

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

AT-152

Thickness mm (in)

Part No.*

3.4 (0.134)
3.6 (0.142)
3.8 (0.150)
4.0 (0.157)
4.2 (0.165)
4.4 (0.173)
4.6 (0.181)
4.8 (0.189)

31537-41X71
31537-41X61
31537-41X62
31537-41X63
31537-41X64
31537-41X65
31537-41X66
31537-41X67

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RL4R01A]
FORWARD CLUTCH
Code number
Number of drive plates

Number of driven plates

Thickness of drive plate
(in)
Clearance

49X11

mm (in)

Standard

1.52 - 1.67 (0.0598 - 0.0657)

Wear limit

1.40 (0.0551)

Standard

0.35 - 0.75 (0.0138 - 0.0295)

Allowable limit

1.75 (0.069)

Thickness of retaining plate

Thickness mm (in)

Part No.*

8.0 (0.315)
8.1 (0.319)
8.2 (0.323)
8.3 (0.327)
8.4 (0.331)
8.5 (0.335)
8.6 (0.339)
8.7 (0.343)
8.8 (0.346)
8.9 (0.350)
9.0 (0.354)
9.1 (0.358)
9.2 (0.362)

31537-41X00
31537-42X60
31537-41X01
31537-42X61
31537-41X02
31537-42X62
31537-41X03
31537-42X63
31537-41X04
31537-42X64
31537-41X05
31537-42X65
31537-41X06

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

OVERRUN CLUTCH
Code number

49X11

Number of drive plates
Number of driven plates
Thickness of drive plate
(in)
Clearance

3
5
mm

mm (in)

Standard

1.90 - 2.05 (0.0748 - 0.0807)

Wear limit

1.80 (0.0709)

Standard

1.0 - 1.4 (0.039 - 0.055)

Allowable limit

2.0 (0.079)

Thickness of retaining plate

Thickness mm (in)

Part No.*

4.2 (0.165)
4.4 (0.173)
4.6 (0.181)
4.8 (0.189)
5.0 (0.197)

31537-41X80
31537-41X81
31537-41X82
31537-41X83
31537-41X84

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

LOW & REVERSE BRAKE
Code number

49X11

Number of drive plates

Number of driven plates

Thickness of drive plate
(in)
Clearance

mm (in)

Standard

1.52 - 1.67 (0.0598 - 0.0657)

Wear limit

1.40 (0.0551)

Standard

0.5 - 0.8 (0.020 - 0.031)

Allowable limit

1.8 (0.071)

AT-153

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RL4R01A]
Thickness mm (in)

Part No.*

7.2 (0.283)
7.4 (0.291)
7.6 (0.299)
7.8 (0.307)
8.0 (0.315)
8.2 (0.323)
8.4 (0.331)
8.6 (0.339)
8.8 (0.346)
9.0 (0.354)
9.2 (0.362)

31667-41X13
31667-41X14
31667-41X07
31667-41X08
31667-41X00
31667-41X01
31667-41X02
31667-41X03
31667-41X04
31667-41X05
31667-41X06

Thickness of retaining plate

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

BRAKE BAND
Code number

49X11

Anchor end pin nut tightening torque
Anchor end pin tightening torque

N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

40 - 51 (4.1 - 5.2, 30 - 37)

N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

4 - 6 (0.4 - 0.6, 35 - 52)

Number of returning revolutions for anchor end pin

2.5

Oil Pump and Low One-way Clutch
Oil pump clearance

mm (in)

Seal ring clearance

mm (in)

ECS007L3

Cam ring — oil pump housing

Standard

0.01 - 0.024 (0.0004 - 0.0009)

Rotor, vanes and control piston — oil pump housing

Standard

0.03 - 0.044 (0.0012 - 0.0017)

Standard

0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098)

Allowable limit

0.25 (0.0098)

Total End Play

ECS007L4

Total end play “T1 ”

0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in)

Thickness of oil pump cover bearing race

Thickness mm (in)

Part No.*

0.8 (0.031)
1.0 (0.039)
1.2 (0.047)
1.4 (0.055)
1.6 (0.063)
1.8 (0.071)
2.0 (0.079)

31435-41X01
31435-41X02
31435-41X03
31435-41X04
31435-41X05
31435-41X06
31435-41X07

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

Parking Gear

ECS007L5

Standard
Seal ring — ring groove clearance

mm (in)

0.15 - 0.20 (0.006 - 0.008)

Allowable limit

0.20 (0.008)

Reverse Clutch Drum End Play
Reverse clutch drum end play “T2 ”

Thickness of oil pump thrust washer

ECS007L6

0.55 - 0.90 mm (0.0217 - 0.0354 in)
Thickness mm (in)

Part No.*

0.9 (0.035)
1.1 (0.043)
1.3 (0.051)
1.5 (0.059)
1.7 (0.067)
1.9 (0.075)

31528-21X01
31528-21X02
31528-21X03
31528-21X04
31528-21X05
31528-21X06

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

Removal and Installation

ECS007L7

AT-154

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RL4R01A]
Number of returning revolutions for lock
nut
Manual control cable

Lock nut tightening torque
lb)

Distance between end of converter housing and torque converter

N·m (kg-m, ft-

mm (in)

10.8 - 12.7 (1.09 - 1.29, 8.0 - 9.3)
26.0 (1.024) or more

AT-155

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
[RE4R01A]

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC

PFP:00000
ECS007L8

ALPHABETICAL INDEX FOR DTC
DTC
Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)

CONSULT-II
GST*1

Reference page

A/T 1ST GR FNCTN

P0731

AT-270

A/T 2ND GR FNCTN

P0732

AT-276

A/T 3RD GR FNCTN

P0733

AT-281

A/T 4TH GR FNCTN

P0734

AT-286

A/T TCC S/V FNCTN

P0744

AT-298

ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC

P0710

AT-255

ENGINE SPEED SIG

P0725

AT-266

L/PRESS SOL/CIRC

P0745

AT-306

O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC

P1760

AT-329

PNP SW/CIRC

P0705

AT-249

SFT SOL A/CIRC*2

P0750

AT-311

SFT SOL B/CIRC*2

P0755

AT-316

TCC SOLENOID/CIRC

P0740

AT-293

TP SEN/CIRC A/T*2

P1705

AT-321

VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*3

P0720

AT-261

●

*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.

●

*2: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.

●

*3: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at
the same time.

AT-156

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
[RE4R01A]
P NO. INDEX FOR DTC
A

DTC

Items
(CONSULT-II screen terms)

CONSULT-II
GST*1

Reference page

P0705

PNP SW/CIRC

AT-249

P0710

ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC

AT-255

P0720

VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*3

AT-261

P0725

ENGINE SPEED SIG

AT-266

P0731

A/T 1ST GR FNCTN

AT-270

P0732

A/T 2ND GR FNCTN

AT-276

P0733

A/T 3RD GR FNCTN

AT-281

P0734

A/T 4TH GR FNCTN

AT-286

P0740

TCC SOLENOID/CIRC

AT-293

P0744

A/T TCC S/V FNCTN

AT-298

P0745

L/PRESS SOL/CIRC

AT-306

P0750

SFT SOL A/CIRC*2

AT-311

P0755

SFT SOL B/CIRC*2

AT-316

P1705

TP SEN/CIRC A/T*2

AT-321

P1760

O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC

AT-329

●

*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.

●

*2: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.

●

*3: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at
the same time.

AT-157

PRECAUTIONS
[RE4R01A]
PFP:00001
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER”

ECS007L9

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system may include seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. If
equipped with dual stage front air bag modules, the SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the
front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and
whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is
included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
The vehicle may be equipped with a passenger air bag deactivation switch. Because no rear seat exists where
a rear-facing child restraint can be placed, the switch is designed to turn off the passenger air bag so that a
rear-facing child restraint can be used in the front passenger seat. The switch is located in the center of the
instrument panel, near the ashtray. When the switch is turned to the ON position, the passenger air bag is
enabled and could inflate for certain types of collision. When the switch is turned to the OFF position, the passenger air bag is disabled and will not inflate. A passenger air bag OFF indicator on the instrument panel lights
up when the passenger air bag is switched OFF. The driver air bag always remains enabled and is not affected
by the passenger air bag deactivation switch.
WARNING:
●
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
●
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
●
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
●
The vehicle may be equipped with a passenger air bag deactivation switch which can be operated
by the customer. When the passenger air bag is switched OFF, the passenger air bag is disabled
and will not inflate. When the passenger air bag is switched ON, the passenger air bag is enabled
and could inflate for certain types of collision. After SRS maintenance or repair, make sure the
passenger air bag deactivation switch is in the same position (ON or OFF) as when the vehicle
arrived for service.

Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine

ECS007LA

The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
●
Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves,
etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
●
Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.).
●
Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit.
●
Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, etc.
●
Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and
ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.

AT-158

PRECAUTIONS
[RE4R01A]

Precautions
●

ECS007LB

Before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative
battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage the TCM,
because battery voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition
switch is turned off.

D
SEF289H

●

When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from TCM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.

AAT470A

●

Before replacing TCM, perform TCM input/output signal
inspection and determine whether TCM functions properly
or not. Refer to AT-242, "TCM INSPECTION TABLE" .

K
MEF040DA

L
●

●

●
●

●
●
●
●

After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform
“DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” if the repair is completed.
Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transmission. It is important to prevent the internal
parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
SAT964I
Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common
shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere with the operation
of the transmission.
Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly.
All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or
reassembly.
Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the transmission is disassembled.
It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated.

AT-159

PRECAUTIONS
[RE4R01A]
●

●
●
●
●
●
●

The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced.
Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent
springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight.
Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings
and seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease.
Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.
Clean or replace ATF cooler if excessive foreign material is found in oil pan or clogging strainer. Refer to
AT-160, "ATF COOLER SERVICE" .
After overhaul, refill the transmission with new ATF.
When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque
converter and ATF cooling system.
Always follow the procedures when changing A/T fluid. Refer to MA-37, "Checking A/T Fluid" .

Service Notice or Precautions

ECS007LC

FAIL-SAFE
The TCM has an electronic Fail-Safe (limp home mode). This allows the vehicle to be driven even if a major
electrical input/output device circuit is damaged.
Under Fail-Safe, the vehicle always runs in third gear, even with a shift lever position of 1, 2 or D. The customer may complain of sluggish or poor acceleration.
When the ignition key is turned ON following Fail-Safe operation, O/D OFF indicator lamp blinks for about 8
seconds. Refer to AT-198, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
The blinking of the O/D OFF indicator lamp for about 8 seconds will appear only once and be cleared. The
customer may resume normal driving conditions.
Always follow the “Work Flow”. Refer to AT-208, "Work Flow" .
The SELF-DIAGNOSIS results will be as follows:
The first SELF-DIAGNOSIS will indicate damage to the vehicle speed sensor or the revolution sensor.
During the next SELF-DIAGNOSIS, performed after checking the sensor, no damages will be indicated.

AT-160

PRECAUTIONS
[RE4R01A]
ing solvent and compressed air after repair. Check Service Bulletins for latest A/T oil cooler cleaning procedure. For radiator replacement refer to CO-30, "RADIATOR" .

OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS
A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through
the blinking pattern of the O/D OFF indicator or the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Refer to the table on B
AT-189 for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result.
●
The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MIL are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM memAT
ories.
Always perform the procedure “HOW TO ERASE DTC”. Refer to AT-187, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" to
complete the repair and avoid unnecessary blinking of the MIL.
●
The following self-diagnostic items can be detected using ECM self-diagnostic results mode* only when D
the O/D OFF indicator lamp does not indicate any malfunctions.
–
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
E
–
A/T 1st, 2nd, 3rd, or 4th gear function
–
A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up)
*: For details of OBD-II, refer to EC-619, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" (VG33E only) or ECF
1220, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" (VG33ER only).
●
Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slidelocking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-4, "HARNESS
CONNECTOR" .
G
●

Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
●
Refer to GI-13, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" .
●
Refer to PG-9, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" for power distribution circuit.
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
●
Refer toGI-9, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" .
●
Refer to GI-25, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .

ECS007LD

AT-161

PREPARATION
[RE4R01A]

PREPARATION
Special Service Tools

PFP:00002
ECS007LE

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Description
Tool name
ST2505S001
(J34301-C)
Oil pressure gauge set
1 ST25051001
(
—
)
Oil pressure gauge
2 ST25052000
(
—
)
Hose
3 ST25053000
(
—
)
Joint pipe
4 ST25054000
(
—
)
Adapter
5 ST25055000
(
—
)
Adapter

Measuring line pressure

ZZA0600D

ST07870000
(J37068)
Transmission case stand

Disassembling and assembling A/T
a: 182 mm (7.17 in)
b: 282 mm (11.10 in)
c: 230 mm (9.06 in)
d: 100 mm (3.94 in)

NT421

KV31102100
(J37065)
Torque converter one-way clutch
check tool

Checking one-way clutch in torque converter

NT098

ST25850000
(J25721-A)
Sliding hammer

Removing oil pump assembly
a: 179 mm (7.05 in)
b: 70 mm (2.76 in)
c: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia.
d: M12 x 1.75P

NT422

KV31102400
(J34285 and J34285-87)
Clutch spring compressor

Removing and installing clutch return springs
a: 320 mm (12.60 in)
b: 174 mm (6.85 in)

NT423

AT-162

PREPARATION
[RE4R01A]
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
ST33200000
(J26082)
Drift

Description

Installing oil pump housing oil seal Installing
rear oil seal
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 44.5 mm (1.752 in) dia.

AT
NT091

(J34291)
Shim setting gauge set

Selecting oil pump cover bearing race and oil
pump thrust washer

E
NT101

AT-163

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4R01A]

OVERALL SYSTEM
A/T Electrical Parts Location

PFP:00000
ECS007LF

WAT494

AT-164

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4R01A]

Circuit Diagram

ECS007LG

WCWA0090E

AT-165

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4R01A]

Cross-sectional View

ECS007LH

LCIA0288E

AT-166

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4R01A]

Hydraulic Control Circuit

ECS007LI

LCIA0264E

AT-167

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4R01A]

Shift Mechanism

ECS007LJ

The automatic transmission uses compact, dual planetary gear systems to improve power-transmission efficiency, simplify construction and reduce weight.
It also employs an optimum shift control and superwide gear ratios. They improve starting performance and
acceleration during medium and high-speed operation.
Two one-way clutches are also employed: one is used for the forward clutch and the other for the low clutch.
These one-way clutches, combined with four accumulators, reduce shifting shock to a minimum.

CONSTRUCTION

SAT509I

Torque converter clutch piston

Torque converter

Oil pump

Input shaft

Brake band

Reverse clutch

High clutch

Front pinion gear

Front sun gear

10.

Front internal gear

11. Front planetary carrier

12.

Rear sun gear

13.

Rear pinion gear

14. Rear internal gear

15.

Rear planetary carrier

16.

Forward clutch

17. Forward one-way clutch

18.

Overrun clutch

21.

Parking pawl

19.

Low one-way clutch

20. Low & reverse brake

22.

Parking gear

23. Output shaft

AT-168

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4R01A]
FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE
Clutch and brake components

Abbr.

Function

Reverse clutch 6

R/C

To transmit input power to front sun gear 9 .

High clutch 7

H/C

To transmit input power to front planetary carrier 11 .

Forward clutch 16

F/C

To connect front planetary carrier 11 with forward one-way clutch
17 .

Overrun clutch 18

O/C

To connect front planetary carrier 11 with rear internal gear 14 .

Brake band 5

B/B

To lock front sun gear 9 .

Forward one-way clutch 17

F/O.C

When forward clutch 16 is engaged, to stop rear internal gear 14
from rotating in opposite direction against engine revolution.

Low one-way clutch 19

L/O.C

To stop front planetary carrier 11 from rotating in opposite direction against engine revolution.

Low & reverse brake 20

L & R/B

To lock front planetary carrier 11 .

CLUTCH AND BAND CHART
Band servo
Shift position

Reverse
clutch

High
clutch

Forward
clutch

Overrun
clutch

2nd
apply

3rd
releas
e

4th
apply

Forward
oneway
clutch

Low
oneway
clutch

Low &
revers
e
brake

F
Lock-up

Remarks

PARK
POSITION

REVERSE
POSITION

NEUTRAL
POSITION
1st

*1D

2nd

*1A

3rd

*1A

4th

*3C

1st

2nd

Automatic
shift
1⇔2⇔3
⇔4

Automatic
shift
1⇔2

Locks
(held stationary) in
1st speed
1⇐2

2
1st
1

●

*1: Operates when overdrive control switch is being set in OFF position.

●

*2: Oil pressure is applied to both 2nd “apply” side and 3rd “release” side of band servo piston. However, brake band does not contract because oil pressure area on the “release” side is greater than that on the “apply” side.

●

*3: Oil pressure is applied to 4th “apply” side in condition *2 above, and brake band contracts.

●

*4: A/T will not shift to 4th when overdrive control switch is set in OFF position.

●

*5: Operates when overdrive control switch is OFF.

●

: Operates.

●

A: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, activating engine brake.

●

B: Operates during “progressive” acceleration.

●

C: Operates but does not affect power transmission.

●

D: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, but does not affect engine brake.

AT-169

D*4
*2C

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4R01A]
POWER TRANSMISSION
P and N Positions
●

●

P position
Similar to the N position, no control members operate. The parking pawl interconnected with the select
lever engages with the parking gear to mechanically hold the output shaft so that the power train is locked.
N position
No control members operate. Power from the input shaft is not transmitted to the output shaft since the
clutch does not operate.

SAT039J

AT-170

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4R01A]
11 Position
A

SAT100J

Forward clutch
Forward one-way clutch
Overrun clutch
Low and reverse brake

As overrun clutch engages, rear internal gear is locked by the operation of low and reverse
brake.
This is different from that of D1 and 21 .

Engine brake

Overrun clutch always engages, therefore engine brake can be obtained when decelerating.

AT-171

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4R01A]
D1 and 21 Positions

SAT096J

Forward one-way clutch
Forward clutch
Low one-way clutch

Rear internal gear is locked to rotate counterclockwise because of the functioning of these
three clutches. (Start-up at D1 )

Overrun clutch
engagement conditions
(Engine brake)

D1 : Overdrive control switch in OFF
Throttle opening less than 3/16
21 : Throttle opening less than 3/16
At D1 and 21 positions, engine brake is not activated due to free turning of low one-way
clutch.

AT-172

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4R01A]
D2 , 22 and 12 Positions
A

SAT097J

Forward clutch
Forward one-way clutch
Brake band

Rear sun gear drives rear planetary carrier and combined front internal gear. Front internal
gear now rotates around front sun gear accompanying front planetary carrier.
As front planetary carrier transfers the power to rear internal gear through forward clutch and
forward one-way clutch, this rotation of rear internal gear increases the speed of rear planetary carrier compared with that of the 1st speed.

Overrun clutch
engagement conditions

D2 : Overdrive control switch in OFF
Throttle opening less than 3/16
22 : Throttle opening less than 3/16
12 : Always engaged

AT-173

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4R01A]
D3 Position

SAT098J

High clutch
Forward clutch
Forward one-way clutch

Input power is transmitted to front planetary carrier through high clutch. And front planetary
carrier is connected to rear internal gear by operation of forward clutch and forward one-way
clutch.
This rear internal gear rotation and another input (the rear sun gear) accompany rear planetary carrier to turn at the same speed.

Overrun clutch
engagement conditions

D3 : Overdrive control switch in OFF
Throttle opening less than 3/16

AT-174

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4R01A]
D4 (O/D) Position
A

SAT099J

High clutch
Brake band
Forward clutch
(Does not affect power transmission)

Input power is transmitted to front carrier through high clutch.
This front planetary carrier turns around the sun gear which is fixed by brake band and
makes front internal gear (output) turn faster.

Engine brake

At D4 position, there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line and engine brake
can be obtained when decelerating.

AT-175

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4R01A]
R Position

SAT101J

Reverse clutch
Low and reverse brake

Engine brake

As there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line, engine brake can be obtained
when decelerating.

AT-176

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4R01A]

Control System

ECS007LK

OUTLINE
The automatic transmission senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors. It always controls
the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
SENSORS

TCM

ACTUATORS

PNP switch
Throttle position sensor
Closed throttle position switch
Wide open throttle position switch
Engine speed signal
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Revolution sensor
Vehicle speed sensor
Overdrive control switch
ASCD control unit
Stop lamp switch (VG33ER only)
Turbine revolution sensor
(VG33ER only)

Shift control
Line pressure control
Lock-up control
Overrun clutch control
Timing control
Fail-safe control
Self-diagnosis
CONSULT-II communication line
Duet-EA control

Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
Overrun clutch solenoid valve
Torque converter clutch solenoid
valve
Line pressure solenoid valve
O/D OFF indicator lamp

CONTROL SYSTEM

WAT495

AT-177

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4R01A]
TCM FUNCTION
The function of the TCM is to:
●
Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors.
●
Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation.
●
Send required output signals to the respective solenoids.

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL OF TCM
Sensors and solenoid valves

Input

Output

Function

PNP switch

Detects select lever position and sends a signal to TCM.

Throttle position sensor

Detects throttle valve position and sends a signal to TCM.

Closed throttle position switch

Detects throttle valve's fully-closed position and sends a signal to TCM.

Wide open throttle position switch

Detects a throttle valve position of greater than 1/2 of full throttle and sends a
signal to TCM.

Engine speed signal

From ECM.

A/T fluid temperature sensor

Detects transmission fluid temperature and sends a signal to TCM.

Revolution sensor

Detects output shaft rpm and sends a signal to TCM.

Vehicle speed sensor

Used as an auxiliary vehicle speed sensor. Sends a signal when revolution
sensor (installed on transmission) malfunctions.

Overdrive control switch

Sends a signal, which prohibits a shift to D4 (overdrive) position, to the TCM.

ASCD control unit

Sends the cruise signal and D4 (overdrive) cancellation signal from ASCD
control unit to TCM.

Turbine revolution sensor (VG33ER
only)

Sends the input shaft revolution signal.

Stop lamp switch (VG33ER only)

Sends the lock-up release signal to the TCM at the time of D4 (lock-up)

Shift solenoid valve A/B

Selects shifting point suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent
from TCM.

Line pressure solenoid valve

Regulates (or decreases) line pressure suited to driving conditions in relation
to a signal sent from TCM.

Torque converter clutch solenoid
valve

Regulates (or decreases) lock-up pressure suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM.

Overrun clutch solenoid valve

Controls an “engine brake” effect suited to driving conditions in relation to a
signal sent from TCM.

O/D OFF indicator lamp

Shows TCM faults, when A/T control components malfunction.

Control Mechanism

ECS007LL

LINE PRESSURE CONTROL
TCM has the various line pressure control characteristics to meet the driving conditions.
An ON-OFF duty signal is sent to the line pressure solenoid valve based on TCM characteristics.
Hydraulic pressure on the clutch and brake is electronically controlled through the line pressure solenoid valve
to accommodate engine torque. This results in smooth shift operation.

Normal Control
The line pressure to throttle opening characteristics is set for suitable
clutch operation.

SAT003J

AT-178

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4R01A]
Back-up Control (Engine brake)
A

If the selector lever is shifted to 2 position while driving in D4 (O/D)
or D3 , great driving force is applied to the clutch inside the transmission. Clutch operating pressure (line pressure) must be increased to
deal with this driving force.

SAT004J

During Shift Change
The line pressure is temporarily reduced corresponding to a change
in engine torque when shifting gears (that is, when the shift solenoid
valve is switched for clutch operation) to reduce shifting shock.

SAT005J

At Low Fluid Temperature
●

●

Fluid viscosity and frictional characteristics of the clutch facing change with fluid temperature. Clutch
engaging or band-contacting pressure is compensated for, according to fluid temperature, to stabilize
shifting quality.
The line pressure is reduced below 60°C (140°F) to prevent
shifting shock due to low viscosity of automatic transmission
fluid when temperature is low.

L
SAT006J

M
●

Line pressure is increased to a maximum irrespective of the
throttle opening when fluid temperature drops to −10°C (14°F).
This pressure rise is adopted to prevent a delay in clutch and
brake operation due to extreme drop of fluid viscosity at low
temperature.

SAT007J

SHIFT CONTROL
The shift is regulated entirely by electronic control to accommodate vehicle speed and varying engine operations. This is accomplished by electrical signals transmitted by the revolution sensor and throttle position sensor. This results in improved acceleration performance and fuel economy.

AT-179

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4R01A]
Control of Shift Solenoid Valves A and B
The TCM activates shift solenoid valves A and B according to signals from the throttle position sensor and revolution sensor to select
the optimum gear position on the basis of the shift schedule memorized in the TCM.
The shift solenoid valve performs simple ON-OFF operation. When
set to ON, the drain circuit closes and pilot pressure is applied to the
shift valve.
[Relation between shift solenoid valves A and B and gear positions]

SAT008J

Gear position

Shift solenoid valve
D 1 , 21 , 11

D 2 , 2 2 , 12

D4 (O/D)

N-P

ON (Closed)

OFF (Open)

ON (Closed)

OFF (Open)

ON (Closed)

Control of Shift Valves A and B

SAT047J

Pilot pressure generated by the operation of shift solenoid valves A and B is applied to the end face of shift
valves A and B.
The drawing shows the operation of shift valve B. When the shift solenoid valve is “ON”, pilot pressure applied
to the end face of the shift valve overcomes spring force, moving the valve upward.

LOCK-UP CONTROL
The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is locked to eliminate torque converter slip to
increase power transmission efficiency. The solenoid valve is controlled by an ON-OFF duty signal sent from
the TCM. The signal is converted to oil pressure signal which controls the torque converter clutch piston.

Conditions for Lock-up Operation
When vehicle is driven in 4th gear position, vehicle speed and throttle opening are detected. If the detected
values fall within the lock-up zone memorized in the TCM, lock-up is performed.
Overdrive control switch

Selector lever
Gear position
Vehicle speed sensor
Throttle position sensor
Closed throttle position switch
A/T fluid temperature sensor

OFF
D position
D3

More than set value
Less than set opening
OFF
More than 40°C (104°F)

AT-180

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4R01A]
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Control
A

The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM.
The plunger closes the drain circuit during the OFF period, and
opens the circuit during the ON period. If the percentage of OFF-time
increases in one cycle, the pilot pressure drain time is reduced and
pilot pressure remains high.

SAT010J

The torque converter clutch piston is designed to slip to adjust the
ratio of ON-OFF, thereby reducing lock-up shock.
OFF-time INCREASING
↓
Amount of drain DECREASING
↓
Pilot pressure HIGH
↓
Lock-up RELEASING

SAT011J

Torque Converter Clutch Control Valve Operation
I

K
SAT048J

Lock-up Released
The OFF-duration of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is long, and pilot pressure is high. The pilot
pressure pushes the end face of the torque converter clutch control valve in combination with spring force to
move the valve to the left. As a result, converter pressure is applied to chamber A (torque converter clutch piston release side). Accordingly, the torque converter clutch piston remains unlocked.
Lock-up Applied
When the OFF-duration of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is short, pilot pressure drains and
becomes low. Accordingly, the control valve moves to the right by the pilot pressure of the other circuit and
converter pressure. As a result, converter pressure is applied to chamber B, keeping the torque converter
clutch piston applied.
Also smooth lock-up is provided by transient application and release of the lock-up.

OVERRUN CLUTCH CONTROL (ENGINE BRAKE CONTROL)
Forward one-way clutch is used to reduce shifting shocks in downshifting operations. This clutch transmits
engine torque to the wheels. However, drive force from the wheels is not transmitted to the engine because
the one-way clutch rotates idle. This means the engine brake is not effective.
The overrun clutch operates when the engine brake is needed.

AT-181

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4R01A]
Overrun Clutch Operating Conditions

SAT014J

Gear position
D position

D1 , D2 , D3 gear position

2 position

21 , 22 gear position

1 position

11 , 12 gear position

Throttle opening
Less than 3/16
At any position

Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve Control
The overrun clutch solenoid valve is operated by an ON-OFF signal
transmitted by the TCM to provide overrun clutch control (engine
brake control).
When this solenoid valve is ON, the pilot pressure drain port closes.
When it is OFF, the drain port opens.
During the solenoid valve ON pilot pressure is applied to the end
face of the overrun clutch control valve.

SAT015J

Overrun Clutch Control Valve Operation
When the solenoid valve is ON, pilot pressure A is applied to the
overrun clutch control valve. This pushes up the overrun clutch control valve. The line pressure is then shut off so that the clutch does
not engage.
When the solenoid valve is OFF, pilot pressure A is not generated. At
this point, the overrun clutch control valve moves downward by
spring force. As a result, overrun clutch operation pressure is provided by the overrun clutch reducing valve. This causes the overrun
clutch to engage.
In the 1 position, the overrun clutch control valve remains pushed
down so that the overrun clutch is engaged at all times.

SAT049J

AT-182

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4R01A]

Control Valve

ECS007LM

FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVE
Valve name
●

Pressure regulator valve

●

Pressure regulator plug

●

Pressure regulator sleeve plug

Function
Regulate oil discharged from the oil pump to provide optimum line pressure for all driving
conditions.

Pressure modifier valve

Used as a signal supplementary valve to the pressure regulator valve. Regulates pressure-modifier pressure (signal pressure) which controls optimum line pressure for all
driving conditions.

Modifier accumulator piston

Smooths hydraulic pressure regulated by the pressure modifier valve to prevent pulsations.

Pilot valve

Regulates line pressure to maintain a constant pilot pressure level which controls lock-up
mechanism, overrun clutch, 3-2 timing required for shifting.

Accumulator control valve
Accumulator control sleeve

Regulate accumulator back-pressure to pressure suited to driving conditions.

Manual valve

Directs line pressure to oil circuits corresponding to select positions.
Hydraulic pressure drains when the shift lever is in Neutral.

Shift valve A

Simultaneously switches three oil circuits using output pressure of shift solenoid valve A
to meet driving conditions (vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc.).
Provides automatic downshifting and up-shifting (1st → 2nd → 3rd → 4th gears/4th →
3rd → 2nd → 1st gears) in combination with shift valve B.

Shift valve B

Simultaneously switches three oil circuits using output pressure of shift solenoid valve B
in relation to driving conditions (vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc.).
Provides automatic downshifting and up-shifting (1st → 2nd → 3rd → 4th gears/4th →
3rd → 2nd → 1st gears) in combination with shift valve A.

Shuttle shift valve S

Switches hydraulic circuits to provide 3-2 timing control and overrun clutch control in
relation to the throttle opening.
Inactivates the overrun clutch to prevent interlocking in 4th gear when the throttle is wide
open.

Overrun clutch control valve

Switches hydraulic circuits to prevent engagement of the overrun clutch simultaneously
with application of the brake band in 4th gear. (Interlocking occurs if the overrun clutch
engages during D4 gear operation.)

4-2 relay valve

Memorizes that the transmission is in 4th gear. Prevents the transmission from downshifting from 4th gear to 3rd and then to 2nd in combination with 4-2 sequence valve and
shift valves A and B when downshifting from 4th to 2nd gear.

4-2 sequence valve

Prevents band servo pressure from draining before high clutch operating pressure and
band servo releasing pressure drain (from the same circuit) during downshifting from 4th
to 2nd gear.

Servo charger valve

An accumulator and a one-way orifice are used in the 2nd gear band servo oil circuit to
dampen shifting shock when shifting from 1st to 2nd gear.
To maintain adequate flow rate when downshifting from 4th or 3rd gear to 2nd gear, the
servo charger valve directs 2nd gear band servo hydraulic pressure to the circuit without
going through the one-way orifice when downshifting from 3rd or a higher gear.

3-2 timing valve

Prevents a late operation of the brake band when shifting selector lever from D to 1 or 2
position while driving in D3 .

1 reducing valve

Reduces low & reverse brake pressure to dampen engine-brake shock when downshifting from the 1 position 2nd gear to 1st gear.

Overrun clutch reducing valve

Reduces oil pressure directed to the overrun clutch and prevents engine-brake shock.
In 1 and 2 positions, line pressure acts on the overrun clutch reducing valve to increase
the pressure-regulating point, with resultant engine brake capability.

Torque converter relief valve

Prevents an excessive rise in torque converter pressure.

AT-183

OVERALL SYSTEM
[RE4R01A]
Valve name

Function

Torque converter clutch control valve,
torque converter clutch control plug and
torque converter clutch control sleeve

Activate or inactivate the lock-up function.
Also provide smooth lock-up through transient application and release of the lock-up
system.

Shuttle shift valve D

Switches hydraulic circuits so that output pressure of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve acts on the lock-up valve in the D position of 2nd, 3rd and 4th gears. (In the D
position 1st gear, lock-up is inhibited.)
●

Lock-up control is not affected in D position 2nd, 3rd or 4th gears, unless output pressure of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is generated by a signal from the
control unit.

AT-184

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4R01A]

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Introduction

PFP:00000

A
ECS007LN

The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems.
The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM in combination B
with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in
the ECM memory but not the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the O/D OFF indicator lamp. The malfunction is
stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For detail, AT
refer to AT-190, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT TEST MODE" .

OBD-II Function for A/T System

ECS007LO

The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system. One function
is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the
ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a
diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches
and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
The MIL automatically illuminates in One or Two Trip Detection Logic when a malfunction is sensed in relation
to A/T system parts.

One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II

ECS007LP

ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC
If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored in
the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function.

TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC

When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC
(diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL will not illuminate. — First Trip
If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive,
the MIL will illuminate. — Second Trip
A/T-related parts for which the MIL illuminates during the first or second test drive are listed below.

MIL

Items
One trip detection
Shift solenoid valve A — DTC: P0750 (1108)

Shift solenoid valve B — DTC: P0755 (1201)

Throttle position sensor or switch — DTC: P1705 (1206)

Except above

J
Two trip detection

The “trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation.

OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

M
ECS007LQ

HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
1.

●
●

(
with CONSULT-II or
GST) CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0710,
P0720, P0725, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. However, in case of the Mode II and GST they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring
or occurred in the past and returned to normal.
CONSULT-II can identify them as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended.

AT-185

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4R01A]
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown
below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELFDIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the
last detection of a DTC.

SAT014K

If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.

SAT015K

If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “[1t]”.

SAT016K

Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated
load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle
speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data,
and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II
or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
detail, refer to EC-675, "CONSULT-II Function" (VG33E only) or EC-1276, "CONSULT-II Function" (VG33ER
only).
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data of freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data.
Priority
1

2
3

Items
Freeze frame data

Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306 (0701, 0603 - 0608)
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171 (0115), P0172 (0114), P0174 (0209), P0175
(0210)
Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)

1st trip freeze frame data

AT-186

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4R01A]
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.

HOW TO ERASE DTC
The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT-II, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as
B
described following.
●
If the battery terminal is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours.
●
When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT-II or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode
AT
selector on the ECM.
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC
related to OBD-II. For details, refer to EC-632, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC
INFORMATION" (VG33E only) or EC-1233, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFOR- D
MATION" (VG33ER only).
●
Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC)
E
●
1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC)
●
Freeze frame data
●
1st trip freeze frame data
F
●
System readiness test (SRT) codes
●
Test values

HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT-II)
●

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

If a DTC is displayed for both ECM and TCM, it needs to be erased for both ECM and TCM.
If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 5
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
Turn CONSULT-II ON and touch “A/T”.
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
Touch “ERASE”, (The DTC in the TCM will be erased), then touch “BACK” twice.
Touch “ENGINE”.
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.

AT-187

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4R01A]
7.

Touch “ERASE”, (The DTC in the ECM will be erased).

SAT017K

HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)
1.
2.

If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 5
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
Perform “OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)”. Refer to AT-198, "OBD-II SELFDIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing
the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.)
Select Mode 4 with Generic Scan Tool (GST). For details, refer to EC-685, "Generic Scan Tool (GST)
Function" (VG33E only) or EC-1286, "Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function" (VG33ER only).

HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)
1.
2.

If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 5
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
Perform “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)”. Refer to AT-198, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the
diagnosis only to erase the DTC.)

AT-188

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4R01A]

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
1.

ECS007LR

The malfunction indicator lamp will light up when the ignition
switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is for
checking the lamp.
● If the malfunction indicator lamp does not light up, refer to DI25, "WARNING LAMPS" or EC-634, "Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)" (VG33E only) or EC-1235, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" (VG33ER only).

When the engine is started, the malfunction indicator lamp
should go off.
SAT964I
If the lamp remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an emission-related (OBD-II) malfunction. For detail,
refer to EC-619, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" (VG33E only) or EC-1220, "ON BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" (VG33ER only).

CONSULT-II

ECS007LS

After performing “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)” [Refer to AT-189, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)" ], place check marks for results on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Refer to AT-205, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" . Reference pages are provided following the items.
NOTICE:
1. The CONSULT-II electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each solenoid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-II display. If the difference is
noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical
parts using applicable diagnostic procedures.
2. Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on CONSULT-II and that indicated in Service Manual may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons:
–
Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance,
–
Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start, and
–
Gear position displayed on CONSULT-II indicates the point where shifts are completed.
3. Shift solenoid valve “A” or “B” is displayed on CONSULT-II at the start of shifting. Gear position is displayed upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM).
4. Additional CONSULT-II information can be found in the Operation Manual supplied with the CONSULT-II
unit.

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)
1.

Turn on CONSULT-II and touch “ENGINE” for OBD-II detected
items or touch “A/T” for TCM self-diagnosis.
If A/T is not displayed, check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-246, "Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN" . If result
is NG, refer to PG-9, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" .

SAT014K

AT-189

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4R01A]
2.

Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing
operation.
CONSULT-II performs REAL-TIME SELF-DIAGNOSIS.
Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be displayed at real time.

SAT987J

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT TEST MODE
Detected items
(Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “SELFDIAG RESULTS” test mode)

TCM self-diagnosis
Available by O/D OFF

OBD-II (DTC)
Available by malfunc-

Malfunction is detected when ...
“A/T”

“ENGINE”

PNP position switch circuit
—

●

PNP SW/CIRC

Revolution sensor
VHCL SPEED
SEN·A/T

●

VEH SPD SEN/CIR
AT

Vehicle speed sensor (Meter)
VHCL SPEED
SEN·MTR

●

A/T 1ST GR FNCTN

A/T 2nd gear function
—

●

A/T 2ND GR FNCTN

A/T 3rd gear function
—

●

A/T 3RD GR FNCTN

A/T 4th gear function
—

●

A/T 4TH GR FNCTN

A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up)
—

●

SFT SOL A/CIRC

Shift solenoid valve B
SHIFT SOLENOID/V
B

●

SFT SOL B/CIRC

Overrun clutch solenoid valve
OVERRUN
CLUTCH S/V

●

A/T TCC S/V
FNCTN

Shift solenoid valve A
SHIFT SOLENOID/V
A

tion indicator lamp*2,
“ENGINE” on CONSULT-II or GST

—

P0705

TCM does not receive the proper
voltage signal from the sensor.

P0720

TCM does not receive the proper
voltage signal from the sensor.

—

A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st
gear position even if electrical circuit is good.

—

P0731*1

A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd
gear position even if electrical circuit is good.

—

P0732*1

A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd
gear position even if electrical circuit is good.

—

P0733*1

A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th
gear position even if electrical circuit is good.

—

P0734*1

—

P0744*1

TCM detects an improper voltage
drop when it tries to operate the
solenoid valve.

P0750

TCM detects an improper voltage
drop when it tries to operate the
solenoid valve.

P0755

TCM detects an improper voltage
drop when it tries to operate the
solenoid valve.

P1760

TCM does not receive the correct
voltage signal (based on the gear
position) from the switch.

—

A/T 1st gear function
—

indicator lamp or “A/T”
on CONSULT-II

O/R CLUCH SOL/
CIRC

●

A/T cannot perform lock-up even if
electrical circuit is good.

AT-190

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4R01A]
Detected items
(Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “SELFDIAG RESULTS” test mode)

TCM self-diagnosis
Available by O/D OFF

OBD-II (DTC)
Available by malfunc-

Malfunction is detected when ...
“A/T”

“ENGINE”
indicator lamp or “A/T”
on CONSULT-II

T/C clutch solenoid valve
T/C CLUTCH SOL/V

●

TCC SOLENOID/
CIRC

Line pressure solenoid valve
LINE PRESSURE S/
V

●

L/PRESS SOL/CIRC

Throttle position sensor
Throttle position switch
THROTTLE POSI
SEN

●

ENGINE SPEED SIG
A/T fluid temperature sensor
BATT/FLUID TEMP
SEN

●

ATF TEMP SEN/
CIRC

Turbine revolution sensor (VG33ER only)
TURBINE REV

D
P0745

TCM receives an excessively low
or high voltage from the sensor.
X

P1705

TCM does not receive the proper
voltage signal from the ECM.

P0725

TCM receives an excessively low
or high voltage from the sensor.

P0710

●

TCM does not receive the proper
voltage signal from the sensor.

●

TCM memory (RAM) is malfunctioning.

—

K
●

TCM memory (EEP ROM) is malfunctioning.

—

L
●

INITIAL START
—
No failure
(NO DTC IS DETECTED FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED**)

J
TCM memory (ROM) is malfunctioning.

—

Initial start

●

TCM (EEP ROM)
CONT UNIT (EEP
ROM)

TCM detects an improper voltage
drop when it tries to operate the
solenoid valve.

P0740

—

TCM (ROM)
CONTROL UNIT
(ROM)

tion indicator lamp*2,
“ENGINE” on CONSULT-II or GST

—

TCM (RAM)
CONTROL UNIT
(RAM)

TCM detects an improper voltage
drop when it tries to operate the
solenoid valve.

TP SEN/CIRC A/T

Engine speed signal

●

This is not a malfunction message
(Whenever shutting off a power
supply to the control unit, this
message appears on the screen).

—

No failure has been detected.

X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
*1: These malfunctions cannot be displayed by MIL
if another malfunction is assigned to MIL.
*2: Refer to EC-634, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" (VG33E only) or EC-1235, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" (VG33ER only).

AT-191

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4R01A]
DATA MONITOR MODE (A/T)
Monitor item
Item

Display

Vehicle speed sensor 1 (A/
T)
(Revolution sensor)

VHCL/S SE·A/T
[km/h] or [mph]

Vehicle speed sensor 2
(Meter)

VHCL/S
SE·MTR
[km/h] or [mph]

Throttle position sensor

A/T fluid temperature sensor

TCM input
signals

THRTL POS
SEN
[V]

—

FLUID TEMP SE
[V]

Battery voltage

BATTERY VOLT
[V]

Engine speed

ENGINE SPEED
[rpm]

Turbine revolution sensor
(VG33ER only)

TURBINE REV
[rpm]

Overdrive control switch

OVERDRIVE
SW
[ON/OFF]

PN position switch

R position switch

D position switch

2 position switch

1 position switch

ASCD cruise signal

●

Vehicle speed computed
from signal of revolution
sensor is displayed.

When racing engine in P or
N position with vehicle stationary, CONSULT-II data
may not indicate 0 km/h (0
mph).

●

Vehicle speed computed
from signal of vehicle
speed sensor is displayed.

Vehicle speed display may
not be accurate under
approx. 10 km/h (6 mph). It
may not indicate 0 km/h (0
mph) when vehicle is stationary.

●

Throttle position sensor
signal voltage is displayed.

●

A/T fluid temperature
sensor signal voltage is
displayed.

●

Signal voltage lowers as
fluid temperature rises.

●

Source voltage of TCM is
displayed.

●

Engine speed, computed
from engine speed signal,
is displayed.

Engine speed display may
not be accurate under
approx. 800 rpm. It may not
indicate 0 rpm even when
engine is not running.

●

Turbine revolution computed from signal of turbine revolution sensor is
displayed.

Error may occur under
approx. 800 rpm and will
not indicate 0 rpm even if
engine is not running.

●

ON/OFF state computed
from signal of overdrive
control SW is displayed.

●

ON/OFF state computed
from signal of PN position
SW is displayed.

●

ON/OFF state computed
from signal of R position
SW is displayed.

●

ON/OFF state computed
from signal of D position
SW is displayed.

●

ON/OFF status, computed from signal of 2
position SW, is displayed.

●

ON/OFF status, computed from signal of 1
position SW, is displayed.

●

Status of ASCD cruise
signal is displayed.
ON ... Cruising state
OFF ... Normal running
state

—

PN POSI SW
[ON/OFF]

—

R POSITION SW
[ON/OFF]

—

D POSITION SW
[ON/OFF]

—

2 POSITION SW
[ON/OFF]

—

1 POSITION SW
[ON/OFF]

—

ASCD - CRUISE
[ON/OFF]
X

Remarks

—

Description

Main signals

—

AT-192

●

This is displayed even
when no ASCD is
mounted.

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4R01A]
Monitor item
Item
ASCD - O/D cut signal

Kickdown switch

Closed throttle position
switch

Wide open throttle position
switch

Stop lamp switch (VG33ER
only)

Display
ASCD - O/D
CUT
[ON/OFF]

KICKDOWN SW
[ON/OFF]
CLOSED THL/
SW
[ON/OFF]
W/O THRL/PSW
[ON/OFF]

TCM input
signals

Selector lever position

Throttle position

Line pressure duty

Torque converter clutch
solenoid valve duty

VEHICLE
SPEED
[km/h] or [mph]
THROTTLE
POSI
[/8]
LINE PRES DTY
[%]

—

Shift solenoid valve B

SHIFT S/V B
[ON/OFF]

●

This is displayed even
when no kickdown switch
is equipped.

●

ON/OFF status, computed from signal of
closed throttle position
SW, is displayed.

—

●

Selector lever position
data, used for computation by TCM, is displayed.

●

Vehicle speed data, used
for computation by TCM,
is displayed.

●

Throttle position data,
used for computation by
TCM, is displayed.

—

Control value of torque
converter clutch solenoid
valve, computed by TCM
from each input signal, is
displayed.

●

Control value of shift solenoid valve A, computed
by TCM from each input
signal, is displayed.

●

Control value of shift solenoid valve B, computed
by TCM from each input
signal, is displayed.

AT-193

●

A specific value used for
control is displayed if failsafe is activated due to
error.

K
●

A specific value used for
control is displayed if failsafe is activated due to
error.

Control value of line pressure solenoid valve, computed by TCM from each
input signal, is displayed.

●

ON/OFF status is displayed.
ON...Brake pedal is
depressed.
OFF...Brake pedal switch
is released.
Gear position data used
for computation by TCM,
is displayed.

ON/OFF status, computed from signal of wide
open throttle position SW,
is displayed.

●

TCC S/V DUTY
[%]

SHIFT S/V A
[ON/OFF]

ON/OFF status, computed from signal of kickdown SW, is displayed.

●

—

Shift solenoid valve A

●

—

SLCT LVR POSI
—

Vehicle speed

This is displayed even
when no ASCD is
mounted.

●

—

●

—

GEAR

Status of ASCD O/D
release signal is displayed.
ON ... O/D released
OFF ... O/D not released

—

BRAKE SW
[ON/OFF]

Remarks

●

Gear position

Description

Main signals

Control value of solenoid is
displayed even if solenoid
circuit is disconnected.
The “OFF” signal is displayed if solenoid circuit is
shorted.

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4R01A]
Monitor item
Item
Overrun clutch solenoid
valve

Self-diagnosis display lamp
(O/D OFF indicator lamp)

Display

TCM input
signals

Description

Main signals

OVERRUN/C S/
V
[ON/OFF]

—

SELF-D DP LMP
[ON/OFF]

—

●

Control value of overrun
clutch solenoid valve
computed by TCM from
each input signal is displayed.

●

Control status of O/D
OFF indicator lamp is displayed.

Remarks

X: Applicable
—: Not applicable

DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II Setting Procedure
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
●
For details, refer to the separate “CONSULT-II Operations Manual”.

BBIA0369E

1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector. The data link connector is located in instrument lower panel on driver side.
Turn ignition switch ON.

LEC104A

Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.

WKIA1606E

AT-194

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4R01A]
5.

Touch “A/T”.
A

AT
SAT014K

Touch “DTC WORK SUPPORT”.
E

G
SAT971J

Touch select item menu (1ST, 2ND, etc.).

K
SAT018K

Touch “START”.

SAT589J

AT-195

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4R01A]
9.

Perform driving test according to “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” in “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.

SAT019K

●

When testing conditions are satisfied, CONSULT-II screen
changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”.

SAT591J

10. Stop vehicle. If “NG” appears on the screen, malfunction may
exist. Go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.

SAT592J

SAT593J

11. Perform test drive to check gear shift feeling in accordance with
instructions displayed.

SAT594J

AT-196

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4R01A]
12. Touch “YES” or “NO”.
A

AT
SAT595J

13. CONSULT-II procedure ended.
E

G
SAT596J

K
SAT593J

If “NG” appears on the screen, a malfunction may exist. Go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.

DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE
DTC work support item

L
Description

Following items for “A/T 1st gear function (P0731)” can be confirmed.
1ST GR FNCTN P0731

●

Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted
or not)

●

Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)

Following items for “A/T 2nd gear function (P0732)” can be confirmed.
2ND GR FNCTN P0732

●

Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted
or not)

●

Shift solenoid valve A

●

Shift solenoid valve B

●

Each clutch

●

Hydraulic control circuit

●

Shift solenoid valve B

●

Each clutch

●

Hydraulic control circuit

●

Shift solenoid valve A

●

Each clutch

●

Hydraulic control circuit

Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)

Following items for “A/T 3rd gear function (P0733)” can be confirmed.
3RD GR FNCTN P0733

Check item

●

Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted
or not)

●

Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)

AT-197

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4R01A]
DTC work support item

Description
●

Shift solenoid valve A

●

Shift solenoid valve B

●

Overrun clutch solenoid valve

●

Line pressure solenoid valve

●

Each clutch

●

Hydraulic control circuit

Following items for “A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up) (P0744)” can
be confirmed.

●

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted
or not)

●

Each clutch

●

Hydraulic control circuit

Following items for “A/T 4th gear function (P0734)” can be confirmed.
4TH GR FNCTN P0734

●

TCC S/V FNCTN P0744

Check item

●

Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted
or not)
Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)

Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)

Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II

ECS007LT

OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH GST)
Refer to EC-685, "Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function" (VG33E only) or EC-1286, "Generic Scan Tool (GST)
Function" (VG33ER only), .

OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)
Refer to EC-634, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" (VG33E only) or EC-1235, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL)" VG33ER only).

TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)

1. CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP
1.
2.
3.
4.

Selector lever in P position. Start the engine. Warm engine to
normal operating temperature.
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
Turn ignition switch to ON position
(Do not start engine).

SAT967I

Does O/D OFF indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds?

WAT496

Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Go to AT-356, "1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On" .

AT-198

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4R01A]

2. JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 1

A
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Depress shift lock release button.
B
Move selector lever from P to D position.
Turn ignition switch to ON position. Do not start engine.
Depress and hold overdrive control switch in OFF position (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be ON) until
AT
directed to release the switch (If O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on, go to step 3 on AT-387 ).
6. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
7. Turn ignition switch to ON position (Do not start engine).
D
8. Release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator
lamp will be OFF).
–
Wait for more than 2 seconds after ignition switch ON.
E
9. Move selector lever to 2 position.
10. Depress and release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF
indicator lamp will be ON).
F

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

SAT968I

11. Depress and hold the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF
indicator lamp will be OFF) until directed to release the switch.

>> GO TO 3.

J
SAT969I

AT-199

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4R01A]

3. JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Move selector lever to 1 position.
Release the overdrive control switch.
Depress and release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be ON).
Depress and release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be OFF).
Depress and hold the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF
indicator lamp will be ON) until directed to release the switch.
Depress accelerator pedal fully and release.

SAT970I

Release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator
lamp will begin to flash ON and OFF).
>> GO TO 4.

SAT981F

4. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE
Check O/D OFF indicator lamp.
Refer to AT-201, "JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (VG33E ONLY)" or AT-202, "JUDGEMENT
OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (VG33ER ONLY)" .

WAT496

>> DIAGNOSIS END.

AT-200

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4R01A]
JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (VG33E ONLY)
A

O/D OFF indicator lamp:
All judgement flickers are same.

1st judgement flicker is longer than others.

AT
SAT436F

SAT437F

All circuits that can be confirmed by self-diagnosis are OK.

Revolution sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go to AT-261, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T
(REVOLUTION SENSOR)" .

2nd judgement flicker is longer than others.

3rd judgement flicker is longer than others.

F
SAT439F

SAT441F

Vehicle speed sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go toAT-340, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" .

Throttle position sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go to AT-321, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" .

4th judgement flicker is longer than others.

5th judgement flicker is longer than others.

SAT443F

SAT445F

Shift solenoid valve A circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go toAT-311, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" .

Shift solenoid valve B circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go to AT-316, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" .

6th judgement flicker is longer than others.

7th judgement flicker is longer than others.

SAT447F

SAT449F

Overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go to AT-329, "DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE" .

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or
disconnected.
Þ Go to AT-293, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH
SOLENOID VALVE" .

8th judgement flicker is longer than others.

9th judgement flicker is longer than others.

SAT451F

SAT453F

A/T fluid temperature sensor is disconnected or TCM power
source circuit is damaged.
Þ Go to AT-334, "DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID
TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE)" .

Engine speed signal circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go to AT-266, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" .

AT-201

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4R01A]
O/D OFF indicator lamp:
Flickers as shown below.

10th judgement flicker is longer than others.

SAT455F

SAT457F

Line pressure solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go to AT-306, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID
VALVE" .

Battery power is low.
Battery has been disconnected for a long time.
Battery is connected conversely.
(When reconnecting TCM connectors. — This is not a problem.)

Lamp comes on.

SAT367J

PNP switch, overdrive control switch or throttle position switch circuit is disconnected or TCM is damaged.
Þ Go to AT-387, "21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate
(PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks)" .
t1 = 2.5 seconds

t2 = 2.0 seconds

t3 = 1.0 second

t4 = 1.0 second

JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (VG33ER ONLY)
O/D OFF indicator lamp:
All judgement flickers are same.

1st judgement flicker is longer than others.

LAT425

LAT426

All circuits that can be confirmed by self-diagnosis are OK.

Revolution sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go to AT-261, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T
(REVOLUTION SENSOR)" .

2nd judgement flicker is longer than others.

3rd judgement flicker is longer than others.

LAT427

LAT428

Vehicle speed sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go to AT-340, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" .

Throttle position sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go to AT-321, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" .

AT-202

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[RE4R01A]
O/D OFF indicator lamp:
4th judgement flicker is longer than others.

5th judgement flicker is longer than others.

AT
LAT429

LAT430

Shift solenoid valve A circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go to AT-311, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" .

Shift solenoid valve B circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go to AT-316, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" .

6th judgement flicker is longer than others.

7th judgement flicker is longer than others.

LAT431

LAT432

Overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go to AT-329, "DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE" .

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or
disconnected.
Þ Go to AT-293, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH
SOLENOID VALVE" .

8th judgement flicker is longer than others.

9th judgement flicker is longer than others.

I
LAT433

LAT434

A/T fluid temperature sensor is disconnected or TCM power
source circuit is damaged.
Þ Go to AT-334, "DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID
TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE)" .

Engine speed signal circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go to AT-266, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" .

10th judgement flicker is longer than others.

11th judgement flicker is longer than others.

LAT435

SAT455F

Þ Go to AT-344, "DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR
(VG33ER ONLY)" .

Line pressure solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
Þ Go to AT-306, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID
VALVE" .

Flickers as shown below.

Lamp comes on.

SAT457F

SAT367J

Battery power is low.
Battery has been disconnected for a long time.
Battery is connected conversely.
(When reconnecting TCM connectors. — This is not a problem.)
t1 = 2.5 seconds

t2 = 2.0 seconds

t3 = 1.0 second

t4 = 1.0 second

AT-203

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
[RE4R01A]

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Introduction

PFP:00000
ECS007LU

The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed sensor, throttle
position sensor or PNP switch and provides shift control or lock-up
control via A/T solenoid valves.
The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal
sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the
A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is capable of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can store malfunctions in its memory.
Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the
operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good operating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve malfuncAAT473A
tion, etc.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the problems. A road
test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the “Work Flow”. Refer to AT-208, "Work Flow"
.
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cusSAT632I
tomer can supply good information about such problems, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic
Worksheet” should be used. Refer to AT-205, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" .
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. This
will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an electronically controlled engine vehicle.
Also check related Service bulletins.

SEF234G

AT-204

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
[RE4R01A]
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Information From Customer

KEY POINTS
●
WHAT..... Vehicle & A/T model
●
WHEN..... Date, Frequencies
●
WHERE..... Road conditions
●
HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms
Customer name

MR/MS

Model & Year

VIN

Trans. model

Engine

Mileage

Incident Date

Manuf. Date

In Service Date

Frequency

❏ Continuous

Symptoms

❏ Vehicle does not move.
❏ No up-shift

❏ Intermittent (

times a day)

(❏ Any position

(❏ 1st → 2nd

❏ No down-shift

❏ 2nd → 3rd

(❏ O/D → 3rd

❏ Particular position)

❏ 3rd → O/D)

❏ 3rd → 2nd

❏ 2nd → 1st)

❏ Lockup malfunction
❏ Shift point too high or too low.
❏ Shift shock or slip

(❏ N → D

❏ Lockup

❏ Any drive position)

❏ Noise or vibration
❏ No kickdown

❏ No pattern select
❏ Others
(
O/D OFF indicator lamp

Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)

)

Blinks for about 8 seconds.
❏ Continuously lit

❏ Not lit

❏ Continuously lit

❏ Not lit

AT-205

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
[RE4R01A]
Diagnostic Worksheet
1.

❏ Read the Fail-safe Remarks and listen to customer complaints.

AT-160

❏ CHECK A/T FLUID

AT-211

❏ Leakage (Follow specified procedure)
❏ Fluid condition
❏ Fluid level
3.

Perform STALL TEST and LINE PRESSURE TEST.
❏ Stall test — Mark possible damaged components/others.
❏ Torque converter one-way clutch
❏ Reverse clutch
❏ Forward clutch
❏ Overrun clutch
❏ Forward one-way clutch

AT-211, AT214

❏ Low & reverse brake
❏ Low one-way clutch
❏ Engine
❏ Line pressure is low
❏ Clutches and brakes except high clutch and
brake band are OK

❏ Line pressure test — Suspected parts:
4.

❏ Perform all ROAD TEST and mark required procedures.

AT-216

41.

AT-217

Check before engine is started.
❏ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE - Mark detected items.
❏PNP switch, AT-249 .
❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-255 .
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor), AT-261 .
❏ Engine speed signal, AT-266 .
❏ Torque converter clutch solenoid valve, AT-293 .
❏ Line pressure solenoid valve, AT-306 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve A, AT-311 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve B, AT-316 .
❏ Throttle position sensor, AT-321 .
❏ Overrun clutch solenoid valve, AT-329 .
❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor and TCM power source, AT-334 .
❏ PNP, overdrive control and throttle position switches, AT-353 .
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR, AT-340 .
❏ Turbine revolution sensor (VG33ER only), AT-344 .
❏ Control unit (RAM), control unit (ROM), AT-349 .
❏ Control unit (EEP ROM), AT-351 .
❏ Battery
❏ Others

42.

Check at idle

AT-218

❏ 1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On, AT-356 .
❏ 2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P And N Position,AT-358 .
❏ 3. In P Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed, AT-359 .
❏ 4. In N Position, Vehicle Moves, AT-360 .
❏ 5. Large Shock. N → R Position, AT-362 .
❏ 6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position,AT-364 .
❏ 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position, AT-367 .

AT-206

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
[RE4R01A]
4.

43.

Cruise test

AT-219
AT-223

Part-1
❏ 8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 , AT-369 .
❏ 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 , AT-372 .
❏ 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 →D3 , AT-374 .
❏ 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 →D4 , AT-376 .
❏ 12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up, AT-378 .
❏ 13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition, AT-379 .
❏ 14. Lock-up Is Not Released, AT-381 .
❏ 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 ), AT-382 .
Part-2

AT
AT-226

❏ 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 , AT-372 .
❏ 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 →D3 , AT-374 .
❏ 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 →D4 , AT-376 .
❏ 16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1 , AT-383 .
Part-3

E
AT-228

❏ 17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 →D3 When Overdrive Control Switch ON → OFF, AT-385
❏ 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 →D3 ), AT-382 .
❏ 18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 →22 , When Selector Lever D → 2 Position, AT-386 .
❏ 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 →D3 ), AT-382 .
❏ 19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 →11 , When Selector Lever 2 → 1 Position, AT-387 .
❏ 20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake, AT-387 .
❏ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE — Mark detected items.

❏ PNP switch, AT-249 .
❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-255 .
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor), AT-261 .
❏ Engine speed signal, AT-266 .
❏ Torque converter clutch solenoid valve, AT-293 .
❏ Line pressure solenoid valve, AT-306 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve A, AT-311 .
❏ Shift solenoid valve B, AT-316 .
❏ Throttle position sensor,AT-321 .
❏ Overrun clutch solenoid valve, AT-329 .
❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor and TCM power source, AT-334 .
❏ PNP, overdrive control and throttle position switches, AT-353 .
❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR, AT-340 .
❏ Turbine revolution sensor (VG33ER only), AT-344 .
❏ Control unit (RAM), control unit (ROM), AT-349 .
❏ Control unit (EEP ROM), AT-351 .
❏ Battery
❏ Battery
❏ Others

❏ For self-diagnosis NG items, inspect each component. Repair or replace the damaged parts.

AT-190

❏ Perform all ROAD TEST and re-mark required procedures.

AT-216

❏ Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for following MIL indicating items and check out NG items.
Refer to EC-620, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" (VG33E only) or EC-1221, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" (VG33ER only).

EC-683
(VG33E only)
or EC-1284
(VG33ER
only)

❏ DTC (P0731, 1103) A/T 1st gear function, AT-270 .
❏ DTC (P0732, 1104) A/T 2nd gear function, AT-276 .
❏ DTC (P0733, 1105) A/T 3rd gear function, AT-281 .
❏ DTC (P0734, 1106) A/T 4th gear function, AT-286 .
❏ DTC (P0744, 1107) A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up), AT-298 .
8.

❏ Perform the Diagnostic Procedures for all remaining items marked NG. Repair or replace the damaged parts.
Refer to the Symptom Chart when you perform the procedures, (The chart also shows some other possible
symptoms and the component inspection orders).

AT-189
AT-230

❏ Erase DTC from TCM and ECM memories.

AT-187

AT-207

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
[RE4R01A]

Work Flow

ECS007LV

HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR
A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or
conditions for a customer complaint.
Make good use of the two sheets provided, “Information From Customer”, AT-205 , and “Diagnostic Worksheet”, AT-206 , to perform the best troubleshooting possible.

AT-208

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
[RE4R01A]
WORK FLOW CHART
A

LCIA0289E

*1:

AT-205

*2:

AT-206

*3:

AT-160

*4:

AT-211

*5:

AT-211, AT-214

*6:

AT-216

*7:

AT-189

*8:

AT-185

*9:

AT-198

*10
:

AT-249

*11: AT-351

*12
:

AT-353

AT-209

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
[RE4R01A]
*13
:

AT-387

*14
:

AT-230

*15
:

AT-187

*16
:

AT-249

*17
:

AT-351

*18
:

EC-620 (VG33E), EC-1221
(VG33ER)

AT-210

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
A/T Fluid Check

PFP:00000

A
ECS007LW

FLUID LEAKAGE CHECK
1.
2.
3.
4.

Clean area suspected of leaking. — for example, mating surface of converter housing and transmission
B
case.
Start engine, apply foot brake, place selector lever in D position and wait a few minutes.
Stop engine.
AT
Check for fresh leakage.

FLUID CONDITION CHECK
D
Fluid color

Suspected problem

Dark or black with burned odor

Wear of frictional material

Milky pink

Water contamination — Road water
entering through filler tube or breather

Varnished fluid, light to dark brown and
tacky

Oxidation — Over or under filling, —
Overheating

SAT638A

FLUID LEVEL CHECK
Refer to MA-37, "Checking A/T Fluid" .

Stall Test

ECS007LX

STALL TEST PROCEDURE
1.
2.

Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add fluid or
oil.
Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until engine oil and ATF
reach operating temperature.
ATF operating temperature

: 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)
K

SAT647B

3.
4.
●

Set parking brake and block wheels.
Install a tachometer where it can be seen by driver during test.
It is good practice to put a mark on point of specified
engine rpm on indicator.

SAT513G

AT-211

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]
5.
6.
7.
●

Start engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in D
position.
Accelerate to wide open throttle gradually while applying foot
brake.
Quickly note the engine stall revolution and immediately release
throttle.
During test, never hold throttle wide open for more than 5
seconds.
Stall revolution
VG33E
: 2,450 - 2,650 rpm
VG33ER : 2,420 - 2,620 rpm

SAT514G

8.
9.

Move selector lever to N position.
Cool off ATF.
●
Run engine at idle for at least one minute.
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 with selector lever in 2, 1 and R positions.

SAT771B

JUDGEMENT OF STALL TEST
The test result and possible damaged components relating to each result are shown in the illustration. In order
to pinpoint the possible damaged components, follow the WORK FLOW. Refer to AT-208, "Work Flow" .
NOTE:
Stall revolution is too high in D or 2 position:
●
Slippage occurs in 1st gear but not in 2nd and 3rd gears. ..... Low one-way clutch slippage
●
Slippage occurs at the following gears:
1st through 3rd gears in D position and engine brake functions.
1st and 2nd gears in 2 position and engine brake functions with accelerator pedal released (fully closed
throttle). ..... Forward clutch or forward one-way clutch slippage
Stall revolution is too high in R position:
●
Engine brake does not function in 1 position. ..... Low & reverse brake slippage
●
Engine brake functions in 1 position. ..... Reverse clutch slippage
Stall revolution within specifications:
●
Vehicle does not achieve speed of more than 80 km/h (50 MPH). ..... One-way clutch seizure in torque
converter housing
CAUTION:
Be careful since automatic fluid temperature increases abnormally.
●
Slippage occurs in 3rd and 4th gears in D position. ..... High clutch slippage
●
Slippage occurs in 2nd and 4th gear in D position. ..... Brake band slippage

AT-212

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]
Stall revolution less than specifications:
●
Poor acceleration during starts. ..... One-way clutch seizure in torque converter

LCIA0265E

AT-213

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]

Line Pressure Test

ECS007LY

LINE PRESSURE TEST PORTS
●
●

Location of line pressure test ports.
Always replace line pressure plugs as they are self-sealing
bolts.

SAT209GA

LINE PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE
1.
2.

Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add fluid or
oil.
Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until engine oil and ATF
reach operating temperature.
ATF operating temperature

: 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)

SAT647B

Install pressure gauge to corresponding line pressure port.

SAT518GB

SAT519GB

AT-214

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]
4.
●

Set parking brake and block wheels.
Continue to depress brake pedal fully while line pressure
test is being performed at stall speed.

AT
SAT513G

5.
●

Start engine and measure line pressure at idle and stall speed.
When measuring line pressure at stall speed, follow the
stall test procedure.
Line pressure

: Refer to AT-497, "Line Pressure" .
F

G
SAT493G

JUDGEMENT OF LINE PRESSURE TEST

Judgement
Line pressure is low in all positions.

Line pressure is low in particular
position.

Suspected parts
●

Oil pump wear

●

Control piston damage

●

Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking

●

Spring for pressure regulator valve damaged

●

Fluid pressure leakage between oil strainer and pressure regulator valve

●

Clogged strainer

●

Fluid pressure leakage between manual valve and particular clutch

●

For example, line pressure is:
— Low in R and 1 positions, but
— Normal in D and 2 positions.
Then, fluid leakage exists at or around low and reverse brake circuit.
Refer to AT-498, "Clutches and Brakes" .

At idle

Line pressure is high.

Line pressure is low.

At stall speed

●

Maladjustment of throttle position sensor

●

Fluid temperature sensor damaged

●

Line pressure solenoid valve sticking

●

Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit

●

Pressure modifier valve sticking

●

Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking

●

Open in dropping resistor circuit

●

Maladjustment of throttle position sensor

●

Line pressure solenoid valve sticking

●

Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit

●

Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking

●

Pressure modifier valve sticking

●

Pilot valve sticking

AT-215

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]

Road Test

ECS007LZ

DESCRIPTION
●
●

–
–
–

The purpose of the test is to determine overall performance of A/
T and analyze causes of problems.
The road test consists of the following three parts:
Check before engine is started
Check at idle
Cruise test

SAT786A

●
●

Before road test, familiarize yourself with all test procedures and
items to check.
Conduct tests on all items until specified symptom is found.
Troubleshoot items which check out No Good after road test.
Refer to AT-185, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION" and AT-353, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR
SYMPTOMS" .

SAT496G

AT-216

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]
1. CHECK BEFORE ENGINE IS STARTED
A

1. CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP
1.
2.
3.
4.

Park vehicle on flat surface.
Move selector lever to P position.
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.)

SAT967I

Does O/D OFF indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds?
G

J
WAT496

Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Go to AT-356, "1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On" .

2. CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP
L

Does O/D OFF indicator lamp flicker for about 8 seconds?
M

WAT496

Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-198, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)"
.
No
>> GO TO 3.

AT-217

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]

3. CHECK NG ITEM
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Perform self-diagnosis and note NG items.
Refer to AT-198, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
>> Go to AT-358, "2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position" .

2. CHECK AT IDLE

1. CHECK ENGINE START
1. Park vehicle on flat surface.
2. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
3. Move selector lever to P or N position.
4. Turn ignition switch to start position.
5. Is engine started?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Go to AT-358, "2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position" .

2. CHECK ENGINE START
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Move selector lever to D, 1, 2 or R position.
3. Turn ignition switch to start position.
4. Is engine started?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Go toAT-358, "2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position" .
No
>> GO TO 3.

3. CHECK VEHICLE MOVE
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Move selector lever to P position.
3. Release parking brake.
4. Push vehicle forward or backward.
5. Does vehicle move when it is pushed forward or backward?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Go to AT-359, "3. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed" .
No
>> GO TO 4.

SAT796A

AT-218

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]

4. CHECK VEHICLE MOVE

1. Apply parking brake.
2. Move selector lever to N position.
3. Turn ignition switch to START position and start engine.
4. Release parking brake.
5. Does vehicle move forward or backward?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Go to AT-360, "4. In N Position, Vehicle Moves" .
No
>> GO TO 5.

5. CHECK SHIFT SHOCK
1. Apply foot brake.
2. Move selector lever to R position.
3. Is there large shock when changing from N to R position?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Go to AT-362, "5. Large Shock. N → R Position" .
No
>> GO TO 6.

H
SAT082J

6. CHECK VEHICLE REVERSE MOVEMENT
1. Release foot brake for several seconds.
2. Does vehicle creep backward when foot brake is released?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 7.
No
>> Go to AT-364, "6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position" .

7. CHECK VEHICLE FORWARD MOVEMENT

1. Move selector lever to D, 2 and 1 position and check if vehicle creeps forward.
2. Does vehicle creep forward in all three positions?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Go to AT-219, "3. CRUISE TEST" .
No
>> Go to AT-367, "7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position" .

3. CRUISE TEST
●

Check all items listed in Parts 1 through 3.

SAT601J

AT-219

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]
With CONSULT-II
●
●

Using CONSULT-II, conduct a cruise test and record the result.
Print the result and ensure that shifts and lock-ups take place as per “Shift Schedule”.

CONSULT-II Setting Procedure
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect “CONSULT-II” to data link connector.
The data link connector is located in instrument lower panel on
driver side.
Turn ignition switch ON.

LEC104A

Touch “START”.

SAT586J

Touch “A/T”.

SAT014K

Touch “DATA MONITOR”.

SAT971J

AT-220

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]
7.
8.

Touch “MAIN SIGNALS” or “TCM INPUT SIGNALS”.
See “Numerical Display”, “Bar Chart Display”, or “Line Graph
Display”.

AT
SAT175K

Touch “SETTING” to set recording condition (“AUTO TRIG” or
“MANU TRIG”) and touch “BACK”.
10. Touch “START”.

G
SAT973J

11. When performing cruise test touch “STORE DATA”.

K
SAT134K

12. After finishing cruise test part 1, touch “STOP”.

SAT135K

AT-221

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]
13. Touch “STORE” and touch “BACK”.

SAT987J

SAT974J

14.
15.
16.
17.

Touch “DISPLAY”.
Touch “PRINT”.
Check the monitor data printed out.
Continue cruise test part 2 and 3.

SAT975J

Without CONSULT-II
●

Throttle position sensor can be checked by measuring voltage
across terminals 41 and 42 of TCM.

AAT474A

AT-222

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]
Cruise Test — Part 1
A

1. CHECK STARTING GEAR (D1 ) POSITION
1.

ATF operating temperature
2.
3.
4.
5.

Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes to warm engine oil and ATF up to operating temperature.
: 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)

Park vehicle on flat surface.
Set overdrive control switch to ON position.
Move selector lever to P position.
Start engine.

F
SAT001J

Move selector lever to D position.
H

J
SAT952I

7.
8.

Accelerate vehicle by constantly depressing accelerator pedal
halfway.
Does vehicle start from D1 ?

Read gear position.
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Go to AT-369, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" .

SAT953I

AT-223

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]

2. CHECK SHIFT UP (D1

TO D2 )

Does A/T shift from D1 to D2 at the specified speed?
Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed.
Specified speed when
shifting from D1 to D2

: Refer to AT-496, "Shift
Schedule" .

Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> Go to AT-372, "9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does
Not Kickdown: D4 → D2" .

SAT954I

3. CHECK SHIFT UP (D2

TO D3 )

Does A/T shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed?
Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed.
Specified speed when
shifting from D2 to D3

: Refer to AT-496, "Shift
Schedule" .

Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 4.
No
>> Go to AT-374, "10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" .

SAT955I

4. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3

TO D4 )

Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed?
Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed.
Specified speed when
shifting from D3 to D4

: Refer to AT-496, "Shift
Schedule" .

Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 5.
No
>> Go to AT-376, "11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4" .

SAT956I

AT-224

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]

5. CHECK LOCK-UP (D4

TO D4 L/U)

Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed?
Read vehicle speed, throttle position when lock-up duty becomes 94%.
Specified speed when
lock-up occurs

: Refer to AT-496, "Shift
Schedule" .

Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 6.
No
>> Go to AT-378, "12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up" .

SAT957I

6. CHECK HOLD LOCK-UP
F

Does A/T hold lock-up condition for more than 30 seconds?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 7.
No
>> Go to AT-379, "13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition" .

7. CHECK LOCK-UP OFF (D4

L/U TO D4 )

1. Release accelerator pedal.
2. Is lock-up released when accelerator pedal is released?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 8.
No
>> Go to AT-381, "14. Lock-up Is Not Released" .

K
SAT958I

8. CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D4
1.
2.

TO D3 )

Decelerate vehicle by applying foot brake lightly.
Does engine speed return to idle smoothly when A/T is shifted from D4 to D3 ?

Read gear position and engine speed.
Yes or No
Yes
>> 1. Stop vehicle.
2. Go to AT-226, "Cruise Test — Part 2" .
No
>> Go to AT-382, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To
Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" .

SAT959I

AT-225

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]
Cruise Test — Part 2

1. CHECK STARTING GEAR (D1 ) POSITION
1.
2.
3.
4.

Confirm overdrive control switch is in ON position.
Confirm selector lever is in D position.
Accelerate vehicle by half throttle again.
Does vehicle start from D1 ?

Read gear position.
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Go to AT-383, "16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1" .

SAT495G

2. CHECK SHIFT UP AND SHIFT DOWN (D3
1.
2.
3.

TO D4 TO D2 )

Accelerate vehicle to 80 km/h (50 MPH) as shown in illustration.
Release accelerator pedal and then quickly depress it fully.
Does A/T shift from D4 to D2 as soon as accelerator pedal is depressed fully?

Read gear position and throttle position.
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> Go to AT-372, "9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does
Not Kickdown: D4 → D2" .

SAT404H

3. CHECK SHIFT UP (D2

TO D3 )

Does A/T shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed?
Read gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed.
Specified speed when
shifting from D2 to D3

: Refer to AT-496, "Shift
Schedule" .

Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 4.
No
>> Go to AT-374, "10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" .

SAT960I

AT-226

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]

4. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3

TO D4 ) AND ENGINE BRAKE

Release accelerator pedal after shifting from D2 to D3 .
Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 and does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?
B

Read gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed.
Yes or No
Yes
>> 1. Stop vehicle.
2. Go to AT-228, "Cruise Test — Part 3" .
No
>> Go to AT-376, "11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4" .

SAT405H

AT-227

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]
Cruise Test — Part 3

1. VEHICLE SPEED D4
1.
2.
3.

POSITION

Confirm overdrive control switch is in ON position.
Confirm selector lever is in D position.
Accelerate vehicle using half-throttle to D4 .
>> GO TO 2.

SAT812A

2. CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D4
1.
2.
3.

TO D3 )

Release accelerator pedal.
Set overdrive control switch to OFF position while driving in D4 .
Does A/T shift from D4 to D3 (O/D OFF)?

Read gear position and vehicle speed.
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> Go to AT-385, "17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3 , When
Overdrive Control Switch ON → OFF" .

SAT999I

3. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE
Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 4.
No
>> Go to AT-382, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To
Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" .

SAT999I

AT-228

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]

4. CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D3
1.
2.

TO D2 )

Move selector lever from D to 2 position while driving in D3 (O/D OFF).
Does A/T shift from D3 (O/D OFF) to 22 ?
B

Read gear position.
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 5.
No
>> Go to AT-386, "18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22 , When
Selector Lever D → 2 Position" .

SAT791GA

5. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE
F

Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 6.
No
>> Go to AT-382, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To
Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" .

I
SAT791GA

6. CHECK SHIFT DOWN (22

TO 11 )

1. Move selector lever from 2 to 1 position while driving in 22 .
2. Does A/T shift from 22 to 11 position?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 7.
No
>> Go to AT-387, "19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When
Selector Lever 2 → 1 Position" .

SAT778B

7. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE
Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?
Yes or No
Yes
>> 1. Stop vehicle.
2. Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-198, "TCM SELFDIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
No
>> Go to AT-387, "20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By
Engine Brake" .

SAT778B

AT-229

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]

Symptom Chart

ECS007M0

Numbers are arranged in order of inspection.
Perform inspections starting with number one and work up.
Items

Symptom

Condition

Diagnostic Item
1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

Torque converter is not
locked up.

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle
No Lock-up
Engagement/
TCC Inoperative
ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

VG33ER only

EC-646

EC-1247

AT-261, AT-340

3. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
adjustment

AT-405

4. Engine speed signal

AT-266

5. A/T fluid temperature sensor

AT-255

6. Line pressure test

AT-214

7. Torque converter clutch solenoid
valve

AT-293

8. Control valve assembly

AT-431

9. Torque converter

AT-414

1. Fluid level

AT-211
EC-646
AT-255

4. Torque converter clutch solenoid
valve

AT-255

5. Line pressure solenoid valve

AT-306

6. Control valve assembly

AT-255

7. Torque converter

AT-414

2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR

AT-261, AT-340

3. Torque converter clutch solenoid
valve

Shift Shock

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

EC-1247

EC-646

AT-255

4. Control valve assembly

Sharp shock
in shifting
from N to D
position.

EC-1247

3. Line pressure test

1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
Lock-up point
is extremely
high or low.
AT-378

VG33E only

2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
Torque converter clutch
piston slip.

Reference Page

AT-255

1. Engine idling rpm

EC-604

EC-1205

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

EC-646

EC-1247

3. Line pressure test

AT-255

4. A/T fluid temperature sensor

AT-255

5. Engine speed signal

AT-266

6. Line pressure solenoid valve

AT-306

7. Control valve assembly

AT-255

8. Accumulator N-D

AT-255

9. Turbine revolution sensor
10. Forward Clutch

AT-230

AT-344
AT-453

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]
Items

Symptom

Condition

Diagnostic Item
1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

Too sharp a
shock in
change from
D1 to D2 .

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

VG33E only

VG33ER only

EC-646

EC-1247

2. Line pressure test

AT-255

3. Accumulator servo release

AT-255

4. Control valve assembly

AT-255

5. A/T fluid temperature sensor

AT-255

6. Brake band

AT-470

1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
Too sharp a
shock in
change from
D2 to D3 .

Reference Page

D
EC-1247

EC-646

2. Line pressure test

AT-255

3. Control valve assembly

AT-255

4. High clutch

AT-450

5. Brake band

AT-306

OFF vehicle
1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

Shift Shock
Too sharp a
shock in
change from
D3 to D4 .

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle
Gear change
shock felt during deceleration by
releasing
accelerator
pedal.
Large shock
changing from
12 to 11 in 1
position.

EC-1247

EC-646

2. Line pressure test

AT-255

3. Control valve assembly

AT-255

4. Brake band

AT-306

5. Overrun clutch

AT-306

1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

H
EC-1247

EC-646

2. Line pressure test

AT-255

3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve

AT-329

4. Control valve assembly

AT-255

ON vehicle

1. Control valve assembly

AT-255

ON vehicle

2. Low & reverse brake

AT-458

ON vehicle

AT-231

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]
Items

Symptom
Too high a
gear change
point from D1
to D2 , from
D2 to D3 ,
from D3 to D4
.
AT-372, AT374 , AT-376
Gear change
directly from
D1 to D3
occurs.

Improper Shift
Timing

Too high a
change point
from D4 to D3
, from D3 to
D2 , from D2
to D1 .
Kickdown
does not operate when
depressing
pedal in D4
within kickdown vehicle
speed.

Improper Shift
Timing

Condition

Diagnostic Item
1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

ON vehicle

ON vehicle
OFF vehicle

2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR

Kickdown
operates or
engine overruns when
depressing
pedal in D4
beyond kickdown vehicle
speed limit.

ON vehicle

Gear change
from 22 to 23
in 2 position.

ON vehicle

Gear change
from 11 to 12
in 1 position.

ON vehicle

VG33ER only

EC-646

EC-1247

AT-261, AT-340
AT-311

4. Shift solenoid valve B

AT-316

1. Fluid level

AT-414

2. Accumulator servo release

AT-255

3. Brake band

AT-306

2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

ON vehicle

VG33E only

3. Shift solenoid valve A

1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
ON vehicle

Reference Page

2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR

EC-646

EC-1247

AT-261, AT-340

EC-646

EC-1247

AT-261, AT-340

3. Shift solenoid valve A

AT-311

4. Shift solenoid valve B

AT-316

1. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

AT-261, AT-340

EC-1247

EC-646

3. Shift solenoid valve A

AT-311

4. Shift solenoid valve B

AT-316

1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
adjustment

AT-405

1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
adjustment

AT-405

2. Manual control linkage adjustment

AT-405

AT-232

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]
Items

Symptom

Condition

Diagnostic Item

Reference Page
VG33E only

1. Fluid level
2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
Failure to
change gear
from D4 to D3
.

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

No Down Shift

Failure to
change gear
from D3 to D2
or from D4 to
D2 .

OFF vehicle

Failure to
change gear
from D2 to D1
or from D3 to
D1 .

ON vehicle

EC-1247

EC-646
AT-450

4. Shift solenoid valve A

AT-311

5. Line pressure solenoid valve

AT-306

6. Control valve assembly

AT-255

7. Low & reverse brake

AT-450

8. Overrun clutch

AT-306

1. Fluid level

AT-414

AT-311

4. Shift solenoid valve B

AT-316

5. Control valve assembly

AT-255

6. High clutch

AT-450

7. Brake band

AT-306

1. Fluid level

AT-414

H
EC-1247

EC-646

3. Shift solenoid valve A

AT-311

4. Shift solenoid valve B

AT-316

5. Control valve assembly

AT-255

6. Low one-way clutch
OFF vehicle

EC-1247

EC-646

3. Shift solenoid valve A

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

AT-414

3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
ON vehicle

VG33ER only

7. High clutch

AT-450

8. Brake band

AT-306

AT-233

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]
Items

Symptom

Condition

Diagnostic Item

Reference Page
VG33E only

1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
adjustment

Failure to
change from
D3 to 22
when changing lever into
2 position.
AT-386

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

No Down Shift

Does not
change from
12 to 11 in 1
position.

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

Failure to
change gear
from D1 to D2
.

ON vehicle

No Up Shift

Failure to
change gear
from D2 to D3
.

ON vehicle

EC-1247

EC-646
AT-450

4. Shift solenoid valve B

AT-316

5. Shift solenoid valve A

AT-311

6. Control valve assembly

AT-255

7. Manual control linkage adjustment

AT-405

8. Brake band

AT-306

9. Overrun clutch

AT-306

1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
adjustment

AT-405

2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR

AT-261, AT-340

3. Shift solenoid valve A

AT-311

4. Control valve assembly

AT-255

5. Overrun clutch solenoid valve

AT-450

6. Overrun clutch

AT-306

7. Low & reverse brake

AT-450

1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
adjustment

AT-405

2. Manual control linkage adjustment

AT-405

3. Shift solenoid valve A

AT-311

4. Control valve assembly

AT-255
AT-261, AT-340

6. Brake band

AT-306

1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
adjustment

AT-405

2. Manual control linkage adjustment

AT-405

3. Shift solenoid valve B

AT-316

4. Control valve assembly

AT-255

5. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
OFF vehicle

AT-405

3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve

5. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
OFF vehicle

VG33ER only

AT-261, AT-340

6. High clutch

AT-450

7. Brake band

AT-306

AT-234

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]
Items

Symptom

Condition

Diagnostic Item

Reference Page
VG33E only

Failure to
change gear
from D3 to D4
.

ON vehicle

1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
adjustment

AT-405

2. Manual control linkage adjustment

AT-405

3. Shift solenoid valve A

AT-311

4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR

OFF vehicle

A/T does not
shift to D4
when driving
with overdrive
control switch
ON.

ON vehicle

Slips/Will Not
Engage

Vehicle will
not run in R
position (but
runs in D, 2
and 1 positions). Clutch
slips.
Very poor
acceleration.
AT-364

AT-255

6. Brake band

AT-306

Vehicle will
not run in D
and 2 positions (but runs
in 1 and R
positions).

2. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
adjustment

AT-405

3. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR

AT-261, AT-340

AT-450

6. Control valve assembly

AT-255

7. A/T fluid temperature sensor

AT-255

8. Line pressure solenoid valve

AT-306

9. Brake band

AT-306

10. Overrun clutch

AT-306

1. Manual control linkage adjustment

AT-405

2. Line pressure test

AT-255

3. Line pressure solenoid valve

AT-306

4. Control valve assembly

AT-255

5. Reverse clutch

AT-306

6. High clutch

AT-450

7. Forward clutch

AT-306

8. Overrun clutch

AT-306

9. Low & reverse brake

AT-450

ON vehicle

1. Manual control linkage adjustment

AT-405

OFF vehicle

2. Low one-way clutch

AT-463

AT-235

5. Overrun clutch solenoid valve

OFF vehicle

D
EC-1247

EC-646

AT-311

ON vehicle

4. Shift solenoid valve A

OFF vehicle

AT-261, AT-340

5. A/T fluid temperature sensor

1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
No Up Shift

VG33ER only

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]
Items

Symptom

Condition

Diagnostic Item

Reference Page
VG33E only

Vehicle will
not run in D,
1, 2 positions
(but runs in R
position).
Clutch slips.
Very poor
acceleration.
AT-367

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

1. Fluid level

AT-414

2. Line pressure test

AT-255

3. Line pressure solenoid valve

AT-306

4. Control valve assembly

AT-255

5. Accumulator N-D

AT-255

6. Reverse clutch

AT-306

7. High clutch

AT-450

8. Forward clutch

AT-306

9. Forward one-way clutch

AT-306

10. Low one-way clutch

AT-306

1. Fluid level

AT-414

2. Manual control linkage adjustment

AT-405

3. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
ON vehicle

Slips/Will Not
Engage

Clutches or
brakes slip
somewhat in
starting.

OFF vehicle

No creep at
all.
AT-364, AT367

Almost no
shock or
clutches slipping in
change from
D1 to D2 .

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

EC-1247

EC-646

4. Line pressure test

AT-255

5. Line pressure solenoid valve

AT-306

6. Control valve assembly

AT-255

7. Accumulator N-D

AT-255

8. Forward clutch

AT-306

9. Reverse clutch

AT-306

10. Low & reverse brake

AT-450

11. Oil pump

AT-426

12. Torque converter

AT-414

1. Fluid level

AT-414

2. Line pressure test

AT-255

3. Control valve assembly

AT-255

4. Forward clutch

AT-306

5. Oil pump

AT-306

6. Torque converter

AT-414

1. Fluid level

AT-414

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
ON vehicle

VG33ER only

EC-646

EC-1247

3. Line pressure test

AT-255

4. Accumulator servo release

AT-255

5. Control valve assembly

AT-255

6. Brake band

AT-306

AT-236

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]
Items

Symptom

Condition

Diagnostic Item

Reference Page
VG33E only

1. Fluid level
Almost no
shock or slipping in
change from
D2 to D3 .

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

Slips/Will Not
Engage

Almost no
shock or slipping in
change from
D3 to D4 .

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

Races
extremely fast
or slips in
changing from
D4 to D3
when
depressing
pedal.

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

OFF vehicle

EC-1247

EC-646
AT-255

4. Control valve assembly

AT-255

5. High clutch

AT-450

6. Forward clutch

AT-306

1. Fluid level

AT-414

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

AT-414

3. Line pressure test

D
EC-1247

EC-646

3. Line pressure test

AT-255

4. Control valve assembly

AT-255

5. High clutch

AT-450

6. Brake band

AT-306

1. Fluid level

AT-414

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
ON vehicle

VG33ER only

G
EC-1247

EC-646

3. Line pressure test

AT-255

4. Line pressure solenoid valve

AT-306

5. Control valve assembly

AT-255

6. High clutch

AT-450

7. Forward clutch

AT-306

AT-237

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]
Items

Symptom

Condition

Diagnostic Item

Reference Page
VG33E only

1. Fluid level
Races
extremely fast
or slips in
changing from
D4 to D2
when
depressing
pedal.

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

Slips/Will Not
Engage

Races
extremely fast
or slips in
changing from
D3 to D2
when
depressing
pedal.

OFF vehicle

Races
extremely fast
or slips in
changing from
D4 or D3 to
D1 when
depressing
pedal.

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

Slips/Will Not
Engage

Vehicle will
not run in any
position.
OFF vehicle

EC-1247

EC-646
AT-255

4. Line pressure solenoid valve

AT-306

5. Shift solenoid valve A

AT-311

6. Control valve assembly

AT-255

7. Brake band

AT-306

8. Forward clutch

AT-306

1. Fluid level

AT-414
EC-1247

EC-646

3. Line pressure test

AT-255

4. Line pressure solenoid valve

AT-306

5. Control valve assembly

AT-255

6. A/T fluid temperature sensor

AT-255

7. Brake band

AT-306

8. Forward clutch

AT-306

9. High clutch

AT-450

1. Fluid level

AT-414

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
ON vehicle

AT-414

3. Line pressure test

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
ON vehicle

VG33ER only

EC-1247

EC-646

3. Line pressure test

AT-255

4. Line pressure solenoid valve

AT-306

5. Control valve assembly

AT-255

6. Forward clutch

AT-306

7. Forward one-way clutch

AT-306

8. Low one-way clutch

AT-306

1. Fluid level

AT-414

2. Manual control linkage adjustment

AT-406

3. Line pressure test

AT-255

4. Line pressure solenoid valve

AT-306

5. Oil pump

AT-306

6. High clutch

AT-450

7. Brake band

AT-306

8. Low & reverse brake

AT-450

9. Torque converter

AT-414

10. Parking pawl components

AT-475

AT-238

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]
Items

Symptom

Condition

Diagnostic Item

Reference Page
VG33E only

Engine cannot
be started in P
and N positions.
AT-358
Engine starts
in positions
other than P
and N.
AT-358

1. Ignition switch and starter
ON vehicle

ON vehicle

NOT USED

Transmission
noise in P and
N positions.

ON vehicle

AT-405

3. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
adjustment

AT-405

1. Manual control linkage adjustment

AT-405

2. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
adjustment

AT-405

1. Fluid level

AT-414

2. Line pressure test

AT-255

3. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

EC-646

AT-261, AT-340

5. Engine speed signal

AT-266

6. Oil pump

AT-306

7. Torque converter

AT-414

1. Manual control linkage adjustment

AT-405

OFF vehicle

2. Parking pawl components

AT-414

Vehicle runs
in N position.
AT-360

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle
Vehicle
braked when
shifting into R
position.
OFF vehicle

Engine stops
when shifting
lever into R,
D, 2 and 1.

EC-1247

ON vehicle

Excessive
creep.

Vehicle
moves when
changing into
P position or
parking gear
does not disengage when
shifted out of
P position.
AT-359

NOT USED

SC-9

2. Manual control linkage adjustment

4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR

OFF vehicle

VG33ER only

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

1. Manual control linkage adjustment

AT-405

2. Forward clutch

AT-306

3. Reverse clutch

AT-306

4. Overrun clutch

AT-306

1. Fluid level

AT-414

2. Manual control linkage adjustment

AT-405

3. Line pressure test

AT-255

4. Line pressure solenoid valve

AT-306

5. Control valve assembly

AT-255

6. High clutch

AT-450

7. Brake band

AT-306

8. Forward clutch

AT-306

9. Overrun clutch

AT-306

1. Engine idling rpm

EC-604

EC-1205

1. Engine idling rpm

EC-604

EC-1205

2. Torque converter clutch solenoid
valve

AT-255

3. Control valve assembly

AT-255

4. Torque converter

AT-414

AT-239

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]
Items

Symptom

Condition

Diagnostic Item

Reference Page
VG33E only

ON vehicle
Vehicle
braked by
gear change
from D1 to D2
.

NOT USED

OFF vehicle

1. Fluid level

AT-414

2. Reverse clutch

AT-306

3. Low & reverse brake

AT-450

4. High clutch

AT-450

5. Low one-way clutch

AT-306

Vehicle
braked by
gear change
from D2 to D3
.

ON vehicle

1. Fluid level

AT-414

OFF vehicle

2. Brake band

AT-306

Vehicle
braked by
gear change
from D3 to D4
.

ON vehicle

1. Fluid level

AT-414

2. Overrun clutch

AT-306

3. Forward one-way clutch

AT-306

4. Reverse clutch

AT-306

1. Fluid level

AT-414

2. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
adjustment

AT-405

3. Shift solenoid valve A

AT-311

4. Shift solenoid valve B

AT-316

5. Control valve assembly

AT-255

6. Reverse clutch

AT-306

7. High clutch

AT-450

8. Brake band

AT-306

9. Low & reverse brake

AT-450

10. Oil pump

AT-306

11. Torque converter

AT-414

ON vehicle

1. Fluid level

AT-414

ON vehicle

2. Torque converter

AT-414

1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
adjustment

AT-405

2. Manual control linkage adjustment

AT-405

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle
Maximum
speed not
attained.
Acceleration
poor.
OFF vehicle

Transmission
noise in D, 2,
1 and R positions.

NOT USED

VG33ER only

3. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
Engine brake
does not operate in “1” position.
AT-387

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR

EC-1247

EC-646

AT-261, AT-340

5. Shift solenoid valve A

AT-311

6. Control valve assembly

AT-255

7. Overrun clutch solenoid valve

AT-450

8. Overrun clutch

AT-306

9. Low & reverse brake

AT-450

AT-240

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
[RE4R01A]
Items

Symptom

Condition

Diagnostic Item

Reference Page
VG33E only

1. Fluid level

ON vehicle

Transmission
overheats.

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

NOT USED

ATF shoots
out during
operation.
White smoke
emitted from
exhaust pipe
during operation.

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

Offensive
smell at fluid
charging pipe.

Engine is
stopped at R,
D, 2 and 1
positions.

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

VG33ER only
AT-414

2. Engine idling rpm

EC-604

EC-1205

3. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

EC-646

EC-1247

4. Line pressure test

AT-255

5. Line pressure solenoid valve

AT-306

6. Control valve assembly

AT-255

7. Oil pump

AT-306

8. Reverse clutch

AT-306

9. High clutch

AT-450

10. Brake band

AT-306

11. Forward clutch

AT-306

12. Overrun clutch

AT-306

13. Low & reverse brake

AT-450

14. Torque converter

AT-414

1. Fluid level

AT-414

2. Reverse clutch

AT-306

3. High clutch

AT-450

4. Brake band

AT-306

5. Forward clutch

AT-306

6. Overrun clutch

AT-306

7. Low & reverse brake

AT-450

1. Fluid level

AT-414

2. Torque converter

AT-414

3. Oil pump

AT-306

4. Reverse clutch

AT-445

5. High clutch

AT-450

6. Brake band

AT-306

7. Forward clutch

AT-306

8. Overrun clutch

AT-306

9. Low & reverse brake

AT-450

1. Fluid level

AT-414

2. Torque converter clutch solenoid
valve

AT-255

3. Shift solenoid valve B

AT-316

4. Shift solenoid valve A

AT-311

5. Control valve assembly

AT-255

AT-241

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[RE4R01A]

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
TCM Terminals and Reference Value

PFP:00000
ECS007M1

PREPARATION
●

Measure voltage between each terminal and terminal 25 or 48
by following “TCM INSPECTION TABLE”.

AAT475A

TCM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT

AAT494A

TCM INSPECTION TABLE
(Data are reference values.)
Terminal No.

Wire color

GY/R

BR/Y

G/OR

Item

When releasing accelerator pedal
after warming up engine.

1.5 - 2.5V

When depressing accelerator pedal
fully after warming up engine.

Line pressure
solenoid valve
(with dropping
resistor)

When releasing accelerator pedal
after warming up engine.

4 - 14V

When depressing accelerator pedal
fully after warming up engine.

Torque converter
clutch solenoid
valve

When A/T performs lock-up.

Battery voltage

When A/T does not perform lock-up.

Line pressure
solenoid valve

5*1

PU/W

DT1

6*1

P/B

DT2

7*1

G/R

DT3

8*1,*3

R/Y

DT5

9*1,*3

W/G

DT4

—

W/R

Judgement standard (Approx.)

Condition

When turning ignition switch to ON.

Battery voltage

When turning ignition switch to OFF.

Power source

AT-242

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[RE4R01A]
Terminal No.

Wire color

Item

Judgement standard (Approx.)

Condition
When shift solenoid valve A operates
(When driving in D1 or D4 ).

15*1

L/W

L/Y

Y/G

BR/W

OR/B

B/Y

Shift solenoid
valve A

Shift solenoid
valve B

O/D OFF indicator lamp

OBD-II

—

Closed throttle
position switch (in
throttle position
switch)
Wide open throttle position switch
(in throttle position switch)

ASCD cruise signal

Battery voltage

When shift solenoid valve A does not
operate
(When driving in D2 or D3 ).

When shift solenoid valve B operates
(When driving in D1 or D2 ).

Battery voltage

When shift solenoid valve B does not
operate
(When driving in D3 or D4 ).

When setting overdrive control
switch in OFF position.

When setting overdrive control
switch in ON position.

Battery voltage

—

When releasing accelerator pedal
after warming up engine.

Battery voltage

When depressing accelerator pedal
after warming up engine.

When depressing accelerator pedal
more than half-way after warming up
engine.

Battery voltage

When releasing accelerator pedal
after warming up engine.

When ASCD cruise is being performed (“CRUISE” light comes on).

Battery voltage

When ASCD cruise is not being performed, (“CRUISE” light does not
comes on).

When turning ignition switch to ON

Battery voltage

L
19

W/R

Power source
(Same as No. 10)

When turning ignition switch to OFF

L/B

Overrun clutch
solenoid valve

Overdrive control
switch

ASCD O/D cut
signal

AT-243

When overrun clutch solenoid valve
operates.

Battery voltage

When overrun clutch shift solenoid
valve does not operates.

When setting overdrive control
switch in OFF position

When setting overdrive control
switch in ON position

Battery voltage

When ASCD permits O/D.

5 - 8V

When ASCD requires O/D to be OFF.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[RE4R01A]
Terminal No.

Wire color

B/Y

G/B

G/W

Item
Ground

—

PNP switch 1
position

PNP switch 2
position
or

R/Y

Judgement standard (Approx.)

Condition

Power source
(Memory back-up)

Revolution sensor
(Measure in AC
range)

—

When setting selector lever to 1 position.

Battery voltage

When setting selector lever to other
position.

When setting selector lever to 2 position.

Battery voltage

When setting selector lever to other
position.

When turning ignition switch to ON.

Battery voltage

When turning ignition switch to OFF.

Battery voltage

When vehicle cruises at 30 km/h (19
MPH).

1V or more
Voltage rises
gradually in
response to vehicle speed.

When vehicle parks.

30*2

Y/R

DATA LINK CONNECTOR data in

—

31*2

GY/L

DATA LINK CONNECTOR data out

—

B/W

Y/R

G/R

Throttle position
sensor (Power
source)

PNP switch D
position

PNP switch R
position

PNP switch P or N
position

38*3

Turbine revolution
sensor (measured in AC
range)

P/L

Engine speed signal

AT-244

Ignition switch ON

4.5 - 5.5V

Ignition switch OFF

When setting selector lever to D
position.

Battery voltage

When setting selector lever to other
position.

When setting selector lever to R
position.

Battery voltage

When setting selector lever to other
position.

When setting selector lever to P or N
position.

Battery voltage

When setting selector lever to other
position.

When engine runs at approximately
1,000 rpm.

1.2V

When engine runs at idle speed.

0.5 - 2.5V

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[RE4R01A]
Terminal No.

Wire color

Item

Judgement standard (Approx.)

Condition

Vehicle speed
sensor

When moving vehicle at 2 to 3 km/h
(1 to 2 MPH) for 1m (3 ft) or more.

Voltage varies
between less
than 1V and
more than 4.5V

OR/L

Throttle position
sensor

When depressing accelerator pedal
slowly after warming up engine (Voltage rises gradually in response to
throttle position).

Fully-closed
throttle:
0.5V - 0.7V
Fully-open throttle:
4V

Throttle position
sensor (Ground)

45*3

BR/R

Stop lamp switch

G/B

R/B

B/Y

—
—

A/T fluid temperature sensor

Ground (Same as
No. 25)

—

*1: These terminals are connected to the ECM.
*2: These terminals are connected to the Data link connector for CONSULT-II.
*3: VG33ER only.

When brake pedal is depressed.

Battery voltage

When brake pedal is released.

When ATF temperature is 20°C
(68°F).

1.5V

When ATF temperature is 80°C
(176°F).

0.5V

—

AT-245

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
[RE4R01A]

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN

PFP:00000
ECS007M2

WCWA0146E

AT-246

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
[RE4R01A]
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
Wire color
Item
No.
10

W/R

A
Judgement standard (Approx.)

Condition
When turning ignition switch to ON

Power source

When turning ignition switch to OFF

W/R

Power source
(Same as No. 10)

Battery voltage

or
Same as No. 10

D
25

B/Y

Ground

R/Y

Power source
(Memory backup)

B/Y

Ground (Same
as No. 25)

When turning ignition switch to ON
When turning ignition switch to OFF

0V
0V

When turning ignition switch to OFF

Battery voltage

When turning ignition switch to ON

Battery voltage

When turning ignition switch to ON

When turning ignition switch to OFF

Diagnostic Procedure

ECS007M3

1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE
1.
2.

3.
4.

Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
Check voltage between TCM harness connectors M77, M78 terminals (10, 19, 28) and ground.
Voltage

: Battery voltage

Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Check voltage between TCM harness connector M78 terminal
28 and ground.
Voltage

: Battery voltage

OK or NG
AAT476A
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the following items:
● Harness for open or short between fuse block J/B harness connectors M26, M27 and TCM harness connectors M77, M78
● Ignition switch and fuse
Refer to PG-9, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" .

AT-247

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
[RE4R01A]

2. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect TCM harness connector.
Check continuity between TCM harness connector M78 terminals (25, 48) and ground.
Continuity should exist.

If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
AAT477A

AT-248

DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
[RE4R01A]

DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
Description
●
●

PFP:32006

A
ECS007M4

The PNP switch assembly includes a transmission range switch.
The transmission range switch detects the selector position and
sends a signal to the TCM.

D
AAT478A

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
Wire color
Item
No.

G/B

G/W

G/R

Judgement standard (Approx.)

Condition

PNP switch 1
position

PNP switch 2
position

PNP switch D
position

PNP switch R
position

PNP switch P or
N position

When setting selector lever to 1 position.

Battery voltage

When setting selector lever to other
positions.

When setting selector lever to 2 position.

Battery voltage

When setting selector lever to other
positions.

When setting selector lever to D
position.

Battery voltage

When setting selector lever to other
positions.

When setting selector lever to R
position.

Battery voltage

When setting selector lever to other
positions.

When setting selector lever to P or N
position.

Battery voltage

When setting selector lever to other
positions.

: PNP SW/CIRC
: P0705

M
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM does not receive the correct voltage
signal from the switch based on the gear
position.

Check item (Possible cause)
●

Harness or connectors
(The PNP switch circuit is open or
shorted)

●

PNP switch

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code

With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON.

AT-249

DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
[RE4R01A]
2.
3.

●

Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.3V
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON or OFF)
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
SAT014K

SEF949Y

AT-250

DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
[RE4R01A]

Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW

ECS007M5

WCWA0092E

AT-251

DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
[RE4R01A]

Diagnostic Procedure

ECS007M6

1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position
(Do not start engine).
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out P, R, N, D, 2 and 1 position switches moving selector
lever to each position. Check the signal of the selector lever
position is indicated properly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following items:
● PNP switch
Refer to AT-254, "PNP SWITCH" .
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and
PNP switch (Main harness)
● Harness for short or open between PNP switch and
TCM (Main harness)
● Diode (P position)

AT-252

SAT701J

DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
[RE4R01A]

2. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position
(Do not start engine).
2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M78 terminals (26, 27, 34, 35, 36) and ground while
moving selector lever through each position.

AAT480A

AAT479A

Does battery voltage exist (B) or non-existent (0)?
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> Check the following items:
● PNP switch
Refer to AT-254, "PNP SWITCH" .
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch
● Harness for short or open between PNP switch connector E34 and TCM connector M78
● Diode (P position)

3. CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-249, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

AT-253

DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
[RE4R01A]

Component Inspection

ECS007M7

PNP SWITCH
1.

Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2 and between terminals 3 and (4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9) while moving manual shaft through
each position.

Lever position
Terminal No.

P
1-2
3-4

R
3-5

N
1-2

3-7

3-8

3-9

3-6

SAT517GB

AAT482A

2.
3.

If NG, check again with manual control linkage disconnected
from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to step 1.
If OK on step 2, adjust manual control linkage. Refer to AT-406,
"Manual Control Linkage Adjustment" .

AAT551A

4.
5.
6.

If NG on step 2, remove PNP switch from A/T and check continuity of PNP switch terminals. Refer to step 1.
If OK on step 4, adjust PNP switch. Refer to AT-405, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" .
If NG on step 4, replace PNP switch.

AAT481A

AT-254

DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
[RE4R01A]

DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Description

PFP:31940

A
ECS007M8

The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature
and sends a signal to the TCM.

D
SAT342HA

CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR
MODE

H
SAT021J

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
Condition

Specification (Approx.)

Cold [20°C (68°F)]
↓
Hot [80°C (176°F)]

A/T fluid temperature
sensor

1.5V
↓
0.5V

2.5kΩ
↓
0.3kΩ

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
Wire color
Item
No.
42

R/B

Judgement standard (Approx.)

Condition

Throttle position
sensor
(Ground)

—

A/T fluid temperature sensor

When ATF temperature is 20°C
(68°F).

1.5V

When ATF temperature is 80°C
(176°F).

0.5V

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC

Malfunction is detected when....
TCM receives an excessively low or high
voltage from the sensor.

: P0710

Check item (Possible cause)
●

Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)

●

A/T fluid temperature sensor

AT-255

DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
[RE4R01A]
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10
minutes (Total: It is not necessary to maintain continuously).
CMPS·RPM (REF): 450 rpm or more
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)

SAT014K

●

With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

SEF949Y

AT-256

DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
[RE4R01A]

Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS

ECS007M9

WCWA0147E

AT-257

DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
[RE4R01A]

Diagnostic Procedure

ECS007MA

1. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.

AAT483A

Is resistance approx. 2.5 kΩ?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> 1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check the following items:
– A/T fluid temperature sensor
Refer to AT-260, "A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR" .
– Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open

AT-258

DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
[RE4R01A]

2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”.

SAT614J

Voltage
Cold [20°C (68°F)] →
Hot [80°C (176°F)]

: Approximately 1.5V →
0.5V

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2.

Check voltage between TCM harness connector M78 terminal 47 and ground while warming up A/T.
I

AAT484A

Voltage
Cold [20°C (68°F)] →
Hot [80°C (176°F)]

: Approximately 1.5V →
0.5V

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following item:
● Harness for short or open between TCM and terminal cord assembly (Main harness)

3. CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-255, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

AT-259

DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
[RE4R01A]

Component Inspection

ECS007MB

A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
●
●

For removal, refer to “AT-407, "Removal" .
Check resistance between A/T fluid temperature sensor terminals 6 and 7 while changing temperature as shown at left.
Temperature °C (°F)

Resistance (Approx.)

20 (68)

2.5 kΩ

80 (176)

0.3 kΩ

AAT485A

AT-260

DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
[RE4R01A]

DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
Description

PFP:32702

A
ECS007MC

The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the output shaft parking pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal is sent
to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.

D
AAT478A

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
Wire color
Item
No.

Judgement standard (Approx.)

Condition

Revolution sensor
(Measure in AC
range)

When vehicle cruises at 30 km/h (19
MPH).

1V or more
Voltage rises
gradually in
response to vehicle speed.

When vehicle parks.

—

Throttle position
sensor
(Ground)

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT

Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM does not receive the proper voltage
signal from the sensor.

: P0720

Check item (Possible cause)
●

Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)

●

Revolution sensor

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted,
always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.

AT-261

DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
[RE4R01A]
1.
2.

3.
4.

●

With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE·MTR”
value.
If the check result is NG, go to AT-264, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5
consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)
Driving condition: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
If the check result is NG, go to AT-264, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
CMPS·RPM (REF): 3,500 rpm or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)
Driving condition: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test.

SAT014K

SAT971J

With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

SEF949Y

AT-262

DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
[RE4R01A]

Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T

ECS007MD

WCWA0148E

AT-263

DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
[RE4R01A]

Diagnostic Procedure

ECS007ME

1. CHECK REVOLUTION SENSOR
Refer to AT-265, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace revolution sensor.

2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” while driving.
Check the value changes according to driving speed.

SAT614J

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M78 terminal 29 (Y) and ground while driving.
(Measure with AC range)
Voltage
At 0 km/h (0 MPH)
At 30 km/h (19 MPH)
(Voltage rises gradually
in response to vehicle
speed.)

: 0V
: 1V or more

OK or NG
LCIA0290E
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following items:
● Harness for short or open between TCM and revolution sensor (Main harness)
● Harness for short or open between revolution sensor harness connector E73 and ECM harness
connector M78
● Ground circuit for ECM
Refer to AT-246, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY" .

AT-264

DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
[RE4R01A]

3. CHECK DTC

A
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-261, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" .
B
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
AT
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

Component Inspection

ECS007MF

REVOLUTION SENSOR
●
●

For removal, refer to AT-407, "Removal" .
Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
Terminal No.
1

Resistance
2

500 - 650Ω

G
AAT487A

AT-265

DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
[RE4R01A]

DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
Description

PFP:24825
ECS007MG

The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM.

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
Wire color
Item
No.

P/L

Judgement standard (Approx.)

Condition

Engine speed
signal

When engine runs at idle speed.

0.5 - 2.5V

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: ENGINE SPEED SIG

Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM does not receive the proper voltage
signal from ECM.

Check item (Possible cause)
●

Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)

: P0725

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the
next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10
consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)
●

SAT014K

With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

SEF949Y

AT-266

DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
[RE4R01A]

Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS

ECS007MH

WCWA0149E

AT-267

DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
[RE4R01A]

Diagnostic Procedure

ECS007MI

1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM
Perform diagnostic test mode II (self-diagnostic results) for engine control. Check ignition signal circuit condition.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check ignition signal circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-1134 (VG33E only) or EC-1710
(VG33ER only), “IGNITION SIGNAL”.

2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “ENGINE SPEED”.
Check engine speed changes according to throttle position.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.

SAT645J

Check voltage between TCM harness connector M78 terminal 39 and ground.

AAT488A

Does battery voltage (idle speed) 0.5 - 2.5V?
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> Check the following items:
● Harness for short or open between TCM connector M78 and ECM connector F29
● Resistor
● Ignition coil
Refer to EC-1134 (VG33E only) or EC-1710 (VG33ER only), “IGNITION SIGNAL”.

AT-268

DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
[RE4R01A]

3. CHECK DTC

A
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-266, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" .
B
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
AT
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

AT-269

DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION
[RE4R01A]

DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION
Description
●
●
●

PFP:31940
ECS007MJ

This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis.
This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis
malfunction.
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into first gear position as instructed by the TCM.
This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such
as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
Gear position

Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B

ON (Closed)

OFF (Open)

ON (Closed)

OFF (Open)

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
Wire color
Item
No.

L/W

L/Y

Judgement standard (Approx.)

Condition

Shift solenoid
valve A

Shift solenoid
valve B

When shift solenoid valve A operates.
(When driving in D1 or D4 )

Battery voltage

When shift solenoid valve A does not
operate.
(When driving in D2 or D3 )

When shift solenoid valve B operates.
(When driving in D1 or D2 )

Battery voltage

When shift solenoid valve B does not
operate.
(When driving in D3 or D4 )

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as
follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
B: Engine speed signal from ECM
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is higher than the position (1st) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than
normal. In case the ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction will be caused when either shift solenoid valve A is stuck open or shift solenoid valve B is
stuck open.
Gear position supposed by TCM

In case of gear position with no malfunctions

In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A stuck open

In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck open

*: P0731 is detected.
Diagnostic trouble code

Malfunction is detected when ...

: A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
: P0731

AT-270

Check item (Possible cause)
●

Shift solenoid valve A

●

Shift solenoid valve B

●

Each clutch

●

Hydraulic control circuit

DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION
[RE4R01A]
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the
tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the
next test.
TESTING CONDITIONS:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
1.
2.

3.
4.

–

6.
7.

D
SAT014K

With CONSULT-II
Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT-II.
Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is
within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm
up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down
the fluid).
Select “1ST GR FNCTN P0731” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”.
SAT971J
Accelerate vehicle to 17 to 23 km/h (11 to 14 MPH) under the
following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1/8 (at all times during step 4)
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)
Check that “GEAR” shows 2 after releasing pedal.
Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 17 to 23 km/h (11 to 14
MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds)
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to AT274, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to the
SAT021J
following step.
Check that “GEAR” shows 1 when depressing accelerator
pedal to WOT.
If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for
“ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0731 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
Stop vehicle.
Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.)

Vehicle condition
No malfunction exists
Malfunction for P0731 exists.

Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when
screen is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → 4
1→2→3→4
2→2→3→3
4→3→3→4

Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.)
Refer to AT-274, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Refer to AT-496, "Shift Schedule" .

AT-271

DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION
[RE4R01A]
●

With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

AT-272

DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION
[RE4R01A]

Wiring Diagram — AT — 1ST

ECS007MK

WCWA0150E

AT-273

DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION
[RE4R01A]

Diagnostic Procedure

ECS007ML

1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-431, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" .
Check shift solenoid valve operation.
–
Shift solenoid valve A
–
Shift solenoid valve B
Refer to AT-275, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly.
1.
2.

2. CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1.

Disassemble control valve assembly.
Refer to AT-431, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" .
2. Check to ensure that:
–
Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.
–
Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
–
Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.
–
Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair control valve assembly.

SAT367H

3. CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-271, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.

AT-274

DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION
[RE4R01A]

Component Inspection

ECS007MM

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A AND B
●

For removal, refer toAT-431, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" .
B

D
SAT649I

Resistance Check
●

Check resistance between terminals (2 or 3) and ground.
Solenoid valve

Terminal No.

Shift solenoid valve A

Shift solenoid valve B

Resistance (Approx.)

F
Ground

20 - 40Ω

Operation Check
●

Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminals (2 or 3) and ground.
H

J
SAT648I

AT-275

DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION
[RE4R01A]

DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION
Description
●
●
●

PFP:31940
ECS007MN

This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis.
This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis
malfunction.
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into second gear position as instructed by the
TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction
such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
Gear position

Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B

ON (Closed)

OFF (Open)

ON (Closed)

OFF (Open)

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
Wire color
Item
No.

L/Y

Judgement standard (Approx.)

Condition

Shift solenoid
valve B

When shift solenoid valve B operates. (When driving in “D1 ” or “D2 ”)

Battery voltage

When shift solenoid valve B does not
operate. (When driving in “D3 ” or “D4
”)

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as
follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
B: Engine speed signal from ECM
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is higher than the position (2nd) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than
normal. In case the ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck open.
Gear position supposed by TCM

In case of gear position with no malfunctions

In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck
open

*: P0732 is detected.
Diagnostic trouble code
: A/T 2ND SIGNAL

Check item
(Possible cause)

Malfunction is detected when ...

A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear
position even if electrical circuit is good.

: P0732

AT-276

●

Shift solenoid valve B

●

Each clutch

●

Hydraulic control circuit

DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION
[RE4R01A]
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the
tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the
next test.
TESTING CONDITIONS:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of
test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
1.
2.

3.
4.

–

–
–

6.
7.

●

D
SAT014K

With CONSULT-II
Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT-II.
Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is
within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm
up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down
SAT971J
the fluid).
Select “2ND GR FNCTN P0732” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”.
Accelerate vehicle to 50 to 55 km/h (31 to 34 MPH) under the
following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1/8 (at all times during step 4)
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)
Check that “GEAR” shows 3 or 4 after releasing pedal.
Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 50 to 55 km/h (31 to 34
SAT021J
MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to AT-279, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to following step.
Check that “GEAR” shows 2 when depressing accelerator pedal to WOT.
If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for
“ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0732 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
Stop vehicle.
Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.)

Vehicle condition

Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when
screen is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → 4

No malfunction exists

1→2→3→4

Malfunction for P0732 exists.

4→3→3→4

Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to
AT-279, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Refer to AT-496, "Shift Schedule" .
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

AT-277

DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION
[RE4R01A]

Wiring Diagram — AT — 2ND

ECS007MO

WCWA0096E

AT-278

DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION
[RE4R01A]

Diagnostic Procedure

ECS007MP

1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
B

Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
Check shift solenoid valve operation.
–
Shift solenoid valve B
Refer to AT-320, "SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly.

1.
2.

2. CHECK CONTROL VALVE

J
SAT367H

3. CHECK DTC

Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-277, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.

Component Inspection

ECS007MQ

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
●

For removal, refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL"AT-402, "REMOVAL" .

SAT651I

Resistance Check
●

Check resistance between terminal 2 and ground.

AT-279

DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION
[RE4R01A]
Solenoid valve
Shift solenoid valve B

Terminal No.
2

Ground

Resistance (Approx.)
20 - 40Ω

Operation Check
●

Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 2 and ground.

SAT650I

AT-280

DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION
[RE4R01A]

DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION
Description
●
●
●

PFP:31940

A
ECS007MR

This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis.
This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis B
malfunction.
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into third gear position as instructed by the TCM.
This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such AT
as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning servo piston or brake band,
etc.
D

Gear position

Shift solenoid valve A

ON (Closed)

OFF (Open)

ON (Closed)

Shift solenoid valve B

ON (Closed)

OFF (Open)

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
Wire color
Item
No.

L/W

Judgement standard (Approx.)

Condition

Shift solenoid
valve A

When shift solenoid valve A operates. (When driving in D1 or D4 )

Battery voltage

When shift solenoid valve A does not
operate. (When driving in D2 or D3 )

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as
follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
B: Engine speed signal from ECM
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is higher than the position (3rd) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than
normal. In case the ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve A is stuck closed.
Gear position supposed by TCM

In case of gear position with no malfunctions

In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A stuck
closed

*: P0733 is detected.
Diagnostic trouble code
: A/T 3RD GR FNCTN

Check item
(Possible cause)

Malfunction is detected when ...

A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear position even if electrical circuit is good.

: P0733

AT-281

●

Shift solenoid valve A

●

Each clutch

●

Hydraulic control circuit

DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION
[RE4R01A]
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the
tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the
next test.
TESTING CONDITIONS:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of
test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
1.
2.

3.
4.

–

6.
7.

With CONSULT-II
Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT-II.
Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is
within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm
up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down
SAT971J
the fluid).
Select “3RD GR FNCTN P0733” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”.
Accelerate vehicle to 70 to 85 km/h (43 to 53 MPH) under the
following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1/8 (at all times during step 4)
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)
Check that “GEAR” shows 4 after releasing pedal.
Depress accelerator pedal steadily with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of “THROTTLE POSI” from a speed of 70 to 85 km/h (43 to 53 MPH) until
SAT021J
“TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED”. (It
will take approximately 3 seconds.)
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to AT-284, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to following step.
Check that “GEAR” shows 3 when depressing accelerator pedal with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of “THROTTLE
POSI”.
If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for
“ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0733 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
Stop vehicle.
Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.)

Vehicle condition

●

Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when
screen is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → 4

No malfunction exists.

1→2→3→4

Malfunction for P0733 exists.

1→1→4→4

SAT014K

Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to AT-284, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Refer to AT-496, "Shift Schedule" .
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

AT-282

DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION
[RE4R01A]

Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RD

ECS007MS

WCWA0151E

AT-283

DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION
[RE4R01A]

Diagnostic Procedure

ECS007MT

1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
Check shift solenoid valve operation.
–
Shift solenoid valve A
Refer to AT-315, "SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly.
1.
2.

2. CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1.

SAT367H

3. CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-282, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.

AT-284

DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION
[RE4R01A]

Component Inspection

ECS007MU

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
●

For removal, refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
B

D
SAT654I

Resistance Check
●

Check resistance between terminal 3 and ground.
Solenoid valve
Shift solenoid valve A

Terminal No.
3

Ground

Resistance (Approx.)

20 - 40Ω

Operation Check
●

Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 3 and ground.

SAT653I

AT-285

DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
[RE4R01A]

DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Description
●
●
●

PFP:31940
ECS007MV

This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis.
This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis
malfunction.
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into fourth gear position or the torque converter
clutch does not lock up as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits
open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve
operation, malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter clutch, etc.

CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item

Condition

Specification (Approx.)

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve duty

Lock-up OFF
↓
Lock-up ON

4%
↓
94%

Line pressure solenoid valve
duty

Small throttle opening (Low line pressure)
↓
Large throttle opening (High line pressure)

24%
↓
95%

Gear position

Shift solenoid valve A

ON (Closed)

OFF (Open)

ON (Closed)

Shift solenoid valve B

ON (Closed)

OFF (Open)

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
Wire color
Item
No.

GY/R

BR/Y

L/W

L/Y

Condition

Line pressure
solenoid valve

Judgement standard (Approx.)

When releasing accelerator pedal
after warming up engine.

1.5 - 2.5V

When depressing accelerator pedal
fully after warming up engine.

Line pressure
solenoid valve
(with dropping
resistor)

When releasing accelerator pedal
after warming up engine.

4 - 14V

When depressing accelerator pedal
fully after warming up engine.

Shift solenoid
valve A

When shift solenoid valve A operates. (When driving in D1 or D4 .)

Battery voltage

When shift solenoid valve A does not
operate. (When driving in D2 or D3 .)

When shift solenoid valve B operates. (When driving in D1 or D2 .)

Battery voltage

When shift solenoid valve B does not
operate. (When driving in D3 or D4 .)

Shift solenoid
valve B

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as
follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
B: Engine speed signal from ECM
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is much lower than the position (4th) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be much
less than normal. In case the ratio does not reach the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck closed.

AT-286

DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
[RE4R01A]
Gear position supposed by TCM

In case of gear position with no malfunctions

In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck
closed

*: P0734 is detected.
Diagnostic trouble code

Check item
(Possible cause)

Malfunction is detected when ...

: A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
: P0734

●

Shift solenoid valve A

●

Shift solenoid valve B

●

Line pressure solenoid valve

●

Each clutch

●

Hydraulic control circuit

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the
tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the
next test.
TESTING CONDITIONS:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of
test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
1.
2.

3.
4.

–

SAT014K

With CONSULT-II
Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT-II.
Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is
within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm
up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down
SAT971J
the fluid).
Select “4TH GR FNCTN P0734” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”.
Accelerate vehicle to 50 to 60 km/h (31 to 37 MPH) under the
following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 5.5/8 (at all times during step 4)
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)
Check that “GEAR” shows 3 after releasing pedal.
Depress accelerator pedal steadily with 1/8 - 2/8 of “THROTTLE
POSI” from a speed of 50 to 60 km/h (31 to 37 MPH) until
SAT021J
“TESTING” has turned to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED”.
(It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to AT-290, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to following step.
Check that “GEAR” shows 4 when depressing accelerator pedal with 1/8 - 2/8 of “THROTTLE
POSI”.

AT-287

DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
[RE4R01A]
–

6.
7.

If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for
“ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0734 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
Stop vehicle.
Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.)

Vehicle condition
No malfunction exists

1→2→3→4

Malfunction for P0734 exists.

1→2→2→1

●

Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when
screen is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → 4

Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to AT-290, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
Refer to AT-496, "Shift Schedule" .
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

AT-288

DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
[RE4R01A]

Wiring Diagram — AT — 4TH

ECS007MW

WCWA0152E

AT-289

DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
[RE4R01A]

Diagnostic Procedure

1. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3

ECS007MX

TO D4 )

During AT-223, "Cruise Test — Part 1" , does A/T shift from D3 to D4
at the specified speed?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 9.
No
>> GO TO 2.

SAT988H

2. CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Perform line pressure test. Refer to AT-214, "Line Pressure Test" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 7.

3. CHECK SOLENOID VALVES
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
2. Refer to AT-315, "SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" and AT-320, "SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace solenoid valve assembly.

4. CHECK CONTROL VALVE
Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-431, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" .
Check to ensure that:
–
Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.
–
Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
–
Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.
–
Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair control valve.
1.
2.

SAT367H

5. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3

TO D4 )

Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 9.
No
>> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.

AT-290

DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
[RE4R01A]

6. CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
2. Refer to AT-310, "LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace solenoid valve assembly.

7. CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1.
2.

Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-431, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" .
Check line pressure circuit valves for sticking.
–
Pressure regulator valve
–
Pilot valve
–
Pressure modifier valve
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Repair control valve.

H
SAT367H

8. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3

TO D4 )

Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed?
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.

9. CHECK DTC

Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-287, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> Perform “Cruise Test — Part 1” again and return to the start point of this flow chart.

AT-291

DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
[RE4R01A]

Component Inspection

ECS007MY

SOLENOID VALVES
●

For removal, refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .

AAT613A

Resistance Check
●

Check resistance between terminals (3, 2, or 6) and ground.
Solenoid valve

Terminal No.

Shift solenoid valve A

Shift solenoid valve B

Line pressure solenoid valve

Ground

Resistance (Approx.)
20 - 40Ω
2.5 - 5Ω

Operation Check
●

Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminals (3, 2, 4, 6 or 7) and
ground.

SAT158J

AT-292

DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4R01A]

DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Description

PFP:31940

A
ECS007MZ

The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear
in D4 , by the TCM in response to signals sent from the vehicle
speed and throttle position sensors. Lock-up piston operation will
then be controlled.
Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 2/8) in lock-up
condition, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If there is a
big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.

D
SAT342HA

CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve duty

Condition

Specification (Approx.)

Lock-up OFF
↓
Lock-up ON

4%
↓
94%

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
Wire color
Item
No.

G/OR

Judgement standard (Approx.)

Condition

Torque converter
clutch solenoid
valve

When A/T performs lock-up.

8 - 15V

When A/T does not perform lock-up.

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: TCC SOLENOID/CIRC

Check item
(Possible cause)

Malfunction is detected when ...

TCM detects an improper voltage drop
when it tires to operate the solenoid valve.

: P0740

●

Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)

●

T/C clutch solenoid valve

AT-293

DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4R01A]
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the
next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II
and wait at least 1 second.
●

SAT014K

With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

SEF949Y

AT-294

DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4R01A]

Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV

ECS007N0

WCWA0099E

AT-295

DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4R01A]

Diagnostic Procedure

ECS007N1

1. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment.
Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector E72 terminal 5 and ground. Refer to wiring
diagram.
Is resistance approx. 10 - 20 Ω?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> 1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
2. Check the following items:
– Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Refer to AT-297, "TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
– Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open

2. CHECK RESISTANCE
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect TCM harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector E72 terminal 5 and TCM harness connector
M77 terminal 3. Refer to wiring diagrams.
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is resistance approx. 0 Ω?
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

3. CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-294, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

AT-296

DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4R01A]

Component Inspection

ECS007N2

TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
●

For removal, refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
B

D
SAT160J

Resistance Check
●

Check resistance between torque converter clutch solenoid valve terminal 7 and ground.
Solenoid valve
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

Terminal No.

Resistance (Approx.)

F
7

Ground

10 - 20 Ω

Operation Check
●

Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 7 and ground.
H

J
SAT161J

AT-297

DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
[RE4R01A]

DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Description
●
●
●

PFP:31940
ECS007N3

This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis.
This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis
malfunction.
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into fourth gear position, or the torque converter
clutch does not lock up as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits
open or shorted), but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve
operation, malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter clutch, etc.

CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve duty

Condition

Specification (Approx.)

Lock-up OFF
↓
Lock-up ON

4%
↓
94%

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
Wire color
Item
No.

GY/R

BR/Y

G/OR

Condition

Line pressure
solenoid valve

Line pressure
solenoid valve
(with dropping
resistor)
Torque converter
clutch solenoid
valve

AT-298

Judgement standard (Approx.)

When releasing accelerator pedal
after warming up engine.

1.5 - 2.5V

When depressing accelerator pedal
fully after warming up engine.

When releasing accelerator pedal
after warming up engine.

4 - 14V

When depressing accelerator pedal
fully after warming up engine.

When A/T performs lock-up.

8 - 15V

When A/T does not perform lock- up.

DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
[RE4R01A]
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as A
follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
B
B: Engine speed signal from ECM
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is much lower than the position (4th) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be much
less than normal. In case the ratio does not reach the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction. AT
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck closed.
Gear position supposed by TCM

In case of gear position with no malfunctions

In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck closed

*: P0744 is detected.
Diagnostic trouble code

E
Malfunction is detected when ...

: A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good.
: P0744

Check item (Possible cause)
●

Line pressure solenoid valve

●

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

●

Each clutch

●

Hydraulic control circuit

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the
next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT-II
Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT-II.
2. Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is
within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm
up the fluid), or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down
the fluid).
3. Select “TCC S/V FNCTN P0744” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”.
1.

SAT014K

SAT971J

AT-299

DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
[RE4R01A]
4.

–
–
–

●

Accelerate vehicle to more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) and maintain
the following condition continuously until “TESTING” has turned
to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 30 seconds after
“TESTING” shows.)
THROTTLE POSI: 1/8 - 2/8 (at all times during step 4)
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)
TCC S/V DUTY: More than 94%
VHCL/S SE·A/T: Constant speed of more than 70 km/h (43
MPH)
Check that “GEAR” shows 4.
SAT021J
For shift schedule, refer to AT-496, "Shift Schedule" .
If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT II for a long
time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0744 is shown, refer to
applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to AT-302, "Diagnostic Procedure" .)
Refer to AT-496, "Shift Schedule" .
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

AT-300

DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
[RE4R01A]

Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG

ECS007N4

WCWA0100E

AT-301

DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
[RE4R01A]

Diagnostic Procedure

1. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3

ECS007N5

TO D4 )

During AT-223, "Cruise Test — Part 1" , does A/T shift from D3 to D4
at the specified speed?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check for proper lock-up. GO TO 10.
No
>> GO TO 2.

SAT988H

2. CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Perform line pressure test. Refer to AT-214, "Line Pressure Test" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 6.

3. CHECK CONTROL VALVE
Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-431, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" .
Check to ensure that:
–
Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.
–
Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
–
Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.
–
Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair control valve.
1.
2.

SAT367H

4. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3

TO D4 )

Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 5.
No
>> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.

5. CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-299, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> ● Check for proper lock-up. GO TO 10.

AT-302

DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
[RE4R01A]

6. CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
2. Check line pressure solenoid valve operation. Refer to AT-304, "SOLENOID VALVES" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace solenoid valve assembly.

7. CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1.
2.

H
SAT367H

8. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3

TO D4 )

Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 9.
No
>> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.

9. CHECK DTC

Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-299, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> ● Check for proper lock-up. GO TO 10.

10. CHECK LOCK-UP CONDITION
During AT-223, "Cruise Test — Part 1" ,
Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Perform “Cruise Test − Part 1” again and return to the start point of this flow chart.
No
>> GO TO 11.

11. CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve operation.
Refer to AT-297, "TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 12.
NG
>> Replace solenoid valve assembly.

1.
2.

AT-303

DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
[RE4R01A]

12. CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1.
2.

Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-431, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" .
Check control valves for sticking.
–
Torque converter clutch control valve
–
Torque converter clutch relief valve
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
>> Repair control valve.

SAT367H

13. CHECK LOCK-UP CONDITION
Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 14.
No
>> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.

14. CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-299, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> Perform “Cruise Test — Part 1” again and return to the start point of this flow chart.

Component Inspection

ECS007N6

SOLENOID VALVES
●

For removal, refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .

AAT614A

AT-304

DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
[RE4R01A]
Resistance Check
●

Check resistance between terminals (6, 7) and ground.
Solenoid valve
Line pressure solenoid valve
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

Terminal No.

2.5 - 5 Ω

6
Ground
7

Resistance (Approx.)

10 - 20 Ω

Operation Check
●

Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminals (3, 2, 4, 6 or 7) and
ground.

SAT158J

AT-305

DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4R01A]

DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Description

PFP:31940
ECS007N7

The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge
pressure to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent
from the TCM.
The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the
closed throttle position switch is ON. To confirm the line pressure duty cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle)
should be open until the closed throttle position switch is OFF.

SAT341H

CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
Line pressure solenoid valve
duty

Condition

Specification (Approx.)

Small throttle opening (Low line pressure)
↓
Large throttle opening (High line pressure)

24%
↓
95%

NOTE:
The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the closed throttle position switch is ON. To confirm the line pressure duty
cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle) should be open until the closed throttle position switch is OFF.

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
Wire color
Item
No.

GY/R

BR/Y

Judgement standard (Approx.)

Condition

Line pressure
solenoid valve

Line pressure
solenoid valve
(with dropping
resistor)

When releasing accelerator pedal
after warming up engine.

1.5 - 2.5V

When depressing accelerator pedal
fully after warming up engine.

When releasing accelerator pedal
after warming up engine.

4 - 14V

When depressing accelerator pedal
fully after warming up engine.

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: L/PRESS SOL/CIRC

Check item
(Possible cause)

Malfunction is detected when ...

TCM detects an improper voltage drop
when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.

: P0745

AT-306

●

Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted)

●

Line pressure solenoid valve

DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4R01A]
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
A

NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the
next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
2. Depress accelerator pedal completely and wait at least 1 second.
●

D
SAT014K

With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

H
SEF949Y

AT-307

DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4R01A]

Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV

ECS007N8

WCWA0101E

AT-308

DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4R01A]

Diagnostic Procedure

ECS007N9

1. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
B
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment.
Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector E72 terminal 4 and ground. Refer to the wir- AT
ing diagram.
Is resistance approx. 2.5 - 5Ω?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
D
No
>> 1. Remove control valve assembly.
Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
2. Check the following items:
E
– Line pressure solenoid valve
Refer to AT-310, "LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" .
– Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open
F

1.
2.
3.

2. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect TCM harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector E72 terminal 4 and TCM harness connector
M77 terminal 2. Refer to the wiring diagram.
Is resistance approx. 12Ω?
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> Check the following items:
● Dropping resistor
Refer toAT-310, "DROPPING RESISTOR" .
● Harness for short or open between TCM terminal 2 and terminal cord assembly connector

3. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector E72 terminal 4 and TCM harness connector
M77 terminal 1. Refer to the wiring diagram.
Is resistance approx. 0Ω?
Yes
>> GO TO 4.
No
>> Repair or replace harness between TCM terminal 1 and terminal cord assembly.

4. CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-307, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

AT-309

DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4R01A]

Component Inspection

ECS007NA

LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
●

For removal, refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .

SAT657I

Resistance Check
●

Check resistance between terminal 6 and ground.
Solenoid valve

Terminal No.

Line pressure solenoid valve

Resistance (Approx.)

Ground

2.5 - 5 Ω

Operation Check
●

Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 6 and ground.

SAT658I

DROPPING RESISTOR
●

Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance

: Approx. 12Ω

AAT492A

AT-310

DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
[RE4R01A]

DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
Description

PFP:31940

A
ECS007NB

Shift solenoid valves A and B are turned ON or OFF by the TCM in
response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed and
throttle position sensors. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum
position.

D
SAT341H

Gear position

Shift solenoid valve A

ON (Closed)

OFF (Open)

ON (Closed)

Shift solenoid valve B

ON (Closed)

OFF (Open)

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
Wire color
Item
No.

L/W

Judgement standard (Approx.)

Condition

Shift solenoid
valve A

When shift solenoid valve A operates. (When driving in D1 or D4 )

Battery voltage

When shift solenoid valve A does not
operate. (When driving in D2 or D3 )

: SFT SOL A/CIRC

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code

Check item
(Possible cause)

Malfunction is detected when ...

TCM detects an improper voltage drop
when it tires to operate the solenoid valve.

: P0750

●

Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted)

●

Shift solenoid valve A

AT-311

SAT014K

DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
[RE4R01A]
2.
3.

●

Start engine.
Drive vehicle in D position and allow the transmission to shift 1
→ 2 (“GEAR”).
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

SEF949Y

AT-312

DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
[RE4R01A]

Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A

ECS007NC

WCWA0153E

AT-313

DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
[RE4R01A]

Diagnostic Procedure

ECS007ND

1. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment.
Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector
E72 terminal 2 and ground.
Is resistance approx. 20 - 40Ω?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> 1. Remove control valve assembly.
Refer toAT-402, "REMOVAL" .
2. Check the following items:
– Shift solenoid valve A
Refer to AT-315, "SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" .
– Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open

AAT506A

2. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect TCM harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector E72 terminal 2 and TCM harness connector
M77 terminal 11. Refer to wiring diagram.
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is resistance approx. 0Ω?
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

3. CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-311, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

AT-314

DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
[RE4R01A]

Component Inspection

ECS007NE

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
●

For removal, refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
B

D
SAT654I

Resistance Check
●

Check resistance between terminal 3 and ground.
Solenoid valve
Shift solenoid valve A

Terminal No.
3

Ground

Resistance (Approx.)

20 - 40 Ω

Operation Check
●

Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 3 and ground.

SAT653I

AT-315

DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
[RE4R01A]

DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
Description

PFP:31940
ECS007NF

SAT341H

Gear position

Shift solenoid valve A

ON (Closed)

OFF (Open)

ON (Closed)

Shift solenoid valve B

ON (Closed)

OFF (Open)

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
Wire color
Item
No.

L/Y

Judgement standard (Approx.)

Condition

Shift solenoid
valve B

When shift solenoid valve B operates. (When driving in D1 or D2 )

Battery voltage

When shift solenoid valve B does not
operate. (When driving in D3 or D4 )

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: SFT SOL B/CIRC

Check item
(Possible cause)

Malfunction is detected when ...

TCM detects an improper voltage drop
when it tires to operate the solenoid valve.

: P0755

●

Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted)

●

Shift solenoid valve B

With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.

AT-316

SAT014K

DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
[RE4R01A]
2.

●

Drive vehicle in D position and allow the transmission to shift 1
→ 2 → 3 (“GEAR”).

With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

AT
SEF949Y

AT-317

DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
[RE4R01A]

Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B

ECS007NG

WCWA0103E

AT-318

DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
[RE4R01A]

Diagnostic Procedure

ECS007NH

1. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment.
Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector
E72 terminal 1 and ground.
Is resistance approx. 20 - 40Ω?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> 1. Remove control valve assembly.
Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
2. Check the following items:
– Shift solenoid valve B
Refer to AT-320, "SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" .
– Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open

1.
2.
3.

AAT508A

2. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect TCM harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector E72 terminal 1 and TCM harness connector
M77 terminal 12. Refer to wiring diagram.
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is resistance approx. 0Ω?
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

3. CHECK DTC

Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-316, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

AT-319

DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
[RE4R01A]

Component Inspection

ECS007NI

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
●

For removal, refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .

SAT651I

Resistance Check
●

Check resistance between terminal 2 and ground.
Solenoid valve
Shift solenoid valve B

Terminal No.
2

Ground

Resistance (Approx.)
20 - 40Ω

Operation Check
●

Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 2 and ground.

SAT650I

AT-320

DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
[RE4R01A]

DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Description
●

●

PFP:22620

A
ECS007NJ

Throttle position sensor
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position
and sends a signal to the TCM.
Throttle position switch
Consists of a wide open throttle position switch and a closed
throttle position switch. The wide open position switch sends a
signal to the TCM when the throttle valve is open at least 1/2 of
the full throttle position. The closed throttle position switch sends
a signal to the TCM when the throttle valve is fully closed.

D
AAT495A

CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
Throttle position sensor

Condition

Specification

Fully-closed throttle

Approximately 0.5V

Fully-open throttle

Approximately 4V

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
Wire color
Item
No.

BR/W

OR/B

G
Judgement standard (Approx.)

Condition

Closed throttle
position switch
(in throttle position switch)

Wide open throttle position
switch (in throttle
position switch)

When releasing accelerator pedal
after warming up engine. [Refer to
AT-198, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" ]

Battery voltage

When depressing accelerator pedal
after warming up engine.

B/W

Throttle position
sensor (Power
source)

OR/L

Throttle position
sensor

When depressing accelerator pedal
more than half-way after warming up
engine. [Refer to AT-198, "TCM
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
(NO TOOLS)" ]

Battery voltage

When releasing accelerator pedal
after warming up engine.

Throttle position
sensor (Ground)

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

AT-321

Ignition switch ON

4.5 - 5.5V

Ignition switch OFF

When depressing accelerator pedal
slowly after warming up engine.
(Voltage rises gradually in response
to throttle position.)
—

Fully-closed
throttle: 0.5V
Fully-open throttle: 4V
0V

DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
[RE4R01A]
Diagnostic trouble code

Check item
(Possible cause)

Malfunction is detected when ...

: TP SEN/CIRC A/T
TCM receives an excessively low or high
voltage from the sensor.
: P1705

AT-322

●

Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)

●

Throttle position sensor

●

Throttle position switch

DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
[RE4R01A]
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
A

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the
next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT-II.
2. Apply vacuum to the throttle opener, then check the following.
Refer to step 1 and step 2 of AT-198, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" .
1.

Accelerator pedal
condition

THRTL POS SEN

CLOSED THL/SW

W/O THRL/P·SW

Fully released

Less than 4.7V

OFF

Partially
depressed

0.1 - 4.6V

OFF

Fully depressed

More than 1.9 4.6V

OFF

3.
4.

D
SAT014K

SAT971J

If the check result is NG, go to AT-325, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 3
consecutive seconds. Then release accelerator pedal completely.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: Approximately 3V or less
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)
If the check result is NG, go to AT-325, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If the check result is OK, go to following step.

L
SAT014K

●

Maintain the following conditions for at least 3 consecutive seconds. Then release accelerator pedal completely.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
Accelerator pedal: Wide open throttle
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)

With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.

SEF949Y

AT-323

DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
[RE4R01A]

Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS

ECS007NK

WCWA0154E

AT-324

DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
[RE4R01A]

Diagnostic Procedure

ECS007NL

1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM
B
Perform diagnostic test mode II (self-diagnostic results) for engine control. Refer to EC-634 (VG33E only) or
EC-1235 (VG33ER only), “Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”.
OK or NG
AT
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check throttle position sensor circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-743, "DTC P0121 TP SENSOR" (VG33E only) or EC-1350, "DTC P0121 TP SENSOR" (VG33ER only).
D
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “THRTL POS SEN”.

I
SAT614J

Voltage
Fully-closed throttle
Fully-open throttle

: Approximately 0.5V
: Approximately 4V

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 41 and 42 while accelerator pedal is depressed slowly.
Voltage
Fully-closed throttle
valve
Fully-open throttle
valve
(Voltage rises gradually
in response to throttle
position.)

: Approximately 0.5V
: Approximately 4V

AAT474A

OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check harness for short or open between ECM and TCM regarding throttle position sensor circuit.
(Main harness)

AT-325

DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
[RE4R01A]

3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out “CLOSED THL/SW” and “W/O THRL/P-SW” depressing and releasing accelerator pedal.
Check the signal of throttle position switch is indicated properly.

SAT646J

MTBL0011

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Check the following items:
● Throttle position switch
Refer to AT-328, "THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH" .
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and throttle position switch (Main harness)
● Harness for short or open between throttle position switch and TCM (Main harness)

AT-326

DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
[RE4R01A]

4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM connector M77 terminals 16 (BR/W), 17 (OR/B) and ground while depressing, and releasing accelerator pedal slowly. (after warming up engine)

WAT337

5. CHECK DTC

Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-323, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

AT-327

DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
[RE4R01A]

Component Inspection

ECS007NM

THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Closed Throttle Position Switch (Idle position)
●

●

Check continuity between terminals 4 and 5.
Accelerator pedal condition

Continuity

Released

Yes

Depressed

To adjust closed throttle position switch, refer to EC-646, "Basic
Inspection" (VG33E only) or EC-1247, "Basic Inspection"
(VG33ER only).
AAT498A

Wide Open Throttle Position Switch
●

Check continuity between terminals 5 and 6.
Accelerator pedal condition

Continuity

Released

Depressed

Yes

AAT499A

AT-328

DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4R01A]

DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Description

PFP:31940

A
ECS007NN

The overrun clutch solenoid valve is activated by the TCM in
response to signals sent from the PNP switch, overdrive control
switch, vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. The overrun
clutch operation will then be controlled.

D
SAT341H

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
Wire color
Item
No.

L/B

Judgement standard (Approx.)

Condition

Overrun clutch
solenoid valve

When overrun clutch solenoid valve
operates.

Battery voltage

When overrun clutch solenoid valve
does not operate.

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC

Check item
(Possible cause)

Malfunction is detected when ...

TCM detects an improper voltage drop
when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.

: P1760

●

Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)

●

Overrun clutch solenoid valve

AT-329

DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4R01A]
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the
next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve accuracy of
test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
●
●
●
●

SAT014K

With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine.
Accelerate vehicle to a speed of more than 10 km/h (6MPH) in D
position (O/D ON).
Release accelerator pedal completely in D position (O/D OFF).

With GST
1. Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
SEF949Y

AT-330

DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4R01A]

Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV

ECS007NO

WCWA0105E

AT-331

DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4R01A]

Diagnostic Procedure

ECS007NP

1. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment.
Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector
E72 terminal 3 and ground.
Is resistance approx. 20 - 40Ω?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> 1. Remove control valve assembly.
Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
2. Check the following items:
– Overrun clutch solenoid valve
Refer to AT-333, "OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE" .
– Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open

AAT500A

2. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect TCM harness connector.
Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector E72 terminal 3 and TCM harness connector
M77 terminal 20.
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is resistance approx 0Ω?
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

3. CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-330, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

AT-332

DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
[RE4R01A]

Component Inspection

ECS007NQ

OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
●

For removal, refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
B

D
SAT139K

Resistance Check
●

Check resistance between terminal 4 and ground.
Solenoid valve
Overrun clutch solenoid valve

Terminal No.
4

Ground

Resistance (Approx.)

20 - 40Ω

Operation Check
●

Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 4 and ground.

SAT688I

AT-333

DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
[RE4R01A]

DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
PFP:31940
Description

ECS007NR

The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature
and sends a signal to the TCM.

SAT342HA

CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR
MODE

SAT021J

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
Condition
A/T fluid temperature
sensor

Specification (Approx.)

Cold [20°C (68°F)]
↓
Hot [80°C (176°F)]

1.5V
↓
0.5V

2.5kΩ
↓
0.3kΩ

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
Wire color
Item
No.
10

W/R

Power source

W/R

Power source
(Same as No. 10)
or

R/Y

R/B

Judgement standard (Approx.)

Condition

Power source
(Memory backup)

Throttle position
sensor (Ground)

When turning ignition switch to ON.

Battery voltage

When turning ignition switch to OFF.

When turning ignition switch to ON.

Battery voltage

When turning ignition switch to OFF.

Battery voltage

When turning ignition switch to ON.

Battery voltage

—

A/T fluid temperature sensor

AT-334

When ATF temperature is 20°C
(68°F).

1.5V

When ATF temperature is 80°C
(176°F).

0.5V

DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
[RE4R01A]
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN

TCM receives an excessively low or high
voltage from the sensor.

: 8th judgement flicker

Check item
(Possible cause)

Malfunction is detected when ...
●

Harness or connections
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)

●

A/T fluid temperature sensor

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE

SAT014K

After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in D position, vehicle speed higher than 20 km/h
(12 MPH).

I
SAT971J

J
●

Without CONSULT-II
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
K

SAT335HB

AT-335

DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
[RE4R01A]

Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS

ECS007NS

WCWA0155E

AT-336

DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
[RE4R01A]

Diagnostic Procedure

ECS007NT

1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE
1.
2.

Voltage
3.
4.

Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
Check voltage between TCM harness connectors M77, M78 terminals (10, 19, 28) and ground.

: Battery voltage
D

Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Check voltage between TCM terminal 28 and ground.
Voltage

: Battery voltage

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
AAT476A
NG
>> Check the following items:
● Harness for short or open between fuse block J/B harness and TCM terminals (10, 19 and 28)
(Main harness)
● Ignition switch and fuse
Refer toPG-9, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" .

2. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment.
Check resistance between terminals 6 and 7 when A/T is cold
[20°C (68°F)].
Is resistance approx. 2.5kΩ?
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> 1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check the following items:
– A/T fluid temperature sensor
Refer to AT-339, "A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR" .
– Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open

1.
2.
3.

L
AAT502A

AT-337

DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
[RE4R01A]

3. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”.

SAT614J

Voltage
Cold [20°C (68°F)] →
Hot [80°C (176°F)]

: Approximately 1.5V →
0.5V

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 47 and ground while
warming up A/T.
Voltage
Cold [20°C (68°F)] →
Hot [80°C (176°F)]

:
: Approximately 1.5V →
0.5V

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check the following item:
● Harness for short or open between TCM and terminal
cord assembly (Main harness)

AAT503A

4. CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-335, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> ● Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
● If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

AT-338

DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
[RE4R01A]

Component Inspection

ECS007NU

A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
●
●

For removal, refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
Check resistance between terminals 6 and 7 while changing
temperature as shown at left.
Temperature °C (°F)

Resistance (Approx.)

20 (68)

2.5 kΩ

80 (176)

0.3 kΩ

D
AAT485A

AT-339

DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR
[RE4R01A]

DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR
Description

PFP:24814
ECS007NV

The vehicle speed sensor·MTR is built into the speedometer assembly. The sensor functions as an auxiliary device to the revolution sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will then use a signal sent
from the vehicle speed sensor·MTR.

WAT497

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
Wire color
Item
No.

G/B

Judgement standard (Approx.)

Condition

Vehicle speed
sensor

When moving vehicle at 2 to 3 km/h
(1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more.

Voltage varies
between less
than 1V and
more than 4.5V

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR

Check item
(Possible cause)

Malfunction is detected when ...

TCM does not receive the proper voltage
signal from the sensor.

: 2nd judgement flicker

AT-340

●

Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)

●

Vehicle speed sensor

DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR
[RE4R01A]
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
A

CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
If conducting this “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”
again, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5
seconds before continuing.

D
SAT014K

SAT971J

After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
1.
2.

●

With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Start engine and accelerate vehicle from 0 to 25 km/h (0 to 6
MPH).

Without CONSULT-II
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
K

LAT436

AT-341

DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR
[RE4R01A]

Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR

ECS007NW

WCWA0156E

AT-342

DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR
[RE4R01A]

Diagnostic Procedure

ECS007NX

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL.
B

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·MTR” while driving.
Check the value changes according to driving speed.

SAT614J

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M78 terminal
40 and ground while driving at 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m
(3 ft) or more.
Does battery voltage vary between less than 1V and more than
4.5V?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Check the following items:
● Vehicle speed sensor and ground circuit for vehicle
speed sensor. Refer to DI-3, "METERS AND
GAUGES" .
● Harness for short or open between TCM and vehicle
speed sensor (Main harness)

K
AAT504A

2. CHECK DTC
Perform AT-341, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

AT-343

DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR (VG33ER ONLY)
[RE4R01A]

DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR (VG33ER ONLY)
Description

PFP:31935
ECS007NY

The turbine revolution sensor detects input shaft rpm (revolutions
per minute). It is located on the input side of the automatic transmission. The vehicle speed sensor A/T (Revolution sensor) is located on
the output side of the automatic transmission. With the two sensors,
input and output shaft rpms are accurately detected. The result is
optimal shift timing during deceleration and improved shifting.

SAT136K

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal No.

Wire color

Item

Turbine revolution sensor
(Measure in AC
range)

Throttle position
sensor (Ground)

Judgement
standard
(Approx.)

Condition

When engine is running at 1,000 rpm

—

1.2V
Voltage rises
gradually in
response to
engine speed.

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: TURBINE REV

Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM does not receive the proper voltage
signal from the sensor.

: 10th judgement flicker

AT-344

Check item (Possible cause)
●

Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)

●

Turbine revolution sensor

DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR (VG33ER ONLY)
[RE4R01A]
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
A

CAUTION:
●
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
●
If conducting this “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”
again, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5
seconds before continuing.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
1.
2.
3.

With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D”, vehicle speed higher than 40 km/h (25
MPH), engine speed higher than 1,500 rpm, throttle opening
greater than 1.0/8 of the full throttle position and driving for more
than 5 seconds.

No Tools
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D”, vehicle speed higher than 40 km/h (25
MPH), engine speed higher than 1,500 rpm, throttle opening
greater than 1/8 of the full throttle position and driving for more
than 5 seconds.
3. Perform self-diagnosis.
Refer to AT-198, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO
TOOLS)" .

D
SAT014K

SAT971J

K
SAT635I

AT-345

DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR (VG33ER ONLY)
[RE4R01A]

Wiring Diagram — AT — TRSA/T

ECS007NZ

WCWA0157E

AT-346

DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR (VG33ER ONLY)
[RE4R01A]

Diagnostic Procedure

ECS007O0

1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
B

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out the value of “TURBINE REV”. Check the value
changes according to engine speed.

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.

F
SAT740J

Check voltage between TCM harness connector M78 terminal 38 (Y) and ground. (Measure in AC range.)

J
LAT509

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.

2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Check harness for short or open between TCM and turbine revolution sensor.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.

3. CHECK DTC
Perform AT-345, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> GO TO 4.

4. CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminal for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-347

DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR (VG33ER ONLY)
[RE4R01A]

Component Inspection

ECS007O1

TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR
●

Check resistance between terminals 1, 2 and 3.
Terminal No.

Resistance (Approx.)

2.4 - 2.8 kΩ

No continuity

LAT449

AT-348

DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)
[RE4R01A]

DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)
Description

PFP:31036

A
ECS007O2

The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the A/T.

D
SAT574J

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: CONTROL UNIT (RAM)
: CONTROL UNIT (ROM)

Malfunction is detected when ...
●

TCM memory (RAM) or (ROM) is malfunctioning.

Check Items (Possible Cause)
●

TCM

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE

SAT014K

NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5
seconds before conducting the next test.
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
A/T with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine.
3. Run engine for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.

M
SAT971J

AT-349

DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)
[RE4R01A]

Diagnostic Procedure

ECS007O3

1. INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II.
2. Touch “ERASE”.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF for 10 seconds.
4. Perform AT-349, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" .
Is the “CONTROL UNIT (RAM)” or “CONTROL UNIT (ROM)” displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Replace TCM.
No
>> INSPECTION END.

AT-350

DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM)
[RE4R01A]

DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM)
Description

PFP:31036

A
ECS007O4

The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the A/T.

D
SAT574J

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Diagnostic trouble code
: CONT UNIT (EEP ROM)

Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM memory (EEP ROM) is malfunctioning.

Check item (Possible cause)

TCM

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE

I
SAT014K

NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5
seconds before conducting the next test.

With CONSULT-II
Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
A/T with CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine.
3. Run engine for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.

M
SAT971J

AT-351

DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM)
[RE4R01A]

Diagnostic Procedure

ECS007O5

1. INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II.
2. Move selector lever to “R” position.
3. Depress accelerator pedal (Full throttle position).
4. Touch “ERASE”.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF for ten seconds.
Perform AT-351, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" .
Is the “CONT UNIT (EEP ROM)” displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Replace TCM.
No
>> INSPECTION END.

AT-352

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC

PFP:00007

A
ECS007O6

WCWA0171E

AT-353

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

WCWA0110E

AT-354

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]
A

WCWA0158E

AT-355

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On

ECS007O7

SYMPTOM:
●
O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on for about 2 seconds when turning ignition switch to ON.

1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE
1.
2.

Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
Check voltage between TCM harness connectors (M77, M78)
terminals (10, 19, 28) and ground.
Voltage

3.
4.

: Battery voltage

Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Check voltage between TCM connector terminal 28
and ground.
Voltage

: Battery voltage

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the following items:
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM (Main harness)
● Refer toAT-246, "Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN" .
● Ignition switch and fuse
Refer to PG-9, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" .

AAT476A

2. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect TCM harness connector.
Check resistance between TCM harness connector M78 terminals (25, 48) and ground. Refer to wiring
diagram.
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is resistance approx. 0Ω?
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> ● Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
● Refer to AT-246, "Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN" .

3. CHECK LAMP CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch to ON position.
Set overdrive control switch to ON position.
Check voltage between TCM harness connector M78 terminal
13 and ground.
Does battery voltage exist?
Yes
>> GO TO 4.
No
>> Check the following items.
● Fuse
● O/D OFF indicator lamp
Refer to DI-25, "WARNING LAMPS" .
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and
O/D OFF indicator lamp (Main harness)
● Refer to PG-9, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" .
● Harness for short or open between O/D OFF indicator lamp and TCM

AT-356

AAT505A

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

4. CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

AT-357

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position

ECS007O8

SYMPTOM:
●
Engine cannot be started with selector lever in P or N position.
●
Engine cannot be started with selector lever in P. Engine can be started with selector lever in D, 2,
1 or R position.

1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit?
Without CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to AT-249, "DTC P0705
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" .
No
>> GO TO 2.

SAT367J

2. CHECK PNP SWITCH INSPECTION
Check for short or open of PNP switch 2-pin connector. Refer to AT393, "PNP Switch" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace PNP switch.

AAT482A

3. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
Check starting system. Refer to SC-9, "STARTING SYSTEM" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-358

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

3. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed

ECS007O9

SYMPTOM:
●
Vehicle moves when it is pushed forward or backward with selector lever in P position.

1. CHECK PARKING COMPONENTS
Check parking components.
Refer to AT-475, "PARKING PAWL COMPONENTS" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.

F
SAT133B

AT-359

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

4. In N Position, Vehicle Moves

ECS007OA

SYMPTOM:
●
Vehicle moves forward or backward when selecting N position.

1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit?
Without CONSULT
Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to AT-249, "DTC P0705
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" .
No
>> GO TO 2.

SAT367J

2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE
Check control linkage. Refer to AT-406, "Manual Control Linkage
Adjustment" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-406, "Manual Control
Linkage Adjustment" .

SAT032G

3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level again.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

AT-360

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> 1. Disassemble A/T.
2. Check the following items:
– Forward clutch assembly
– Overrun clutch assembly
– Reverse clutch assembly

D
SAT171B

5. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

AT-361

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

5. Large Shock. N → R Position

ECS007OB

SYMPTOM:
●
There is large shock when changing from N to R position.

1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to A/T fluid temperature sensor, line pressure solenoid valve or throttle
position sensor circuit?

LAT456

Yes or No
Yes
>> Check damaged circuit. Refer to AT-255, "DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CIRCUIT" , AT-306, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-321, "DTC P1705
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" .
No
>> GO TO 2.

2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-743, "DTC P0121 TP
SENSOR" (VG33E only) or EC-1350, "DTC P0121 TP SENSOR"
(VG33ER only).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace throttle position sensor.

AAT495A

3. CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in D position. Refer to
AT-214, "Line Pressure Test" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402,
"REMOVAL" .
2. Check the following items:
– Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator
valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)
– Line pressure solenoid valve

AT-362

SAT494G

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

4. CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

AT-363

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position

ECS007OC

SYMPTOM:
●
Vehicle does not creep backward when selecting R position.

1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level again.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

2. CHECK STALL TEST
Check stall revolution with selector lever in 1 and R positions.
Refer to AT-496, "Stall Revolution" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
OK in 1 position, NG in R position>>1.Remove
control
valve
assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
2. Check the following items:
– Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator
valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)
– Line pressure solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly
– Torque converter
– Reverse clutch assembly
– High clutch assembly
NG in both 1 and R positions>> GO TO 6.

AT-364

SAT493G

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

3. CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in R position. Refer to
AT-214, "Line Pressure Test" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402,
"REMOVAL" .
2. Check the following items:
– Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator
valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)
– Line pressure solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly

D
SAT494G

4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 6.

J
SAT171B

5. CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

AT-365

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1.
2.
–

–

3.
4.
–
–
–
–
–
–

Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
Check the following items:
Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)
Line pressure solenoid valve
Disassemble A/T.
Check the following items:
Oil pump assembly
Torque converter
Reverse clutch assembly
High clutch assembly
Low & reverse brake assembly
Low one-way clutch
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-366

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position

ECS007OD

SYMPTOM:
●
Vehicle does not creep forward when selecting D, 2 or 1 position.

1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level again.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Refill ATF.

SAT638A

2. CHECK STALL TEST
G

Check stall revolution with selector lever in D position.
Refer to AT-211, "Stall Test" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 6.

J
SAT493G

3. CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in R position.
Refer to AT-214, "Line Pressure Test" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> 1. Remove control valve assembly.
Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
2. Check the following items:
– Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator
valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)
– Line pressure solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
– Oil pump assembly

AT-367

SAT494G

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 6.

SAT171B

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1.
2.
–

–

3.
4.
–
–
–
–
–
–

Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
Check the following items:
Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)
Line pressure solenoid valve
Disassemble A/T.
Check the following items:
Oil pump assembly
Forward clutch assembly
Forward one-way clutch
Low one-way clutch
Low & reverse brake assembly
Torque converter
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-368

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1

ECS007OE

SYMPTOM:
●
Vehicle cannot be started from D1 on Cruise Test — Part 1.

1. CHECK SYMPTOM
Is “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position” OK?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Go to AT-364, "6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position" .

2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
E

Does self-diagnosis show damage to vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), shift solenoid valve A, B or vehicle speed sensor·MTR after cruise test?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check damaged circuit. Refer to AT-261, "DTC P0720
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-311, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
A" , AT-316, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" ,
or AT-340, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" .
No
>> GO TO 3.

SAT934FB

3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
I

Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-743, "DTC P0121 TP
SENSOR" (VG33E only) or EC-1350, "DTC P0121 TP SENSOR"
(VG33ER only).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace throttle position sensor.

L
AAT495A

4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Check line pressure at stall point with selector lever in D position.
Refer to AT-214, "Line Pressure Test" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 8.

SAT494G

AT-369

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 8.

SAT171B

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1.

7. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

AT-370

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Remove control valve assembly.
Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
2. Check the following items:
–
Shift valve A
–
Shift valve B
–
Shift solenoid valve A
–
Shift solenoid valve B
–
Pilot valve
–
Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
–
Forward clutch assembly
–
Forward one-way clutch
–
Low one-way clutch
–
High clutch assembly
–
Torque converter
–
Oil pump assembly
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-371

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2

ECS007OF

SYMPTOM:
●
A/T does not shift from D1 to D2 at the specified speed.
A/T does not shift from D4 to D2 when depressing accelerator pedal fully at the specified speed.

1. CHECK SYMPTOM
Are “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position” and “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ”
OK?
Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Go to AT-367, "7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position" and AT-369, "8. Vehicle
Cannot Be Started From D1" .

2. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit?
Without CONSULT
Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to AT-249, "DTC P0705
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" .
No
>> GO TO 3.

SAT367J

3. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T AND VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR CIRCUIT
Check vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR circuit. Refer to AT-261,
"DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" and AT-340, "DTC VEHICLE
SPEED SENSOR·MTR" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR
circuits.

4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-743, "DTC P0121 TP
SENSOR" (VG33E only) or EC-1350, "DTC P0121 TP SENSOR"
(VG33ER only).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace throttle position sensor.

AAT495A

AT-372

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 8.

D
SAT171B

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Remove control valve. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
Check the following items:
–
Shift valve A
–
Shift solenoid valve A
–
Pilot valve
–
Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.

1.
2.

8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Remove control valve. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
Check the following items:
–
Shift valve A
–
Shift solenoid valve A
–
Pilot valve
–
Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
–
Servo piston assembly
–
Brake band
–
Oil pump assembly
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.

1.
2.

AT-373

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3

ECS007OG

SYMPTOM:
●
A/T does not shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed.

SAT367J

3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-743, "DTC P0121 TP
SENSOR" (VG33E only) or EC-1350, "DTC P0121 TP SENSOR"
(VG33ER only).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace throttle position sensor.

AAT495A

AT-374

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 7.

D
SAT171B

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
Check the following items:
–
Shift valve B
–
Shift solenoid valve B
–
Pilot valve
–
Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.

1.
2.

6. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
Check the following items:
–
Shift valve B
–
Shift solenoid valve B
–
Pilot valve
–
Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
–
Servo piston assembly
–
High clutch assembly
–
Oil pump assembly
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.

1.
2.

AT-375

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4

ECS007OH

SYMPTOM:
●
A/T does not shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed.
●
A/T must be warm before D3 to D4 shift will occur.

2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
With CONSULT
Does self-diagnosis, after Cruise Test, show damage to any of the following circuits?
●
PNP switch
●
Overdrive control switch
●
A/T fluid temperature sensor
●
Revolution sensor
●
Shift solenoid valve A or B
●
Vehicle speed sensor
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check damaged circuit. Refer to AT-321, "DTC P1705
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-255, "DTC
P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT"
, AT-261, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T
(REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-311, "DTC P0750
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" , AT-316, "DTC P0755
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" , or AT-340, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" .
No
>> GO TO 3.

SAT363HA

AAT495A

AT-376

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 7.

D
SAT171B

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
Check the following items:
–
Shift valve B
–
Overrun clutch control valve
–
Shift solenoid valve B
–
Pilot valve
–
Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.

1.
2.

6. CHECK SYMPTOM
J

Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
Check the following items:
–
Shift valve B
–
Overrun clutch control valve
–
Shift solenoid valve B
–
Pilot valve
–
Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
–
Servo piston assembly
–
Brake band
–
Torque converter
–
Oil pump assembly
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.

1.
2.

AT-377

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up

ECS007OI

SYMPTOM:
●
A/T does not perform lock-up at the specified speed.

1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit after Cruise Test?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit.
Refer to AT-293, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .
No
>> GO TO 2.

SAT346H

AAT495A

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Remove control valve. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
Check following items:
–
Torque converter clutch control valve
–
Torque converter relief valve
–
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
–
Pilot valve
–
Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
1.
2.

4. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

AT-378

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition

ECS007OJ

SYMPTOM:
●
A/T does not hold lock-up condition for more than 30 seconds.

1. CHECK DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to engine speed signal circuit
after Cruise Test?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check engine speed signal circuit. Refer to AT-266,
"DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" .
No
>> GO TO 2.

SAT347H

2. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
G

1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 5.

J
SAT171B

3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
Check the following items:
–
Torque converter clutch control valve
–
Pilot valve
–
Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.

1.
2.

AT-379

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1.
2.

Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
Check the following items:
–
Torque converter clutch control valve
–
Pilot valve
–
Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check torque converter and oil pump assembly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-380

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

14. Lock-up Is Not Released

ECS007OK

SYMPTOM:
●
Lock-up is not released when accelerator pedal is released.

1. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT
AT

With CONSULT
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to closed throttle position switch circuit?
Without CONSULT
Does self-diagnosis show damage to closed throttle position switch
circuit?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check closed throttle position switch circuit. Refer to AT321, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" .
No
>> GO TO 2.

SAT367J

2. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

AT-381

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )

ECS007OL

SYMPTOM:
●
Engine speed does not smoothly return to idle when A/T shifts from D4 to D3 .
●
Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when turning overdrive control switch OFF.
●
Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when shifting A/T from D to 2 position.

1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to overrun clutch solenoid valve
circuit after Cruise Test?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit. Refer to AT329, "DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE" .
No
>> GO TO 2.

SAT348H

AAT495A

3. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 6.

SAT171B

AT-382

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1.
2.

Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
Check the following items:
–
Overrun clutch control valve
–
Overrun clutch reducing valve
–
Overrun clutch solenoid valve
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.

5. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" .
Check the following items:
–
Overrun clutch control valve
–
Overrun clutch reducing valve
–
Overrun clutch solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
–
Overrun clutch assembly
–
Oil pump assembly
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.

1.
2.

16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1

ECS007OM

SYMPTOM:
●
Vehicle does not start from D1 on Cruise Test — Part 2.
M

1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), shift solenoid valve A, B or vehicle speed sensor·MTR after Cruise Test?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check damaged circuit. Refer to AT-261, "DTC P0720
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-311, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
A" , AT-316, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" ,
or AT-340, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" .
No
>> GO TO 2.
SAT633I

AT-383

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

2. CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> Go to AT-369, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" .
NG
>> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

AT-384

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3 , When Overdrive Control Switch ON → OFF
ECS007ON

SYMPTOM:
●
A/T does not shift from D4 to D3 when changing overdrive control switch to OFF position.
B

1. CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT
AT

With CONSULT
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to overdrive control switch circuit?
Without CONSULT
Does self-diagnosis show damage to overdrive control switch circuit?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check overdrive control switch circuit. Refer to AT-389,
"DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE" .
No
>> Go to AT-374, "10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" .

G
SAT344H

AT-385

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22 , When Selector Lever D → 2 Position

ECS007OO

SYMPTOM:
●
A/T does not shift from D3 to 22 when changing selector lever from D to 2 position.

SAT367J

AT-386

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When Selector Lever 2 → 1 Position

ECS007OP

SYMPTOM:
●
A/T does not shift from 22 to 11 when changing selector lever from 2 to 1 position.

1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
AT

With CONSULT
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit?
Without CONSULT
Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to AT-249, "DTC P0705
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" .
No
>> GO TO 2.

SAT367J

2. CHECK SYMPTOM
H

Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose
connection with harness connector.

K
SAT778B

20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake

ECS007OQ

SYMPTOM:
●
Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when shifting from 22 (12 ) to 11 .

1. CHECK SYMPTOM
Is “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position” OK?
Yes or No
Yes
>> Go to AT-382, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" .
No
>> Go to AT-364, "6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position" .

21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle
Position Switches Circuit Checks)

ECS007OR

SYMPTOM:
●
O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on in TCM self-diagnostic procedure even the lamp circuit
is good.

AT-387

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]
DESCRIPTION
●

PNP switch
The PNP switch assembly includes a transmission range switch.
The transmission range switch detects the selector position and
sends a signal to the TCM.

AAT478A

●

Overdrive control switch
Detects the overdrive control switch position (ON or OFF) and
sends a signal to the TCM.

SAT341I

●

Throttle position switch
Consists of a wide open throttle position switch and a closed
throttle position switch.
The wide open position switch sends a signal to the TCM when
the throttle valve is open at least 1/2 of the full throttle position.
The closed throttle position switch sends a signal to the TCM
when the throttle valve is fully closed.

AAT495A

AT-388

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
NOTE:
The diagnostic procedure includes inspections for the overdrive control and throttle position switch circuits.

1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out P, R, N, D, 2 and 1 position switches moving selector
lever to each position. Check the signal of the selector lever
position is indicated properly.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check the following items:
● PNP switch
Refer to AT-393, "PNP Switch" .
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and
PNP switch (Main harness)
● Harness for short or open between PNP switch and
TCM (Main harness)

G
SAT701J

2. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals (26, 27, 34, 35, 36) and ground while moving selector lever
through each position.
Terminals

Lever Position

P, N

Does battery voltage exist (B) or non-existent (0)?
Yes
>> GO TO 3.
No
>> Check the following items:
● PNP switch
Refer to AT-393, "PNP Switch" .
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch
and PNP switch (Main harness)
● Harness for short or open between PNP switch and
TCM (Main harness)

LAT457

AT-389

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

3. CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out “OVERDRIVE SW”. Check the signal of the overdrive control switch is indicated properly.
(Overdrive control switch ON displayed on CONSULT-II means
overdrive OFF.)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)

SAT645J

Check voltage between TCM harness connector M77 terminal
22 and ground when overdrive control switch is ON and OFF.
Voltage
Switch position ON
Switch position OFF

: Battery voltage
: 1V or less

OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>> GO TO 4.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Check the following items:
● Overdrive control switch
Refer to AT-392, "Overdrive Control Switch" .
● Harness for short or open between TCM and overdrive control switch (Main harness)
● Harness for short or open of ground circuit for overdrive control switch (Main harness)

AT-390

AAT510A

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
3. Read out “CLOSED THL/SW” and “W/O THRL/P-SW” depressing and releasing accelerator pedal.
Check the signal of throttle position switch is indicated properly.

F
SAT646J

Data Monitor

Accelerator pedal condition

CLOSED THL/SW

W/O THRL/P-SW

Released

OFF

Fully depressed

OFF

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Check the following items:
● Throttle position switch
Refer to AT-394, "Throttle Position Switch" .
● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and throttle position switch (Main harness)
● Harness for short or open between throttle position switch and TCM (Main harness)

AT-391

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]

5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals (16, 17) and ground while depressing, and releasing accelerator
pedal slowly. (after warming up engine).

WAT337

6. CHECK DTC
Perform diagnostic procedure. Refer to AT-389, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

COMPONENT INSPECTION
Overdrive Control Switch
●

Check continuity between terminals 5 and 6.
Continuity
Switch position ON
Switch position OFF

: No
: Yes

AAT512A

AT-392

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]
PNP Switch
1.

Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2 and between terminals 3 and (4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9) while moving manual shaft through
each position.

Lever position
Terminal No.

P
1-2
3-4

R
3-5

N
1-2

3-7

3-8

3-9

3-6

SAT517GB

G
AAT482A

2.
3.

AAT551A

4.
5.
6.

AAT481A

AT-393

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
[RE4R01A]
Throttle Position Switch
Closed Throttle Position Switch (Idle Position)
●
Check continuity between terminals 4 and 5.
Accelerator pedal condition

Continuity

Released

Yes

Depressed

AAT498A

To adjust closed throttle position switch, refer to EC-646
(VG33E only) or EC-1247 (VG33ER only), “Basic Inspection”.
Wide Open Throttle Position Switch
●
Check continuity between terminals 5 and 6.
●

Accelerator pedal condition

Continuity

Released

Depressed

Yes

AAT499A

AT-394

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[RE4R01A]

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Description
●

●

PFP:34950

A
ECS007OS

The mechanical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock:
With the key switch turned to ON, the selector lever cannot be shifted from P (park) to any other position B
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from P to any other position.
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in P.
AT
The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock solenoid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder, respectively.
D

SAT138JA

AT-395

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[RE4R01A]

Wiring Diagram — SHIFT —

ECS007OT

WCWA0112E

AT-396

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[RE4R01A]

Diagnostic Procedure

ECS007OU

A
SYMPTOM 1:
●
Selector lever cannot be moved from P position with key in ON position and brake pedal applied.
●
Selector lever can be moved from P position with key in ON position and brake pedal released.
B
●
Selector lever can be moved from P position when key is removed from key cylinder.
SYMPTOM 2:
●
Ignition key cannot be removed when selector lever is set to P position. It can be removed when AT
selector lever is set to any position except P.
D

1. CHECK KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
Check key interlock cable for damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair key interlock cable. Refer to AT-400, "KEY INTERLOCK CABLE" .

2. CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION
Check selector lever position for damage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check selector lever. Refer to AT-405, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" and AT406, "Manual Control Linkage Adjustment" .

3. CHECK POWER SOURCE
I

Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch (shift lock brake
switch) harness terminal 1 and ground.
Does battery voltage exist?
Yes
>> GO TO 4.
No
>> Check the following items:
● Harness for short or open between battery and ASCD
brake switch (shift lock brake switch) harness terminal
1
● Fuse
● Ignition switch
Refer to PG-9, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" .

AT-397

AAT513A

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[RE4R01A]

4. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (BRAKE SWITCH)
Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
●
Check voltage between A/T device harness connector M35 terminal 2 (GY) and ground.

LAT421

Voltage
Brake pedal depressed
Brake pedal released

: 0V
: Battery voltage

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Check the following items:
● Harness for short or open between A/T device harness connector 2 and ASCD brake switch
(shift lock brake switch) harness connector 2
● ASCD brake switch (shift lock brake switch)
Refer to AT-399, "ASCD BRAKE SWITCH (SHIFT LOCK BRAKE SWITCH)" .

5. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Disconnect A/T device harness connector.
Check continuity between A/T device harness terminal 1 and ground.

AAT515A

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.

6. CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH
Refer to AT-399, "PARK POSITION SWITCH" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Replace park position switch.

AT-398

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
[RE4R01A]

7. CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID

Refer to AT-399, "SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> Replace shift lock solenoid.

8. CHECK SHIFT LOCK OPERATION

1. Reconnect shift lock harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch from OFF to ON” position. (Do not start engine.)
3. Recheck shift lock operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> 1. Perform A/T device input/output signal inspection test.
2. If NG, recheck harness connector connection.

Component Check

ECS007OV

SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
●

Check operation by applying battery voltage between shift lock
solenoid connector terminals 1 and 3.

AAT516A

PARK POSITION SWITCH
●

Check continuity between park position switch harness connector terminal 1 and A/T device harness connector terminal 1.
Condition

Continuity

When selector lever is set in “P” position and selector
lever button is released

Yes

Except above

M
AAT517A

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH (SHIFT LOCK BRAKE SWITCH)
●

Check continuity between ASCD brake switch (shift lock brake
switch) harness connector terminals 1 and 2.
Condition

Continuity

When brake pedal is depressed

When brake pedal is released

Yes

Check ASCD brake switch (shift lock brake switch) after adjusting brake pedal — refer to BR-8, "Adjustment" .
AAT518A

AT-399

KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
[RE4R01A]

KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
Components

PFP:34908
ECS007OW

SAT352I

CAUTION:
●
Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or interference with adjacent parts.
●
After installing key interlock cable to control device, make sure that casing cap and bracket are
firmly secured in their positions. If casing cap can be removed with an external load of less than
39.2 N (4.0 kg, 8.8 lb), replace key interlock cable with new one.

Removal

ECS007OX

Unlock slider from adjuster holder and remove rod from cable.

SAT353I

AT-400

KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
[RE4R01A]

Installation
1.
2.
3.

ECS007OY

Set key interlock cable to steering lock assembly and install lock
plate.
Clamp cable to steering column and fix to control cable with
band.
Set selector lever to P position.

D
SAT354I

Insert interlock rod into adjuster holder.

SAT355I

5.
6.

Install casing cap to bracket.
Move slider in order to fix adjuster holder to interlock rod.

K
SAT356I

AT-401

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
[RE4R01A]

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators

PFP:00000
ECS007OZ

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Drain ATF through drain plug.
Remove exhaust front tube.
Remove oil pan and gasket.
● Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing
bolts.

SAT359I

4.
5.

Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor if necessary.
Remove oil strainer.

SAT073BA

Remove control valve assembly by removing fixing bolts and
disconnecting harness connector.

SAT353B

AT-402

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
[RE4R01A]
Bolt length and location
A

mm (in)
Bolt symbol

B
A

33 (1.30)

45 (1.77)

7.
8.
9.

Remove solenoids and valves from valve body if necessary.
Remove terminal cord assembly if necessary.
Remove accumulator A, B, C and D by applying compressed
air if necessary.
●
Hold each piston with rag.
10. Reinstall any part removed.
●
Always use new sealing parts.
●
Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing bolts.

SAT074BA

Revolution Sensor Replacement

ECS007P0

—4WD MODEL—

J
AAT565A

1.
2.
3.
4.
●

Remove rear engine mounting member from side member while supporting A/T with transfer case with
jack. Tighten rear engine mounting member to the specified torque. Refer to EM-129, "REMOVAL" .
Lower A/T with transfer case as much as possible.
Remove revolution sensor from A/T.
Reinstall any part removed.
Always use new sealing parts.

●

—2WD MODEL—
●

Remove revolution sensor from A/T.
Always use new sealing parts.

SAT661I

AT-403

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
[RE4R01A]

Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement (VG33ER only)
1.
2.
3.
●

ECS007P1

Remove A/T assembly. Refer to AT-407, "Removal" .
Remove turbine revolution sensor from A/T assembly upper
side.
Reinstall any part removed.
Always use new sealing parts.

SAT136K

Rear Oil Seal Replacement

ECS007P2

—4WD MODEL—
1.
2.
3.
●

Remove transfer case from vehicle. Refer to TF-11, "Removal" .
Remove rear oil seal.
Install rear oil seal.
Apply ATF before installing.
Reinstall any part removed.

SAT035E

—2WD MODEL—
1.
2.
3.
–

Remove propeller shaft from vehicle. Refer to PR-8, "Removal
and Installation" .
Remove rear oil seal.
Install rear oil seal.
Apply ATF before installing.
Reinstall any part removed.

SAT662I

AT-404

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
[RE4R01A]

Parking Components Inspection

ECS007P3

—4WD MODEL—
1.
2.
3.

Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove transfer case from vehicle. Refer to TF-11, "Removal" .
Remove A/T control cable bracket from transmission case.

D
AAT564A

4.
5.
6.
7.
●

Support A/T assembly with a jack.
Remove adapter case from transmission case.
Replace parking components if necessary.
Reinstall any part removed.
Always use new sealing parts.

SAT078B

—2WD MODEL—
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
–

Remove propeller shaft from vehicle. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" .
Support A/T assembly with jack.
Remove rear engine mounting member. Tighten rear engine mounting member to the specified torque.
Refer EM-129, "REMOVAL" .
Remove rear extension from transmission case.
Replace parking components if necessary.
Reinstall any part removed.
Always use new sealing parts.

Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

ECS007P4

Remove manual control linkage from manual shaft of A/T
assembly.
Set manual shaft of A/T assembly in N position.
Loosen PNP switch fixing bolts.
Insert pin into adjustment holes in both PNP switch and manual
shaft of A/T assembly as near vertical as possible.
Reinstall any part removed.
Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to AT-393, "PNP Switch" .

SAT081B

AT-405

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
[RE4R01A]

Manual Control Linkage Adjustment

ECS007P5

Move selector lever from P position to 1 position. You should be able
to feel the detents in each position.
If the detents cannot be felt or the pointer indicating the position is
improperly aligned, the linkage needs adjustment.
1. Place selector lever in P position.
2. Loosen lock nuts.

SAT361I

3.
4.

Tighten turn buckle until it aligns with inner cable, pulling selector lever toward R position side without pushing button.
Back off turn buckle 1 turn and tighten lock nuts to the specified
torque.
Lock nut
: 4.4 - 5.9 N·m (0.45 - 0.60 kg-m, 39.1 - 52.1 in-lb)

Move selector lever from P position to 1 position. Make sure that
selector lever can move smoothly.
SAT032G

AT-406

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
[RE4R01A]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal

PFP:00000

A
ECS007P6

—4WD MODEL—
B

G
AAT563A

CAUTION:
When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (OBD)
from the A/T assembly upper side. Be careful not to damage sensor edge.
NOTE:
To prevent oil spills, drain the A/T fluid before removing the A/T assembly, Refer
to MA-38, "Changing A/T Fluid" or insert a plug into the rear oil seal after removing the propeller shaft.
1. Remove battery negative terminal.
2. Remove exhaust front and rear tubes.
3. Remove fluid charging pipe from A/T assembly.
4. Remove oil cooler pipe from A/T assembly.
5. Plug up openings such as the fluid charging pipe hole, etc.
6. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PR-6, "FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT" (front), PR-7, "REAR PROPELLER SHAFT" (rear).
7. Remove transfer control linkage from transfer. Refer to TF-11, "Removal" .
● Insert plug into rear oil seal after removing rear propeller shaft.
● Be careful not to damage spline, sleeve yoke and rear oil seal.
8. Remove A/T control cable from A/T assembly.
9. Disconnect A/T, turbine revolution sensor (VG33ER only) and vehicle speed sensor harness connectors.
10. Remove the starter motor.SC-25, "Removal and Installation" .
11. Remove the gusset and the rear plate securing engine to A/T assembly.
12. Remove bolts securing torque converter to drive plate.
●
Remove the bolts by turning crankshaft.

SAT800C

AT-407

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
[RE4R01A]
13. Support A/T and transfer assembly with a jack.
14. Remove rear engine mounting member from body and A/T
assembly. Refer to EM-129, "REMOVAL" .
15. Remove bolts securing A/T assembly to engine.
16. Lower A/T assembly with transfer.

SAT801C

—2WD MODEL—
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
–

–

7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
–

12.
13.
14.
15.
–
–

16.

Remove battery negative terminal.
Remove exhaust front and rear tubes.
Remove fluid charging pipe from A/T assembly.
Remove oil cooler pipe from A/T assembly.
Plug up openings such as the fluid charging pipe hole, etc.
Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PR-7, "REAR PROPELLER
SHAFT" .
Insert plug into rear oil seal after removing rear propeller
shaft.
SAT663I
Be careful not to damage spline, sleeve yoke and rear oil
seal.
Remove A/T control cable from A/T assembly.
Disconnect A/T, turbine revolution sensor (VG33ER only) and vehicle speed sensor harness connectors.
Remove starter motor.SC-25, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove the gusset and the rear plate securing engine to A/T assembly.
Remove bolts securing torque converter to drive plate.
Remove the bolts by turning crankshaft.
Support A/T assembly with a jack.
Remove rear engine mounting member from body and A/T assembly. Refer to EM-129, "REMOVAL" .
Remove bolts securing A/T assembly to engine.
Pull A/T assembly backwards.
Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.
Secure A/T assembly to a jack.
Lower A/T assembly.

Installation
●

ECS007P7

Drive plate runout
Maximum allowable
runout

: Refer to EM-140, "FLYWHEEL/DRIVE PLATE
RUNOUT" .

If this runout is out of specification, replace drive plate with ring
gear.

SAT977H

AT-408

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
[RE4R01A]
●

When connecting torque converter to transmission, measure
distance “A” to be certain that they are correctly assembled.
Distance “A”
VG33E
VG33ER

: 26.0 mm (1.024 in) or more
: 25.0 mm (0.984 in) or more

AT
SAT017B

D
●
●

Install converter to drive plate.
After converter is installed to drive plate, rotate crankshaft
several turns and check to be sure that transmission
rotates freely without binding.

G
SAT006G

●

Tighten bolts securing transmission.

Bolt No.

Tightening torque
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

Bolt length
“$$$Use Symbol
(litre)$$$”
mm (in)

39 - 49 (4.0 - 5.0, 29 - 36)

47.5 (1.870)

39 - 49 (4.0 - 5.0, 29 - 36)

58.0 (2.283)

29 - 39 (3.0 - 4.0, 22 - 29)

25.0 (0.984)

Gusset to engine

29 - 39 (3.0 - 4.0, 22 - 29)

20.0 (0.787)

SAT553H

●

Reinstall any part removed.

●

Check fluid level in transmission.
Move selector lever through all positions to be sure that transmission operates correctly.
With parking brake applied, rotate engine at idling. Move selector lever through N to D, to 2, to 1 and to R positions. A slight
shock should be felt by hand gripping selector each time transmission is shifted.
Perform road test. Refer to “AT-216, "Road Test" .

●

SAT638A

AT-409

OVERHAUL
[RE4R01A]

OVERHAUL
Components

PFP:00000
ECS007P8

WAT515

AT-410

OVERHAUL
[RE4R01A]
A

WAT499

AT-411

OVERHAUL
[RE4R01A]

Oil Channel

ECS007P9

LCIA0274E

AT-412

OVERHAUL
[RE4R01A]

Locations of Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings

ECS007PA

WAT378

AT-413

OVERHAUL
[RE4R01A]

Disassembly
1.
2.
3.

ECS007PB

Drain ATF through drain plug.
Remove turbine revolution sensor (VG33ER only).
Remove torque converter by holding it firmly and turning while
pulling straight out.

SAT018B

4.
a.
b.
c.

SAT521G

Remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch from transmission
case.

AAT562A

6.
●
●

Remove oil pan.
Always place oil pan straight down so that foreign particles
inside will not move.
Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing bolts.

SAT754I

AT-414

OVERHAUL
[RE4R01A]
7.

Place transmission into Tool with the control valve facing up.
A

AT
SAT522G

●

Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine cause of
malfunction. If the fluid is very dark, smells burned, or contains
foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may
need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates
varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches
to stick and may inhibit pump pressure.
If frictional material is detected, replace radiator after repair
of A/T. Refer to CO-30, "Removal and Installation" .

G
SAT171B

9.
●

Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve and A/T fluid
temperature sensor connectors.
Be careful not to damage connector.

K
AAT561A

10. Remove oil strainer.
a. Remove oil strainer from control valve assembly.
Then remove O-ring from oil strainer.

SAT008B

AT-415

OVERHAUL
[RE4R01A]
b.

Check oil strainer screen for damage.

SAT025B

11. Remove control valve assembly.
a. Straighten terminal clips to free terminal cords then remove terminal clips.

SAT009B

Remove bolts A and B, and remove control valve assembly from
transmission.
Bolt symbol

Length mm (in)

33 (1.30)

45 (1.77)

SAT353B
c.

Remove solenoid connector.
● Be careful not to damage connector.

SAT026B

AT-416

OVERHAUL
[RE4R01A]
d.

Remove manual valve from control valve assembly.
A

SAT127B

12. Remove terminal cord assembly from transmission case while
pushing on stopper.
●
Be careful not to damage cord.
●
Do not remove terminal cord assembly unless it is damaged.

G
SAT128B

13. Remove converter housing from transmission case.
●
Be careful not to scratch converter housing.

K
SAT999A

14. Remove O-ring from input shaft.

SAT995A

AT-417

OVERHAUL
[RE4R01A]
15. Remove oil pump assembly.
a. Attach Tool to oil pump assembly and extract it evenly from
transmission case.

SAT027B

b.
c.

Remove O-ring from oil pump assembly.
Remove traces of sealant from oil pump housing.
● Be careful not to scratch pump housing.

SAT028B

Remove needle bearing and thrust washer from oil pump
assembly.

SAT108B

16. Remove input shaft and oil pump gasket.

SAT988A

AT-418

OVERHAUL
[RE4R01A]
17. Remove brake band and band strut.
a. Loosen lock nut and remove band servo anchor end pin from
transmission case.

AT
SAT029B

Remove brake band and band strut from transmission case.
E

G
SAT986A

Hold brake band in a circular shape with clip.

SAT655

18. Remove front side clutch and gear components.
a. Remove clutch pack (reverse clutch, high clutch and front sun
gear) from transmission case.

SAT030B

b.
c.

Remove front bearing race from clutch pack.
Remove rear bearing race from clutch pack.

SAT113B

AT-419

OVERHAUL
[RE4R01A]
d.

Remove front planetary carrier from transmission case.

SAT031B

e.
f.

Remove front needle bearing from front planetary carrier.
Remove rear bearing from front planetary carrier.

SAT968A

Remove rear sun gear from transmission case.

SAT974A

19. Remove rear extension or adapter case.
a. Remove rear extension or adapter case from transmission case.
b. Remove rear extension or adapter case gasket from transmission case.

SAT716C

AT-420

OVERHAUL
[RE4R01A]
c.

Remove oil seal from adapter case or rear extension.
● Do not remove oil seal unless it is to be replaced.

SAT146GA

d.
e.

Remove revolution sensor from adapter case or rear extension.
Remove O-ring from revolution sensor.
E

G
SAT147G

20. Remove output shaft and parking gear.
a. Remove rear snap ring from output shaft.

SAT960A

b.
c.

Slowly push output shaft all the way forward.
● Do not use excessive force.
Remove snap ring from output shaft.

SAT957A

d.
e.

Remove output shaft and parking gear as a unit from transmission case.
Remove parking gear from output shaft.

SAT109B

AT-421

OVERHAUL
[RE4R01A]
f.

Remove needle bearing from transmission case.

SAT033B

21. Remove rear side clutch and gear components.
a. Remove front internal gear.

SAT954A

Remove bearing race from front internal gear.

SAT110B

Remove needle bearing from rear internal gear.

SAT111B

Remove rear internal gear, forward clutch hub and overrun
clutch hub as a set from transmission case.

SAT951A

AT-422

OVERHAUL
[RE4R01A]
e.
f.

Remove needle bearing from overrun clutch hub.
Remove overrun clutch hub from rear internal gear and forward
clutch hub.

SAT148G

Remove thrust washer from overrun clutch hub.
E

G
SAT036B

Remove forward clutch assembly from transmission case.

SAT037B

22. Remove band servo and accumulator components.
a. Remove band servo retainer from transmission case.

SAT038B

Apply compressed air to oil hole until band servo piston comes
out of transmission case.
● Hold piston with a rag and gradually direct air to oil hole.
Remove return springs.

SAT039B

AT-423

OVERHAUL
[RE4R01A]
d.
e.

Remove springs from accumulator pistons B, C and D.
Apply compressed air to each oil hole until piston comes out.
● Hold piston with a rag and gradually direct air to oil hole.

Identification of accumulator pistons

Identification of oil holes

SAT040BA

Remove O-ring from each piston.

SAT523GA

23. Remove manual shaft components, if necessary.
a. Hold width across flats of manual shaft (outside the transmission
case) and remove lock nut from shaft.

SAT041B

Remove retaining pin from transmission case.

SAT042B

While pushing detent spring down, remove manual plate and
parking rod from transmission case.

SAT935A

AT-424

OVERHAUL
[RE4R01A]
d.

Remove manual shaft from transmission case.
A

SAT043B

Remove spacer and detent spring from transmission case.
E

G
SAT934A

Remove oil seal from transmission case.

SAT044B

AT-425

OIL PUMP
[RE4R01A]

OIL PUMP
Components

PFP:15010
ECS007PC

WAT379

Disassembly
1.

ECS007PD

Loosen bolts in numerical order and remove oil pump cover.

SAT649A

2.
●

Remove rotor, vane rings and vanes.
Inscribe a mark on back of rotor for identification of fore-aft
direction when reassembling rotor. Then remove rotor.

SAT650A

AT-426

OIL PUMP
[RE4R01A]
3.
●

While pushing on cam ring remove pivot pin.
Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing.

AT
SAT651A

4.
●
●

While holding cam ring and spring lift out cam ring spring.
Be careful not to damage oil pump housing.
Hold cam ring spring to prevent it from jumping.

G
SAT652A

Remove cam ring and cam ring spring from oil pump housing.

K
SAT653A

Remove pivot pin from control piston and remove control piston
assembly.

SAT654A

7.
●

Remove oil seal from oil pump housing.
Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing.

SAT655A

AT-427

OIL PUMP
[RE4R01A]

Inspection

ECS007PE

OIL PUMP COVER, ROTOR, VANES, CONTROL PISTON, SIDE SEALS, CAM RING AND FRICTION RING
●

Check for wear or damage.

SAT656A

SIDE CLEARANCES
●

●

Measure side clearances between end of oil pump housing and
cam ring, rotor, vanes and control piston. Measure in at least
four places along their circumferences. Maximum measured values should be within specified positions.
Before measurement, check that friction rings, O-ring, control piston side seals and cam ring spring are removed.
Standard clearance
(Cam ring, rotor, vanes
and control piston)

●

: Refer to AT-500, "Oil
Pump and Low One-way
Clutch" .

If not within standard clearance, replace oil pump assembly
except oil pump cover assembly.

SAT657A

SEAL RING CLEARANCE
●

●

Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove.
Standard clearance

: 0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 0.0098 in)

Wear limit

: 0.25 mm (0.0098 in)

If not within wear limit, replace oil pump cover assembly.

SAT658A

Assembly
1.
●

ECS007PF

Drive oil seal into oil pump housing.
Apply ATF to outer periphery and lip surface.

SAT081E

AT-428

OIL PUMP
[RE4R01A]
2.
a.

Install cam ring in oil pump housing as follows:
Install side seal on control piston.
● Pay attention to its direction — Black surface goes
toward control piston.
● Apply petroleum jelly to side seal.
Install control piston on oil pump.

AT
SAT654A

Install O-ring and friction ring on cam ring.
● Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.
E

G
SAT660A

Assemble cam ring, cam ring spring and spring seat. Install
spring by pushing it against pump housing.

SAT661A

While pushing on cam ring install pivot pin.
L

SAT651A

3.
●

Install rotor, vanes and vane rings.
Pay attention to direction of rotor.

SAT662A

AT-429

OIL PUMP
[RE4R01A]
4.
a.

SAT649A

5.
●

●

Install new seal rings carefully after packing ring grooves with
petroleum jelly. Press rings down into jelly to a close fit.
Seal rings come in two different diameters. Check fit carefully in each groove.
Small dia. seal ring

: No mark

Large dia. seal ring

: Yellow mark in area
shown by arrow

Do not spread gap of seal ring excessively while installing.
It may deform ring.

AT-430

SAT663A

CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]

CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY
Components

PFP:31705

A
ECS007PG

LCIA0275E

AT-431

CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]

Disassembly
1.
a.
b.

ECS007PH

Remove solenoids.
Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve and side plate
from lower body.
Remove O-ring from solenoid.

SAT194B

c.
d.

Remove line pressure solenoid valve from upper body.
Remove O-ring from solenoid.

SAT667A

e.
f.

Remove 3-unit solenoid assembly from upper body.
Remove O-rings from solenoids.

SAT043G

2.
a.
b.

Disassemble upper and lower bodies.
Place upper body face down, and remove bolts, reamer bolts,
side plate and support plates.
Remove lower body and separator plate as a unit from upper
body.
● Be careful not to drop pilot filter, orifice check valve,
spring and steel balls.

SAT195B

AT-432

CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]
c.
d.

Place lower body face down, and remove separator plate.
Remove pilot filter, orifice check valve and orifice check spring.

AT
SAT670A

Check to see that steel balls are properly positioned in upper
body. Then remove them from upper body.
E

G
SAT671A

Inspection

ECS007PI

LOWER AND UPPER BODIES
●

Check to see that there are pins and retainer plates in lower
body.
I

K
SAT672A

●
●

Check to see that there are pins and retainer plates in upper
body.
Be careful not to lose these parts.

SAT673A

AT-433

CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]
●
●

Check to make sure that oil circuits are clean and free from
damage.
Check tube brackets and tube connectors for damage.

SAT674A

SEPARATOR PLATE
●

Make sure that separator plate is free of damage and not
deformed and oil holes are clean.

SAT675A

PILOT FILTER
●

Check to make sure that filter is not clogged or damaged.

SAT676A

TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
●
●

Check that filter is not clogged or damaged.
Measure resistance. Refer to AT-297, "TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" .

SAT149G

LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
●
●

Check that filter is not clogged or damaged.
Measure resistance. Refer to AT-310, "LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" .

AT-434

CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]
3-UNIT SOLENOID ASSEMBLY (OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVES A AND B)
●

Measure resistance of each solenoid. Refer to AT-333, "OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-315, "SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" , AT-320, "SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" .

D
SAT095B

A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
●

Measure resistance. Refer to AT-339, "A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR" .

H
SAT196BA

Assembly
1.
a.

ECS007PJ

Install upper and lower bodies.
Place oil circuit of upper body face up. Install steel balls in their
proper positions.

L
SAT671A

Install reamer bolts from bottom of upper body.
M

SAT681A

AT-435

CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]
c.

Place oil circuit of lower body face up. Install orifice check
spring, orifice check valve and pilot filter.

SAT682A

d.
e.

Install separator plate on lower body.
Install and temporarily tighten support plates, fluid temperature
sensor and tube brackets.

SAT197B

Temporarily assemble lower and upper bodies, using reamer
bolt as a guide.
● Be careful not to dislocate or drop steel balls, orifice
check spring, orifice check valve and pilot filter.

SAT198B

Install and temporarily tighten bolts and tube brackets in their
proper locations.

SAT199BA

AT-436

CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]
Bolt length and location:
Bolt symbol
Bolt length mm (in)

2.
a.

70 (2.76)

50 (1.97)

33 (1.30)

27 (1.06)

Install solenoids.
Attach O-ring and install torque converter clutch solenoid valve
and side plates onto lower body.

SAT200B

b.
c.
3.

Attach O-rings and install 3-unit solenoids assembly onto upper
body.
Attach O-ring and install line pressure solenoid valve onto upper
body.
Tighten all bolts.

H
SAT150G

AT-437

CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY
[RE4R01A]

CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY
Components

PFP:31711
ECS007PK

SAT142J

Apply ATF to all components before their installation.
Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in AT-497, "Return Springs" .

AT-438

CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY
[RE4R01A]

Disassembly
1.

ECS007PL

Remove valves at parallel pins.
● Do not use a magnetic hand.

D
SAT834A

Use a wire paper clip to push out parallel pins.

SAT822A

Remove parallel pins while pressing their corresponding plugs
and sleeves.
● Remove plug slowly to prevent internal parts from jumping out.

K
SAT823A

Place mating surface of valve face down, and remove internal
parts.
● If a valve is hard to remove, place valve body face down
and lightly tap it with a soft hammer.
● Be careful not to drop or damage valves and sleeves.

SAT824A

AT-439

CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY
[RE4R01A]
2.
a.

Remove valves at retainer plates.
Pry out retainer plate with wire paper clip.

SAT825A

Remove retainer plates while holding spring.

SAT826A

Place mating surface of valve face down, and remove internal
parts.
● If a valve is hard to remove, lightly tap valve body with a
soft hammer.
● Be careful not to drop or damage valves, sleeves, etc.

SAT827A

●

4-2 sequence valve and relay valve are located far back in
upper body. If they are hard to remove, carefully push them
out using stiff wire.
Be careful not to scratch sliding surface of valve with
wire.

SAT828A

Inspection

ECS007PM

SAT829A

AT-440

CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY
[RE4R01A]
VALVE SPRINGS
●

Measure free length and outer diameter of each valve spring. Also check for damage or deformation.
Inspection standard

●

: Refer to AT-497, "Return
Springs" .

Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued.

CONTROL VALVES
●

Check sliding surfaces of valves, sleeves and plugs.

Assembly
1.

ECS007PN

Lubricate the control valve body and all valves with ATF. Install
control valves by sliding them carefully into their bores.
● Be careful not to scratch or damage valve body.

SAT830A

Wrap a small screwdriver with vinyl tape and use it to insert
the valves into proper position.
Pressure regulator valve
●
If pressure regulator plug is not centered properly, sleeve cannot
be inserted into bore in upper body. If this happens, use vinyl
tape wrapped screwdriver to center sleeve until it can be
inserted.

●

SAT832A
SAT831A

Turn sleeve slightly while installing.
Accumulator control plug
●
Align protrusion of accumulator control sleeve with notch in plug.
●
Align parallel pin groove in plug with parallel pin, and install
accumulator control valve.
●

SAT833A

Install parallel pins and retainer plates.

SAT834A

AT-441

CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY
[RE4R01A]
● While pushing plug, install parallel pin.
4-2 sequence valve and relay valve
●
Push 4-2 sequence valve and relay valve with wire wrapped in
vinyl tape to prevent scratching valve body. Install parallel pins.

SAT835A
SAT823A

●

Insert retainer plate while pushing spring.

SAT836A

AT-442

CONTROL VALVE LOWER BODY
[RE4R01A]

CONTROL VALVE LOWER BODY
Components

PFP:31713

A
ECS007PO

SAT966I

Apply ATF to all components before their installation.
Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in AT-497, "Return Springs" 9.

AT-443

CONTROL VALVE LOWER BODY
[RE4R01A]

Disassembly
1.
2.

ECS007PP

Remove valves at parallel pins.
Remove valves at retainer plates.
For removal procedures, refer to “DISASSEMBLY” of control
valve upper body.

SAT838A

Inspection

ECS007PQ

VALVE SPRINGS
●

Check each valve spring for damage or deformation. Also measure free length and outer diameter.
Inspection standard

●

: Refer to AT-497, "Return
Springs" .

Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued.

SAT829A

CONTROL VALVES
●

Check sliding surfaces of control valves, sleeves and plugs for damage.

Assembly
●

ECS007PR

Install control valves.
For installation procedures, refer to AT-478, "ASSEMBLY" .

SAT838A

AT-444

REVERSE CLUTCH
[RE4R01A]

REVERSE CLUTCH
Components

PFP:31510

A
ECS007PS

J
LCIA0276E

Disassembly
1.
a.
b.
c.

ECS007PT

Check operation of reverse clutch.
Install seal ring onto oil pump cover and install reverse clutch.
Apply compressed air to oil hole.
Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring.
If retaining plate does not contact snap ring:
● D-ring might be damaged.
● Oil seal might be damaged.
● Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball.

SAT841A

AT-445

REVERSE CLUTCH
[RE4R01A]
2.

Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate, dish plate
and snap ring.

SAT842A

3.
●

Remove snap ring from clutch drum while compressing clutch
spring(s).
Do not expand snap ring excessively.
Remove spring retainer and return spring.

SAT524G

●

Install seal ring onto oil pump cover and install reverse clutch
drum. While holding piston, gradually apply compressed air to
oil hole until piston is removed.
Do not apply compressed air abruptly.
Remove D-ring and oil seal from piston.

SAT844A

Inspection

ECS007PU

REVERSE CLUTCH SNAP RING AND SPRING RETAINER
●

Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.

REVERSE CLUTCH RETURN SPRINGS (VG33E ONLY)
●

Check for deformation or damage. Also measure free length and
outside diameter.
Inspection standard

: Refer to AT-497, "Return
Springs" .

SAT829A

AT-446

REVERSE CLUTCH
[RE4R01A]
REVERSE CLUTCH DRIVE PLATES
●
●

Thickness of drive
plate
Standard value
Wear limit
●

Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
Measure thickness of facing.

: 1.90 - 2.05 mm (0.0748 0.0807 in)
: 1.80 mm (0.0709 in)

If not within wear limit, replace.
SAT845A

REVERSE CLUTCH DISH PLATE
●

Check for deformation or damage.

REVERSE CLUTCH PISTON
●
●
●

Shake piston to assure that balls are not seized.
Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole opposite the return
spring. Make sure there is no air leakage.
Also apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side to
assure that air leaks past ball.

SAT846A

Assembly
1.
●

ECS007PV

Install D-ring and oil seal on piston.
Apply ATF to both parts.

L
SAT847A

2.
●

Install piston assembly by turning it slowly and evenly.
Apply ATF to inner surface of drum.

SAT848A

AT-447

REVERSE CLUTCH
[RE4R01A]
3.

Install return springs and spring retainer (VG33E only) or spring
retainer (VG33ER only).

SAT849A

Install snap ring while compressing clutch springs.

SAT524G

SAT850A

●

5.
6.

Do not align snap ring gap with spring retainer stopper.
Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate.
Install snap ring.

SAT842A

AT-448

REVERSE CLUTCH
[RE4R01A]
7.

Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not
within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate.
Specified clearance
Standard
Allowable limit
Retaining plate

: 0.5 - 0.8 mm (0.020 0.031 in)
: 1.2 mm (0.047 in)
: Refer to AT-498,
"REVERSE CLUTCH" .

AT
SAT852A

Check operation of reverse clutch.
Refer to AT-445, "Disassembly" .
E

G
SAT841A

AT-449

HIGH CLUTCH
[RE4R01A]

HIGH CLUTCH
Components

PFP:31410
ECS007PW

LAT437

Disassembly and Assembly

ECS007PX

Service procedures for high clutch are essentially the same as those
for reverse clutch, with the following exception:

SAT853A

AT-450

HIGH CLUTCH
[RE4R01A]
●

Check of high clutch operation
A

AT
SAT854A

D
●

Removal and installation of return spring
E

G
SAT525G

●

Inspection of high clutch return springs
Inspection standard

: Refer to AT-497, "Return
Springs" .

K
SAT829A

●

Inspection of high clutch drive plate
L

Thickness of drive plate
Standard
: 1.52 - 1.67 mm (0.0598 0.0657 in)
Wear limit
: 1.40 mm (0.0551 in)

SAT845A

AT-451

HIGH CLUTCH
[RE4R01A]
●

Measurement of clearance between retaining plate and snap
ring
Specified clearance
Standard
Allowable limit
VG33E only
VG33ER only
Retaining plate

: 1.8 - 2.2 mm (0.071 0.087 in)
: 2.8 mm (0.110 in)
: 2.2 mm (0.087 in)
: Refer to AT-498, "HIGH
CLUTCH" .

AT-452

SAT858A

FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES
[RE4R01A]

FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES
Components

PFP:31570

A
ECS007PY

LCIA0261E

AT-453

FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES
[RE4R01A]

Disassembly and Assembly

ECS007PZ

Forward and overrun clutches are serviced essentially the same way
as reverse clutch is serviced. However, note the following exceptions.
●
Check of forward clutch operation

SAT860A

●

Check of overrun clutch operation

SAT861A

●

Removal of forward clutch drum
Remove forward clutch drum from transmission case by holding
snap ring.

SAT865A

●

–

Removal of forward clutch and overrun clutch pistons
While holding overrun clutch piston, gradually apply compressed air to oil hole.

SAT862A

AT-454

FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES
[RE4R01A]
–

Remove overrun clutch from forward clutch.
A

AT
SAT863A

D
●

Removal and installation of return springs
E

G
SAT526G

●

Inspection of forward clutch and overrun clutch return springs
Inspection standard

: Refer to AT-497, "Return
Springs" .

K
SAT829A

●

Inspection of forward clutch drive plates
L

Thickness of drive plate
Standard
: 1.52 - 1.67 mm (0.0598 - 0.0657 in)
Wear limit
: 1.40 mm (0.0551 in)

SAT845A

AT-455

FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES
[RE4R01A]
●

Inspection of overrun clutch drive plates
Thickness of drive plate
Standard
: 1.90 - 2.05 mm (0.0748 - 0.0807 in)
Wear limit : 1.80 mm (0.0709 in)

SAT845A

●

–

•

Installation of forward clutch piston and overrun clutch piston
Install forward clutch piston by turning it slowly and evenly.
Apply ATF to inner surface of clutch drum.

SAT866A

•

Align notch in forward clutch piston with groove in forward
clutch drum.

SAT867A

–

•

Install overrun clutch by turning it slowly and evenly.
Apply ATF to inner surface of forward clutch piston.

SAT868A

AT-456

FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES
[RE4R01A]
●

Measurement of clearance between retaining plate and snap
ring of overrun clutch

Specified clearance
Standard
: 1.0 - 1.4 mm (0.039 - 0.055 in)
Allowable limit
: 2.4 mm (0.094 in)
Retaining plate : Refer to AT-499, "FORWARD
CLUTCH" .

AT
SAT869A

●

Measurement of clearance between retaining plate and snap
ring of forward clutch
Specified clearance
Standard
Allowable limit
VG33E only
Model 4FX17 (2WD)
Model 4FX18 (4WD)
VG33ER only
Model 4FX19 (2WD)
Model 4FX20 (4WD)
Retaining plate

: 0.35 - 0.75 mm (0.0138 - 0.0295 in)

: 2.15 mm (0.085 in)
: 2.15 mm (0.085 in)
SAT870A

: 2.15 mm (0.085 in)
: 2.35 mm (0.093 in)
: Refer to AT-499, "FORWARD
CLUTCH" .

AT-457

LOW & REVERSE BRAKE
[RE4R01A]

LOW & REVERSE BRAKE
Components

PFP:31645
ECS007Q0

LAT423

Disassembly
1.
a.
b.
c.

ECS007Q1

Remove snap ring, low and reverse brake drive plates, driven
plates and dish plate.

SAT873A

AT-458

LOW & REVERSE BRAKE
[RE4R01A]
3.
4.
5.

AT
SAT382I

6.
7.

Remove low and reverse brake piston using compressed air.
Remove oil seal and D-ring from piston.

G
SAT876A

Inspection

ECS007Q2

LOW AND REVERSE BRAKE SNAP RING AND SPRING RETAINER
●

Check for deformation, or damage.
I

LOW AND REVERSE BRAKE RETURN SPRINGS
●

Check for deformation or damage. Also measure free length and
outside diameter.
Inspection standard

: Refer to AT-497, "Return
Springs" .

L
SAT829A

LOW AND REVERSE BRAKE DRIVE PLATES
●
●

Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
Measure thickness of facing.
Thickness of drive plate
Standard value
: 1.52 - 1.67 mm (0.0598 0.0657 in)
Wear limit
: 1.40 mm (0.0551 in)

●

If not within wear limit, replace.
SAT845A

AT-459

LOW & REVERSE BRAKE
[RE4R01A]
LOW ONE-WAY CLUTCH INNER RACE
●

Check frictional surface of inner race for wear or damage.

SAT877A

●
●
●

Install a new seal rings onto low one-way clutch inner race.
Be careful not to expand seal ring gap excessively.
Measure seal ring-to-groove clearance.
Inspection standard
Standard value
Allowable limit

●

: 0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 0.0098 in)
: 0.25 mm (0.0098 in)

If not within allowable limit, replace low one-way clutch inner
race.

Assembly
1.
●
●

SAT878A

ECS007Q3

Install needle bearing onto one-way clutch inner race.
Pay attention to its direction — Black surface goes to rear
side.
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SAT112B

2.
●

Install oil seal and D-ring onto piston.
Apply ATF to oil seal and D-ring.

SAT879A

AT-460

LOW & REVERSE BRAKE
[RE4R01A]
3.
●

Install piston by rotating it slowly and evenly.
Apply ATF to inner surface of transmission case.

AT
SAT880A

4.
5.
6.

Install return springs, spring retainer and low one-way clutch
inner race onto transmission case.
Install dish plate, low and reverse brake drive plates, driven
plates and retaining plate.
Install snap ring on transmission case.

G
SAT881A

Check operation of low and reverse brake clutch piston. Refer to
AT-414, "Disassembly" .

K
SAT872A

Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring.
If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate.
Specified clearance
Standard
Allowable limit
VG33E only
VG33ER only
Retaining plate

: 0.8 - 1.1 mm (0.031 0.043 in)
: 2.5 mm (0.098 in)
: 2.7 mm (0.106 in)
: Refer to AT-500, "LOW &
REVERSE BRAKE" .

AT-461

SAT885A

LOW & REVERSE BRAKE
[RE4R01A]
9.
●
●

Install low one-way clutch inner race seal ring.
Apply petroleum jelly to seal ring.
Make sure seal rings are pressed firmly into place and held
by petroleum jelly.

SAT884A

AT-462

FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]

FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM ASSEMBLY
Components

PFP:31571

A
ECS007Q4

D
SAT211GA

Disassembly
1.
2.

ECS007Q5

Remove snap ring from forward clutch drum.
Remove side plate from forward clutch drum.

H
SAT212G

3.
4.

Remove low one-way clutch from forward clutch drum.
Remove snap ring from forward clutch drum.

L
SAT213G

Remove needle bearing from forward clutch drum.

SAT891A

AT-463

FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]

Inspection

ECS007Q6

FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM
●
●

Check spline portion for wear or damage.
Check frictional surfaces of low one-way clutch and needle
bearing for wear or damage.

SAT892A

NEEDLE BEARING AND LOW ONE-WAY CLUTCH
●

Check frictional surface for wear or damage.

SAT893A

Assembly
1.
2.

ECS007Q7

Install needle bearing in forward clutch drum.
Install snap ring onto forward clutch drum.

SAT214G

Install low one-way clutch onto forward clutch drum by pushing
the roller in evenly.

SAT894A

AT-464

FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]
●

Install low one-way clutch with flange facing rearward.
A

AT
SAT895A

4.
5.

Install side plate onto forward clutch drum.
Install snap ring onto forward clutch drum.

G
SAT887A

AT-465

REAR INTERNAL GEAR AND FORWARD CLUTCH HUB
[RE4R01A]

REAR INTERNAL GEAR AND FORWARD CLUTCH HUB
Components

PFP:31450
ECS007Q8

SAT896AA

Disassembly
1.

ECS007Q9

Remove rear internal gear by pushing forward clutch hub forward.

SAT897A

Remove thrust washer from rear internal gear.

SAT898A

AT-466

REAR INTERNAL GEAR AND FORWARD CLUTCH HUB
[RE4R01A]
3.

Remove snap ring from forward clutch hub.
A

AT
SAT899A

Remove end bearing.
E

G
SAT900A

Remove forward one-way clutch and end bearing as a unit from
forward clutch hub.

K
SAT955A

Remove snap ring from forward clutch hub.

SAT901A

AT-467

REAR INTERNAL GEAR AND FORWARD CLUTCH HUB
[RE4R01A]

Inspection

ECS007QA

REAR INTERNAL GEAR AND FORWARD CLUTCH HUB
●
●
●

Check gear for excessive wear, chips or cracks.
Check frictional surfaces of forward one-way clutch and thrust
washer for wear or damage.
Check spline for wear or damage.

SAT902A

SNAP RING AND END BEARING
●

Check for deformation or damage.

SAT903A

Assembly
1.
2.

ECS007QB

Install snap ring onto forward clutch hub.
Install end bearing.

SAT901A

3.
●

4.
5.

Install forward one-way clutch onto clutch hub.
Install forward one-way clutch with flange facing rearward.
Install end bearing.
Install snap ring onto forward clutch hub.

SAT904A

AT-468

REAR INTERNAL GEAR AND FORWARD CLUTCH HUB
[RE4R01A]
6.
●
●

Install thrust washer onto rear internal gear.
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.
Securely insert pawls of thrust washer into holes in rear
internal gear.

AT
SAT906A

Position forward clutch hub in rear internal gear.
E

G
SAT907A

After installing, check to assure that forward clutch hub rotates
clockwise.

K
SAT905A

AT-469

BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]

BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY
Components

PFP:31615
ECS007QC

LCIA0277E

Disassembly
1.
2.
3.

ECS007QD

SAT909A

Remove band servo piston assembly from servo piston retainer
by pushing it forward.

SAT910A

AT-470

BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]
5.

Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing servo
piston spring retainer down, remove E-ring.

AT
SAT911A

Remove servo piston spring retainer, return spring C and piston
stem from band servo piston.
E

G
SAT912A

Remove E-ring from band servo piston.

K
SAT913A

8. Remove servo cushion spring retainer from band servo piston.
9. Remove D-rings from band servo piston.
10. Remove O-rings from servo piston retainer.

SAT914A

AT-471

BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]

Inspection

ECS007QE

PISTONS, RETAINERS AND PISTON STEM
●

Check frictional surfaces for abnormal wear or damage.

SAT915A

RETURN SPRINGS
●

Check for deformation or damage. Measure free length and
outer diameter.
Inspection standard

: Refer to AT-497, "Return
Springs" .

SAT916AA

Assembly
1.
●
●

ECS007QF

Install O-rings onto servo piston retainer.
Apply ATF to O-rings.
Pay attention to position of each O-ring.

SAT917A

Install servo cushion spring retainer onto band servo piston.

SAT918A

AT-472

BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]
3.

Install E-ring onto servo cushion spring retainer.
A

AT
SAT919A

4.
●

Install D-rings onto band servo piston.
Apply ATF to D-rings.

G
SAT920A

Install servo piston spring retainer, return spring C and piston
stem onto band servo piston.

K
SAT912A

Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing servo
piston spring retainer down, install E-ring.

SAT921A

AT-473

BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]
7.

Install band servo piston assembly onto servo piston retainer by
pushing it inward.

SAT922A

8.
●

Install D-ring on O/D band servo piston.
Apply ATF to D-ring.

SAT923A

Install O/D band servo piston onto servo piston retainer by pushing it inward.

SAT924A

AT-474

PARKING PAWL COMPONENTS
[RE4R01A]

PARKING PAWL COMPONENTS
Components

PFP:31991

A
ECS007QG

J
SAT379I

Disassembly
1.
2.
3.

ECS007QH

Slide return spring to the front of adapter case flange.
Remove return spring, pawl spacer and parking pawl from
adapter case.
Remove parking pawl shaft from adapter case.

SAT226H

AT-475

PARKING PAWL COMPONENTS
[RE4R01A]
4.

Remove parking actuator support from adapter case.

SAT228H

AT-476

PARKING PAWL COMPONENTS
[RE4R01A]

Assembly
1.
2.
3.

ECS007QI

Install parking actuator support onto adapter case.
Insert parking pawl shaft into adapter case.
Install return spring, pawl spacer and parking pawl onto parking
pawl shaft.

D
SAT229H

Bend return spring upward and install it onto adapter case.

SAT226H

AT-477

ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]

ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1)
1.
a.

b.
c.

PFP:00000
ECS007QJ

SAT931A

Push oil seal evenly and install it onto transmission case.

SAT932A

Align groove in shaft with drive pin hole, then drive pin into position as shown.

SAT933A

f.
g.

Install detent spring and spacer.
While pushing detent spring down, install manual plate onto
manual shaft.

SAT901E

AT-478

ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]
h.

Install lock nuts onto manual shaft.
A

AT
SAT936A

2.
a.

Install accumulator piston.
Install O-rings onto accumulator piston.
● Apply ATF to O-rings.

G
SAT523GA

Accumulator piston O-rings
Unit: mm (in)
Accumulator

Small diameter end

29 (1.14)

32 (1.26)

45 (1.77)

29 (1.14)

Large diameter end

45 (1.77)

50 (1.97)

45 (1.77)

Install return spring for accumulator A onto transmission case.
Free length of return
spring

: Refer to AT-497, "Return
Springs" .
K

SAT938A

Install accumulator pistons A, B, C and D.
● Apply ATF to transmission case.

SAT939AA

AT-479

ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]
3.
a.

Install band servo piston.
Install return springs onto servo piston.

SAT941A

Install band servo piston onto transmission case.
● Apply ATF to O-ring of band servo piston and transmission case.
Install gasket for band servo onto transmission case.

SAT942A

Install band servo retainer onto transmission case.

SAT940A

4.
a.

Install rear side clutch and gear components.
Place transmission case in vertical position.

SAT943A

Slightly lift forward clutch drum assembly. Then slowly rotate it
clockwise until its hub passes fully over clutch inner race inside
transmission case.

SAT944A

AT-480

ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]
c.

Check to be sure that rotation direction of forward clutch assembly is correct.

SAT945A

Install thrust washer onto front of overrun clutch hub.
Apply petroleum jelly to the thrust washer.
● Insert pawls of thrust washer securely into holes in overrun clutch hub.

●

G
SAT946A

Install overrun clutch hub onto rear internal gear assembly.

SAT947A

Install needle bearing onto rear of overrun clutch hub.
● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SAT948A

Check that overrun clutch hub rotates as shown while holding
forward clutch hub.

SAT949A

AT-481

ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]
h.

Place transmission case into horizontal position.

SAT527G

Install rear internal gear, forward clutch hub and overrun clutch
hub as a unit onto transmission case.

SAT951A

Install needle bearing onto rear internal gear.
● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SAT952A

Install bearing race onto rear of front internal gear.
● Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.
● Securely engage pawls of bearing race with holes in front
internal gear.

SAT953A

Install front internal gear on transmission case.

SAT954A

AT-482

ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]
5.
a.

Install output shaft and parking gear.
Insert output shaft from rear of transmission case while slightly
lifting front internal gear.
● Do not force output shaft against front of transmission
case.

SAT216B

Carefully push output shaft against front of transmission case.
Install snap ring on front of output shaft.
● Check to be sure output shaft cannot be removed in rear
direction.

G
SAT957A

Install needle bearing on transmission case.
● Pay attention to its direction — black side goes to rear.
● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SAT217B

Install parking gear on transmission case.
L

SAT218B

Install snap ring on rear of output shaft.
Check to be sure output shaft cannot be removed in forward direction.

●

SAT960A

AT-483

ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]
6.
a.

Install adapter case or rear extension.
Install oil seal on adapter case or rear extension.
● Apply ATF to oil seal.

SAT157G

b.
c.

Install O-ring on revolution sensor.
● Apply ATF to O-ring.
Install revolution sensor on adapter case or rear extension.

SAT147G

Install rear extension gasket on transmission case.

SAT963A

Install parking rod on transmission case.

SAT964A

AT-484

ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]
f.

Install rear extension or adapter case on transmission case.
A

G
SAT716C

7.
a.

Install front side clutch and gear components.
Install rear sun gear on transmission case.
● Pay attention to its direction.

SAT974A

b.
c.

Make sure needle bearing is on front of front planetary carrier.
● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
Make sure needle bearing is on rear of front planetary carrier.
● Apply petroleum jelly to bearing.
● Pay attention to its direction — Black side goes to front.

SAT967A

While rotating forward clutch drum clockwise, install front planetary carrier on forward clutch drum.

SAT969A

AT-485

ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]
●

Check that portion A of front planetary carrier protrudes
approximately 2 mm (0.08 in) beyond portion B of forward
clutch assembly.

SAT970A

Make sure bearing races are on front and rear of clutch pack.
● Apply petroleum jelly to bearing races.
● Securely engage pawls of bearing races with holes in
clutch pack.

SAT971A

Install clutch pack into transmission case.

SAT973A

Adjustment

ECS007QK

When any parts listed in the following table are replaced, total end play or reverse clutch end play must be
adjusted.
Part name

Total end play

Reverse clutch end play

Transmission case

●

Low one-way clutch inner race

●

Overrun clutch hub

●

Rear internal gear

●

Rear planetary carrier

●

Rear sun gear

●

Front planetary carrier

●

Front sun gear

●

High clutch hub

●

High clutch drum

●

Oil pump cover

●

Reverse clutch drum

—

●

AT-486

ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]
1.

Adjust total end play.
Total end play “T1 ”

: 0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 0.0217 in)

AT
SAT975A

With needle bearing installed, place J34291-1 (bridge), J342912 (legs) and the J34291-5 (gauging cylinder) onto oil pump. The
long ends of legs should be placed firmly on machined surface
of oil pump assembly. The gauging cylinder should rest on top of
the needle bearing. Lock gauging cylinder in place with set
screw.

SAT976A

Install J34291-23 (gauging plunger) into gauging cylinder.
H

J
SAT977A

Install original bearing race inside reverse clutch drum. Place
shim selecting gauge with its legs on machined surface of transmission case (no gasket). Allow gauging plunger to rest on bearing race. Lock gauging plunger in place with set screw.

SAT978A

Remove Tool and use feeler gauge to measure gap between
gauging cylinder and gauging plunger. This measurement
should give exact total end play.
Total end play “T1 ”
●

: 0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 0.0217 in)

If end play is out of specification, decrease or increase thickness of oil pump cover bearing race as necessary.
Available oil pump
cover bearing race

: Refer to AT-501, "Total
End Play" .
SAT979A

AT-487

ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]
2.

Adjust reverse clutch drum end play.
Reverse clutch drum
end play “T2 ”

: 0.55 - 0.90 mm (0.0217 0.0354 in)

SAT980A

Place J34291-1 (bridge), J34291-2 (legs) and J34291-5 (gauging cylinder) on machined surface of transmission case (no gasket). Allow gauging cylinder to rest on front thrust surface of
reverse clutch drum. Lock cylinder in place with set screw.

SAT981A

Install J34291-23 (gauging plunger) into gauging cylinder.

SAT982AA

Install original thrust washer on oil pump. Place shim setting
gauge legs onto machined surface of oil pump assembly. Allow
gauging plunger to rest on thrust washer. Lock plunger in place
with set screw.

SAT983A

Use feeler gauge to measure gap between gauging plunger and
gauging cylinder. This measurement should give you exact
reverse clutch drum end play.
Reverse clutch drum
end play “T2 ”
●

: 0.55 - 0.90 mm (0.0217 0.0354 in)

If end play is out of specification, decrease or increase thickness of oil pump thrust washer as necessary.

SAT984A

AT-488

ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]
Available oil pump
thrust washer

: Refer to AT-501,
"Reverse Clutch Drum
End Play" .

Assembly (2)
1.
a.

ECS007QL

Install brake band and band strut.
Install band strut on brake band.
● Apply petroleum jelly to band strut.

E
SAT985A

Place brake band on periphery of reverse clutch drum, and
insert band strut into end of band servo piston stem.

SAT986A

Install anchor end pin on transmission case. Then, tighten
anchor end pin just enough so that reverse clutch drum (clutch
pack) will not tilt forward.

L
SAT987A

2.
●

Install input shaft on transmission case.
Pay attention to its direction — O-ring groove side is front.
Install gasket on transmission case.

SAT988A

AT-489

ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]
4.
a.
b.

Install oil pump assembly.
Install needle bearing on oil pump assembly.
● Apply petroleum jelly to the needle bearing.
Install selected thrust washer on oil pump assembly.
● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.

SAT989A

Carefully install seal rings into grooves and press them into the
petroleum jelly so that they are a tight fit.

SAT990A

Install O-ring on oil pump assembly.
● Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.

SAT991A

Apply petroleum jelly to mating surface of transmission case and
oil pump assembly.

SAT992A

Install oil pump assembly.
Install two converter housing securing bolts in bolt holes
in oil pump assembly as guides.

●

SAT993A

AT-490

ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]
●

Insert oil pump assembly to the specified position in
transmission, as shown at left.

SAT994A

5.
●

Install O-ring on input shaft.
Apply ATF to O-rings.

G
SAT114B

6.
a.

Install converter housing.
Apply Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent to outer
periphery of bolt holes in converter housing. Refer to GI-42,
"RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS"
.
● Do not apply too much sealant.

K
SAT397C

c.
7.

SAT158G

AT-491

ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]
8.
a.

Adjust brake band.
Tighten anchor end bolt to specified torque.
Anchor end bolt

:
: 4 - 6 N·m (0.4 - 0.6 kg-m,
35 - 52 in-lb)

Back off anchor end bolt two and a half turns.

SAT001B

While holding anchor end pin, tighten lock nut.

SAT002B

9.
a.
b.

SAT115B

10. Install control valve assembly.
a. Install accumulator piston return springs B, C and D.
Free length of return
springs

: Refer to AT-497, "Return
Springs" .

SAT004BA

Install manual valve on control valve.
● Apply ATF to manual valve.

SAT005B

AT-492

ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]
c.
d.

Place control valve assembly on transmission case. Connect
solenoid connector for upper body.
Install connector clip.

SAT006B

e.
f.

Install control valve assembly on transmission case.
Install connector tube brackets and tighten bolts A and B.
● Check that terminal assembly does not catch.
Bolt symbol

mm (in)

33 (1.30)

45 (1.77)

SAT353B

g.
h.

Install O-ring on oil strainer.
● Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.
Install oil strainer on control valve.

SAT221B

Securely fasten terminal harness with clips.

SAT009B

AT-493

ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]
j.

Install torque converter clutch solenoid valve and fluid temperature sensor connectors.

SAT010B

11. Install oil pan.
a. Attach a magnet to oil pan.

SAT011B

b.
c.

12. Install park/neutral position (PNP) switch.
a. Check that manual shaft is in 1 position.
b. Temporarily install park/neutral position (PNP) switch on manual
shaft.
c. Move manual shaft to N.

SAT299I

AT-494

ASSEMBLY
[RE4R01A]
d.

Tighten bolts while inserting 4.0 mm (0.157 in) dia. pin vertically
into locating holes in park/neutral position (PNP) switch and
manual shaft.

AT
SAT014B

G
SAT428DA

Install torque converter while aligning notches and oil pump.

SAT016B

Measure distance A to check that torque converter is in proper
position.
Distance “A”
VG33E only
VG33ER only

: 26.0 mm (1.024 in) or
more
: 25.0 mm (0.984 in) or
more

SAT017B

AT-495

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RE4R01A]

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications

PFP:00030
ECS007QM

VG33E engine

Applied model

VG33ER engine

2WD

4WD

Automatic transmission model

2WD

4WD

4FX19

4FX20

RE4R01A

Transmission model code number

4FX17

4FX18

Stall torque ratio

2.0 : 1

Transmission gear ratio

1st

2.785

2nd

1.545

Top

1.000

O/D

0.694

Reverse

2.272

Recommended fluid

Nissan Matic “D” (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Genuine Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluid (Canada)*1

Fluid capacity

8.3 (8-3/4 US qt,
7-1/4 Imp qt)

8.5

(9 US qt, 7-1/
2 Imp qt)

8.3 (8-3/4 US qt,
7-1/4 Imp qt)

8.5

(9 US qt, 7-1/
2 Imp qt)

*1: Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .

Shift Schedule

ECS007QN

VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS THROTTLE POSITION
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Throttle position

D1 → D2

D2 → D3

D3 → D4

D4 → D3

D3 → D2

D2 → D1

12 → 1 1

VG33E only

47 - 51
(29 - 32)

92 - 100
(57 - 62)

146 - 156
(91 - 97)

141 - 151
(88 - 94)

87 - 95
(54 - 59)

42 - 46
(26 - 29)

43 - 47
(27 - 29)

VG33ER only

49 - 53
(30 - 33)

94 - 102
(58 - 63)

151 - 161
(94 - 100)

147 - 157
(91 - 98)

87 - 95
(54 - 59)

43 - 47
(27 - 29)

54 - 58
(34 - 36)

VG33E only

34 - 38
(21 - 24)

68 - 74
(42 - 46)

132 - 140
(82 - 87)

59 - 67
(37 - 42)

31 - 37
(19 - 23)

10 - 14
(6 - 9)

43 - 47
(27 - 29)

VG33ER only

41 - 45
(25 - 28)

68 - 74
(42 - 46)

121 - 129
(75 - 80)

76 - 84
(47 - 52)

41 - 47
(25 - 29)

11 - 15
(7 - 9)

54 - 58
(34 - 36)

Full throttle

Half throttle

VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING LOCK-UP
Throttle position

VG33E only
Full throttle
VG33ER only

VG33E only
Half throttle
VG33ER only

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

Overdrive control switch
[Shift position]

Lock-up “ON”

Lock-up “OFF”

ON [D4 ]

147 - 155 (91 - 96)

142 - 150 (88 - 93)

OFF [D3 ]

74 - 82 (46 - 51)

71 - 79 (44 - 49)

ON [D4 ]

152 - 160 (94 - 99)

148 -156 (92 - 97)

OFF [D3 ]

86 - 94 (53 - 58)

83 - 91 (52 - 57)

ON [D4 ]

139 - 147 (86 - 91)

84 - 92 (52 - 57)

OFF [D3 ]

74 - 82 (46 - 51)

71 - 79 (44 - 49)

ON [D4 ]

134 - 142 (83 - 88)

103 - 111 (64 - 69)

OFF [D3 ]

86 - 94 (53 - 58)

83 - 91 (52 - 57)

Stall Revolution

ECS007QO

Engine

Stall revolution

VG33E only

2,450 - 2,650

VG33ER only

2,420 - 2,620

AT-496

rpm

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RE4R01A]

Line Pressure

ECS007QP

A
Line pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)

Engine speed
rpm

D, 2 and 1 positions

R position

Idle

422 - 461 (4.3 - 4.7, 61 - 67)

667 - 706 (6.8 - 7.2, 97 - 102)

Stall

1,020 - 1,098 (10.4 - 11.2, 148 - 159)

1,422 - 1,500 (14.5 - 15.3, 206 - 218)

Return Springs

ECS007QQ

Unit: mm (in)
Item
Parts

Upper
body

Control
valve

Lower
body

Part No.*

Free length

Outer diameter

Torque converter relief valve spring

31742-41X23

38.0 (1.496)

9.0 (0.354)

Pressure regulator valve spring

31742-41X24

44.02 (1.7331)

14.0 (0.551)

Pressure modifier valve spring

31742-41X19

31.95 (1.2579)

6.8 (0.268)

—

Accumulator control valve spring

—

Shuttle shift valve D spring

31762-41X01

25.0 (0.984)

7.0 (0.276)

4-2 sequence valve spring

31756-41X00

29.1 (1.146)

6.95 (0.2736)

Shift valve B spring

31762-41X01

25.0 (0.984)

7.0 (0.276)

4-2 relay valve spring

31756-41X00

29.1 (1.146)

6.95 (0.2736)

Shift valve A spring

31762-41X01

25.0 (0.984)

7.0 (0.276)

Overrun clutch control valve spring

31762-41X03

23.6 (0.929)

7.0 (0.276)

31762-41X14
(VG33ER only)
31742-41X20
(VG33E only)

38.9 (1.531)
(VG33ER only)
32.5 (1.280)
(VG33E only)

7.0 (0.276)

Overrun clutch reducing valve spring

Shuttle shift valve S spring

31762-41X04

51.0 (2.008)

5.65 (0.2224)

Pilot valve spring

31742-41X13

25.7 (1.012)

9.0 (0.354)

Lock-up control valve spring

31742-41X22

18.5 (0.728)

13.0 (0.512)

Modifier accumulator piston spring

31742-27X70

31.4 (1.236)

9.8 (0.386)

31756-41X05
(VG33E only)
31756-60X00
(VG33ER only)

25.4 (1.000)
(VG33E only)
29.5 (1.161)
(VG33ER only)

6.75 (0.2657)
(VG33E only)
7.00 (0.2756)
(VG33ER
only)

1st reducing valve spring

3-2 timing valve spring

31742-41X06

23.0 (0.906)

6.7 (0.264)

Servo charger valve spring

31742-41X06

23.0 (0.906)

6.7 (0.264)

31521-41X02
(Assembly)
(VG33E only)
31505-41X07
(Assembly)
(VG33ER only)

19.7 (0.7756)
(VG33E only)
—
(VG33ER only)

11.6 (0.457)
(VG33E only)
—
(VG33ER
only)

Reverse clutch

16 pcs
(VG33E only)
1 pc
(VG33ER only)

High clutch

10 pcs

31521-41X03
(Assembly)

24.2 (0.9528)

11.6 (0.457)

Forward clutch (Overrun clutch)

20 pcs

31521-41X04
(Assembly)

35.77 (1.4083)

9.7 (0.382)

Low & reverse brake

18 pcs

31655-41X00
(Assembly)

22.3 (0.878)

11.2 (0.441)

AT-497

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RE4R01A]
Item
Parts

Part No.*

Free length

Outer diameter

Spring A

31605-41X05
(VG33E only)
31605-41X14
(VG33ER only)

45.6 (1.795)
(VG33E only)
47.6 (1.874)
(VG33ER only)

34.3 (1.350)
(VG33E only)
26.5 (1.043)
(VG33ER
only)

Spring B

31605-41X00
(VG33E only)

53.8 (2.118)
(VG33E only)

40.3 (1.587)
(VG33E only)

Spring C

31605-41X01

29.7 (1.169)

27.6 (1.087)

Accumulator A

31605-41X02

43.0 (1.693)

18.0 (0.709)

Accumulator B

31605-41X10
(VG33E only)
31605-4AX03
(VG33ER only)

66.0 (2.598)

20.0 (0.787)

Accumulator C

31605-41X09

45.0 (1.772)

29.3 (1.154)

Accumulator D

31605-41X06

58.4 (2.299)

17.3 (0.681)

Band servo

Accumulator

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

Accumulator O-ring

ECS007QR

Diameter mm (in)

Accumulator
A

Small diameter end

29 (1.14)

32 (1.26)

45 (1.77)

29 (1.14)

Large diameter end

45 (1.77)

50 (1.97)

45 (1.77)

Clutches and Brakes

ECS007QS

REVERSE CLUTCH
Code number

4FX17

4FX18

4FX19

Number of drive plates

Number of driven plates

Thickness of drive
plate mm (in)
Clearance mm (in)

Standard

1.90 - 2.05 (0.0748 - 0.0807)

Wear limit

1.80 (0.0709)

Standard

0.5 - 0.8 (0.020 - 0.031)

Allowable limit

Thickness of retaining plate

4FX20

1.2 (0.047)
Thickness mm (in)

Part No.*

Thickness mm (in)

Part No.*

4.8 (0.189)
5.0 (0.197)
5.2 (0.205)
5.4 (0.213)
5.6 (0.220)

31537-42X02
31537-42X03
31537-42X04
31537-42X05
31537-42X06

4.6 (0.181)
4.8 (0.189)
5.0 (0.197)
5.2 (0.205)
5.4 (0.213)

31537-42X20
31537-42X21
31537-42X22
31537-42X23
31537-42X24

4FX19

4FX20

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

HIGH CLUTCH
Code number

4FX17

4FX18

Number of drive plates
Number of driven plates
Thickness of drive
plate mm (in)
Clearance mm (in)

5
5

Standard

1.52 - 1.67 (0.0598 - 0.0657)

Wear limit

1.40 (0.0551)

Standard

1.8 - 2.2 (0.071 - 0.087)

Allowable limit

3.2 (0.126)

AT-498

2.2 (0.087)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RE4R01A]

Thickness of retaining plate

Thickness mm (in)

Part No.*

Thickness mm (in)

Part No.*

3.4 (0.134)
3.6 (0.142)
3.8 (0.150)
4.0 (0.157)
4.2 (0.165)
4.4 (0.173)
4.6 (0.181)
4.8 (0.189)

31537-41X71
31537-41X61
31537-41X62
31537-41X63
31537-41X64
31537-41X65
31537-41X66
31537-41X67

4.0 (0.157)
4.2 (0.165)
4.4 (0.173)
4.6 (0.181)
4.8 (0.189)
5.0 (0.197)

31537-41X63
31537-41X64
31537-41X65
31537-41X66
31537-41X67
31537-41X68

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

FORWARD CLUTCH
Code number

D
4FX17

4FX18

4FX19

4FX20

Number of drive plates

Number of driven plates

Thickness of drive
plate mm (in)
Clearance mm (in)

Standard

1.52 - 1.67 (0.0598 - 0.0657)

Wear limit

1.40 (0.0551)

Standard

0.35 - 0.75 (0.0138 - 0.0295)

Allowable limit

Thickness of retaining plate

2.15 (0.0846)

Thickness
mm (in)

Part
No.*

Thickness
mm (in)

Part
No.*

Thickness
mm (in)

Part
No.*

4.6
(0.181)
4.8
(0.189)
5.0
(0.197)
5.2
(0.205)
5.4
(0.213)
5.6
(0.220)
5.8
(0.228)

3153742X13
3153742X14
3153742X15
315374AX00
315374AX01
315374AX02
315374AX03

4.6
(0.181)
4.8
(0.189)
5.0
(0.197)
5.2
(0.205)
5.4
(0.213)
5.6
(0.220)
5.8
(0.228)

3153742X13
3153742X14
3153742X15
315374AX00
315374AX01
315374AX02
315374AX03

4.6
(0.181)
4.8
(0.189)
5.0
(0.197)
5.2
(0.205)
5.4
(0.213)
5.6
(0.220)
5.8
(0.228)

3153742X13
3153742X14
3153742X15
315374AX00
315374AX01
315374AX02
315374AX03

2.35 (0.0925)
Thickness
mm (in)

Part
No.*

4.0
(0.157)
4.2
(0.165)
4.4
(0.173)
4.6
(0.181)
4.8
(0.189)
5.0
(0.197)
5.2
(0.205)
5.4
(0.213)

3153742X10
3153742X11
3153742X12
3153742X13
3153742X14
3153742X15
315374AX00
315374AX01

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

AT-499

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RE4R01A]
OVERRUN CLUTCH
Code number

4FX17

4FX18

4FX19

Number of drive plates

Number of driven plates

Thickness of drive plate
mm (in)
Clearance mm (in)

Standard

1.90 - 2.05 (0.0748 - 0.0807)

Wear limit

1.80 (0.0709)

Standard

1.0 - 1.4 (0.039 - 0.055)

Allowable limit

4FX20

2.4 (0.094)
Thickness mm (in)

Part No.*

4.2 (0.165)
4.4 (0.173)
4.6 (0.181)
4.8 (0.189)
5.0 (0.197)

31537-41X80
31537-41X81
31537-41X82
31537-41X83
31537-41X84

Thickness of retaining plate

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

LOW & REVERSE BRAKE
Code number

4FX17

4FX18

4FX19

4FX20

Number of drive plates

Number of driven plates

Thickness of drive
plate mm (in)
Clearance mm (in)

Standard

1.52 - 1.67 (0.0598 - 0.0657)

Wear limit

1.40 (0.0551)

Standard

0.8 - 1.1 (0.031 - 0.043)

Allowable limit

Thickness of retaining plate

2.5 (0.098)

2.7 (0.106)

Thickness mm (in)

Part No.*

Thickness mm (in)

Part No.*

6.6 (0.260)
6.8 (0.268)
7.0 (0.276)
7.2 (0.283)
7.4 (0.291)
7.6 (0.299)
7.8 (0.307)
8.0 (0.315)
8.2 (0.323)
8.4 (0.331)
8.6 (0.339)
8.8 (0.346)
9.0 (0.354)

31667-41X17
31667-41X11
31667-41X12
31667-41X13
31667-41X14
31667-41X07
31667-41X08
31667-41X00
31667-41X01
31667-41X02
31667-41X03
31667-41X04
31667-41X05

7.6 (0.299)
7.8 (0.307)
8.0 (0.315)
8.2 (0.323)
8.4 (0.331)
8.6 (0.339)
8.8 (0.346)
9.0 (0.354)
9.2 (0.362)
9.4 (0.370)
9.6 (0.378)

31667-41X07
31667-41X08
31667-41X00
31667-41X01
31667-41X02
31667-41X03
31667-41X04
31667-41X05
31667-41X06
31667-41X09
31667-41X10

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

BRAKE BAND
Anchor end bolt tightening torque

4 - 6 N·m (0.4 - 0.6 kg-m, 35 - 52 in-lb)

Number of returning revolution for anchor end bolt

2.5

Oil Pump and Low One-way Clutch

ECS007QT

Unit: mm (in)

Oil pump clearance

Cam ring — oil pump housing

Standard

0.01 - 0.024 (0.0004 - 0.0009)

Rotor, vanes and control piston — oil
pump housing

Standard

0.03 - 0.044 (0.0012 - 0.0017)

Standard

0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098)

Seal ring clearance

Allowable limit

AT-500

0.25 (0.0098)

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RE4R01A]

Total End Play

ECS007QU

A
Total end play “T1 ”

0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in)

Thickness of oil pump cover bearing race

Thickness mm (in)

Part No.*

0.8 (0.031)
1.0 (0.039)
1.2 (0.047)
1.4 (0.055)
1.6 (0.063)
1.8 (0.071)
2.0 (0.079)

31435-41X01
31435-41X02
31435-41X03
31435-41X04
31435-41X05
31435-41X06
31435-41X07

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

Reverse Clutch Drum End Play

ECS007QV

Reverse clutch drum end play “T2 ”

0.55 - 0.90 mm (0.0217 - 0.0354 in)

Thickness of oil pump thrust washer

Thickness mm (in)

Part No.*

0.9 (0.035)
1.1 (0.043)
1.3 (0.051)
1.5 (0.059)
1.7 (0.067)
1.9 (0.075)

31528-21X01
31528-21X02
31528-21X03
31528-21X04
31528-21X05
31528-21X06

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

Removal and Installation

ECS007QW

Number of returning revolutions for lock
nut
Manual control linkage

2
4.4 - 5.9 N·m (0.45 - 0.60 kg-m, 39.1 - 52.1
in-lb)

Lock nut tightening torque

26.0 mm (1.024 in) or more (VG33E only)
25.0 mm (0.984 in) or more (VG33ER only)

Distance between end of clutch housing and torque converter

Shift Solenoid Valves

ECS007QX

Gear position

Shift solenoid valve A

ON (Closed)

OFF (Open)

ON (Closed)

Shift solenoid valve B

ON (Closed)

OFF (Open)

Solenoid Valves

ECS007QY

Solenoid valves

Resistance (Approx.)

Ω

Terminal No.

Shift solenoid valve A

20 - 40

Shift solenoid valve B

20 - 40

Overrun clutch solenoid valve

20 - 40

Line pressure solenoid valve

2.5 - 5

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

10 - 20

A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor

ECS007QZ

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
Condition
A/T fluid temperature sensor

Specification (Approx.)

Cold [20°C (68°F)]
↓
Hot [80°C (176°F)]

1.5V
↓
0.5V

AT-501

2.5 kΩ
↓
0.3 kΩ

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[RE4R01A]

Turbine Revolution Sensor

ECS007R0

Terminal No.

Resistance (Approx.)

2.4 - 2.8 KΩ

No continuity

Revolution Sensor

ECS007R1

Terminal No.

Resistance (Approx.)

500 - 650Ω

No continuity

Dropping Resistor

ECS007R2

Resistance

Approx. 12Ω

AT-502

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : Yes
Create Date                     : 2003:09:25 22:05:05
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Windows
Title                           : AT.fm
Creator                         : FrameMaker+SGML 5.5.6p145
Modify Date                     : 2003:10:02 16:32:04-04:00
Page Count                      : 502
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Layout                     : OneColumn

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Product Detail Manual AT

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation